OOWWNNEERR''SS MMAANNUUAALL
OOppeerraattiioonn
MMaaiinntteennaannccee
SSppeecciiffiiccaattiioonnss
All information in this Owner’s Manual is current at the time of pub-
lication. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at
any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be
carried out.
This manual applies to all HYUNDAI models and includes descrip-
tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.
As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply
to your specific vehicle.
F2
Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect
the performance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI and may, in addition, violate condi-
tions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in vio-
lation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal
or state agencies.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is
possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely
affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio
manufacturer’s instructions or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precautionary measures or
special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
F3
This manual includes information titled as DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
DANGER indicates a hazardous situa-
tion which, if not avoided, will result
in death or serious injury.
DANGER
WARNING indicates a hazardous situ-
ation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situa-
tion which, if not avoided, could result
in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
NOTICE indicates a situation which, if
not avoided, could result in vehicle
damage.
NOTICE
WARNING
F4
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing HYUNDAI. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of
discriminating people who drive HYUNDAIS. We are very proud of the advanced engineering and high-quality
construction of each HYUNDAI we build.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. To become familiar with
your new HYUNDAI, so that you can fully enjoy it, read this Owner's Manual carefully before driving your new vehicle.
This manual contains important safety information and instructions intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
controls and safety features so you can safely operate your vehicle.
This manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance safe operation of the vehicle. It is
recommended that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
HYUNDAI dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be
required.
This Owner's Manual should be considered a permanent part of your vehicle, and should be kept in the vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time. The manual should stay with the vehicle if you sell it to provide the next owner with
important operating, safety and maintenance information.
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA
Copyright 2016 HYUNDAI Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored
in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI
Motor America.
Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that
do not meet HYUNDAI specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the
specifications listed on Page 8-6 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
CAUTION
F5
1. What are HYUNDAI Genuine
Parts?
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are the
same parts used by HYUNDAI
Motor Company to manufacture
vehicles. They are designed and
tested for the optimum safety, per-
formance, and reliability to our cus-
tomers.
2. Why should you use genuine
parts?
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are engi-
neered and built to meet rigid man-
ufacturing requirements. Damage
caused by using imitation, counter-
feit or used salvage parts is not
covered under the HYUNDAI New
Vehicle Limited Warranty or any
other HYUNDAI warranty.
In addition, any damage to or fail-
ure of HYUNDAI Genuine Parts
caused by the installation or failure
of an imitation, counterfeit or used
salvage part is not covered by any
HYUNDAI Warranty.
3. How can you tell if you are pur-
chasing HYUNDAI Genuine
Parts?
Look for the HYUNDAI Genuine
Parts Logo on the package (see
below).
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts exported
to the U.S. are packaged with
labels written only in English.
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are only
sold through authorized HYUNDAI
Dealerships.
GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS
F6
Introduction
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. To gain an
overview of the contents of your
Owner’s Manual, use the Table of
Contents in the front of the manual.
The first page of each Chapter
includes a detailed Table of Contents
of the Topics in that Chapter.
To quickly locate information about
your vehicle, use the Index in the
back of the manual. It is an alphabet-
ical list of what is in this manual and
the page number where it can be
found.
For your convenience, we have
incorporated tabs on the right-hand
page edges. These tabs are coded
with the Chapter titles to assist you
with navigating through the manual.
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. This Owner’s
Manual provides you with many safe-
ty precautions and operating proce-
dures. This information alerts you to
potential hazards that may hurt you
or others, as well as damage to your
vehicle.
Safety messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
these hazards and what to do to
avoid or reduce the risks.
Warnings and instructions contained
in this manual are for your safety.
Failure to follow safety warnings and
instructions can lead to serious injury
or death.
Throughout this manual DANGER,
WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and
the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL will
be used.
This is the safety alert sym-
bol. It is used to alert you to
potential physical injury haz-
ards. Obey all safety mes-
sages that follow this symbol
to avoid possible injury or
death. The safety alert sym-
bol precedes the signal words
DANGER, WARNING and
CAUTION.
HHOOWW TTOO UUSSEE TTHHIISS MMAANNUUAALL
DANGER indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious
injury.
DANGER
WARNING indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
SSAAFFEETTYY MMEESSSSAAGGEESS
F7
Introduction
FFUUEELL RREEQQUUIIRREEMMEENNTTSS
NOTICE indicates a situation
which, if not avoided, could result
in vehicle damage.
Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-
mize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having an octane
number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research
Octane Number 91) or higher. (Do not
use methanol blended fuels)
To prevent damage to the engine
and engine components, never
add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified.
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for additional information.
Gasoline containing alcohol or
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alco-
hol) are being marketed along with or
instead of leaded or unleaded gaso-
line.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 10% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Either of these fuels may
cause drivability problems and dam-
age to the fuel system, engine con-
trol system and emission control sys-
tem.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
NOTICE
NOTICE
CAUTION indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
could result in minor or moder-
ate injury.
CAUTION
• Do not "top off" after the noz-
zle automatically shuts off
when refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
WARNING
F8
Introduction
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-
prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
percent gasoline, and is manufac-
tured exclusively for use in Flexible
Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compati-
ble with your vehicle. Use of “E85”
may result in poor engine perform-
ance and damage to your vehicle’s
engine and fuel system. HYUNDAI
recommends that customers do not
use fuel with an ethanol content
exceeding 10 percent.
To prevent damage to your vehicle’s
engine and fuel system:
• Never use gasohol which con-
tains methanol.
• Never use gasohol containing
more than 10% ethanol.
• Never use leaded fuel or leaded
gasohol.
• Never use "E85" fuel.
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty does not cover damage
to the fuel system or any perform-
ance problems caused by the use
of "E85" fuel.
Other fuels
Using fuels such as;
- Silicone (Si) contained fuel,
- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and
- Other metallic additives contained
fuels,
may cause damage to the engine by
plugging, misfiring, poor accelera-
tion, engine stalling, catalyst melting,
abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduc-
tion.
- The Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
Damage to the fuel system or per-
formance problem caused by the
use of these fuels may not be cov-
ered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains harmful
manganese-based fuel additives
such as
MMT (
Methylcyclopentadienyl
Manganese Tricarbonyl
)
.
HYUNDAI does not recommend the
use of gasoline containing MMT.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
performance and affect your emis-
sion control system.
The malfunction indicator lamp on
the cluster may come on.
Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
good quality gasolines treated with
detergent additives such as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, which help pre-
vent deposit formation in the engine.
These gasolines will help the engine
run cleaner and enhance performance
of the Emission Control System. For
more information on TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, please go to the
website (www.toptiergas.com).
NOTICE
NOTICE
F9
Introduction
For customers who do not use TOP
Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly,
and have problems starting or the
engine does not run smoothly, addi-
tives that you can buy separately
may be added to the gasoline. If TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is not avail-
able, one bottle of additive added to
the fuel tank at every 7,500 miles or
12 months is recommended.
Additives are available from your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer along
with information on how to use them.
Do not mix other additives.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
No special break-in period is needed.
By following a few simple precautions
for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you
may add to the performance, econo-
my and life of your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is need-
ed to properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
VVEEHHIICCLLEE BBRREEAAKK--IINN PPRROOCCEESSSS
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Items contained in motor vehi-
cles or emitted from them are
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth
defects or reproductive harm.
These include:
• Gasoline and its vapors
• Engine exhaust
• Used engine oil
• Interior passenger compart-
ment components and materi-
als
• Component parts which are
subject to heat and wear
In addition, battery posts, termi-
nals and related accessories
contain lead, lead compounds
and other chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm.
WARNING
F10
Introduction
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety sys-
tems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/ fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was travel-
ing.
These data can help provide a bet-
ter understanding of the circum-
stances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of per-
sonally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investiga-
tion.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
VVEEHHIICCLLEE DDAATTAA CCOOLLLLEECCTTIIOONN AANNDD EEVVEENNTT DDAATTAA RREECCOORRDDEERRSS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety system of your vehicle
Convenient features of your vehicle
Multimedia System
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications, Consumer information and
Reporting safety defects
Index
TABLE OF CONTENTS
F11
I
Index
I
I-2
A/V mode........................................................................3-77
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) .....................3-116
Air bag warning labels....................................................2-68
Air bags...........................................................................2-45
Additional safety precautions.....................................2-67
Air bag collision sensors ............................................2-61
Air bag inflation conditions .......................................2-63
Air bag non-inflation conditions ................................2-64
Air bag warning labels ...............................................2-68
Curtain air bags ..........................................................2-49
Do not install a child restraint on the front
passenger seat...........................................................2-60
Driver’s front air bag..................................................2-47
Driver’s knee air bag..................................................2-47
How does the air bag system operate?.......................2-50
Occupant classification system (OCS).......................2-56
Passenger’s front air bag ............................................2-47
Side air bags ...............................................................2-48
SRS Care ....................................................................2-66
SRS warning light ......................................................2-51
What to expect after an air bag inflates .....................2-55
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a collision ..............2-61
Air cleaner.......................................................................7-32
Air conditioner compressor label ...................................8-10
Air conditioning system (Refrigerant/Compressor) .........8-5
Air ventilation seats ........................................................2-21
Airconditioning system
Automatic climate control system............................3-139
Manual climate control system ................................3-129
Alarm system ..................................................................3-19
Antenna .............................................................................4-2
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .......................................5-40
Appearance care..............................................................7-82
Exterior care ...............................................................7-82
Interior care ................................................................7-87
Armrest ...........................................................................2-14
Auto door lock/unlock features ......................................3-17
Auto hold ........................................................................5-37
Auto light position ........................................................3-109
Automatic climate control system ................................3-139
Air conditioning .......................................................3-146
Automatic heating and air conditioning...................3-140
Climate control air filter...................................3-137, 149
Manual heating and air conditioning .......................3-141
Automatic transmission ..................................................5-14
Manual shift mode......................................................5-17
Automatic transmission shift indicator...........................3-73
Automatic emergency braking (AEB)............................5-81
System setting and activation.....................................5-81
AEB warning message and system control................5-83
Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle
in front (front radar)................................................5-86
System malfunction....................................................5-87
Limitation of the system ............................................5-89
AUX, USB and iPod
®
port ...............................................4-2
Index
A
I-3
Battery.............................................................................7-38
Battery saver function...................................................3-115
Before driving ...................................................................5-4
Blind spot detection system (BSD) ................................5-73
Blind spot mirror.............................................................3-41
Brake fluid ......................................................................7-30
Brake system...................................................................5-28
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)...................................5-40
Auto hold....................................................................5-37
Disc brakes wear indicator ........................................5-29
Electronic parking brake (EPB) .................................5-31
Electronic stability control (ESC) ..............................5-43
Hill-start assist control (HAC) ...................................5-46
Parking brake (Manual)..............................................5-29
Power brakes ..............................................................5-28
Bulb replacement ............................................................7-70
Bulb wattage .....................................................................8-3
Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button..................5-9
California perchlorate notice ..........................................7-93
Capacities (Lubricants) .....................................................8-6
Care
Exterior care ...............................................................7-82
Interior care ................................................................7-87
Tire care......................................................................7-41
Center console storage..................................................3-155
Central door lock switch.................................................3-16
Certification label .............................................................8-9
Chains
Tire chains ..................................................................5-96
Checking tire inflation pressure......................................7-43
Child restraint system (CRS)..........................................2-34
Booster seats...............................................................2-37
Children always in the rear ........................................2-34
Forward-facing child seats ........................................2-37
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS) ................2-37
Lower anchors and tether for children (LATCH)
system.......................................................................2-38
Rear-facing child seats ..............................................2-36
Securing with lap/shoulder belt..................................2-42
Securing with LATCH anchors ..................................2-40
Securing with Tether anchors.....................................2-41
Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS).................2-35
Child-protector rear door lock ........................................3-18
I
Index
B C
I-4
Climate control air filter .......................................3-137, 149
Climate control air filter (Replacement).........................7-34
Clock .............................................................................3-160
Clothes hanger ..............................................................3-161
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ................3-67
Compact spare tire ..........................................................6-20
Consumer information ....................................................8-11
Coolant............................................................................7-27
Cooling fluid, see engine coolant ...................................7-27
Cruise control system .....................................................5-50
Cup holder.....................................................................3-157
Curtain air bags...............................................................2-49
Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel
illumination...................................................................3-69
Dashboard, see instrument cluster ..................................3-67
Day/night rearview mirror ..............................................3-25
Daytime running light...................................................3-116
Defogging (Windshield) ...............................................3-151
Defroster (Rear window) ..............................................3-128
Defrosting (Windshield) ...............................................3-151
Digital speedometer ........................................................3-96
Dimensions .......................................................................8-2
Disc brakes wear indicator ............................................5-29
Display illumination, see instrument panel
illumination...................................................................3-69
Displays, see instrument cluster .....................................3-67
Do not install a child restraint on the front
passenger seat ...............................................................2-60
Door courtesy lamp.......................................................3-120
Door locks.......................................................................3-14
Auto door lock/unlock features..................................3-17
Central door lock switch ............................................3-16
Child-protector rear door lock....................................3-18
Drink holders, see cup holders .....................................3-157
Drive mode integrated control system ...........................5-48
Driver assist system
Rear parking assist system (RPAS)..........................3-125
Rear view camera.....................................................3-124
Driver position memory system ....................................3-20
Driver’s front air bag ......................................................2-47
Driver’s knee air bag ......................................................2-47
Driving at night...............................................................5-94
Driving in flooded areas .................................................5-95
Driving in the rain...........................................................5-95
Dynamic bending light, see AFLS
(Adaptive Front Lighting System)..............................3-116
Index
D
I-5
Ecoshift dual clutch transmission ...................................5-18
Shift indicator.............................................................3-73
Manual shift mode......................................................5-23
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with compass and
HomeLink
®
system.......................................................3-33
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with HomeLink
®
system, compass and Blue Link
®
.................................3-26
Electronic parking brake (EPB)......................................5-31
Electric power steering (EPS).........................................3-22
Electronic stability control (ESC)...................................5-43
Emission control system .................................................7-89
Engine ...............................................................................8-2
Engine compartment..................................................1-6, 7-3
Engine compartment panel fuse .....................................7-59
Engine coolant ................................................................7-27
Engine coolant temperature gauge .................................3-71
Engine number................................................................8-10
Engine oil........................................................................7-24
Engine start/stop button ....................................................5-9
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items.................7-21
Exterior care....................................................................7-82
Exterior overview (front)..................................................1-2
Exterior overview (rear) ...................................................1-3
Flat tire (with spare tire) .................................................6-15
Changing tires ............................................................6-16
Compact spare tire......................................................6-20
Jack and tools .............................................................6-15
Flat tire (with Tire Mobility Kit) ....................................6-23
Floor mat anchor (s) .....................................................3-162
Fluid
Brake fluid..................................................................7-30
Washer fluid ...............................................................7-31
Folding rear seats............................................................2-12
Folding the side view mirrors.........................................3-42
Front seats .........................................................................2-6
Fuel filler lid ...................................................................3-63
Emergency fuel filler door release .............................3-66
Fuel gauge.......................................................................3-72
Fuel requirements .............................................................F-7
Fuse switch .....................................................................7-59
Fuses ...............................................................................7-57
Engine compartment panel fuse.................................7-59
Fuse switch.................................................................7-59
Fuse/relay panel description.......................................7-61
Instrument panel fuse .................................................7-58
Main fuse....................................................................7-60
Multi fuse ...................................................................7-60
I
Index
FE
I-6
Gauges.............................................................................3-70
Glove box......................................................................3-155
Glove box lamp.............................................................3-121
Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts......................................F-5
Hazard warning flasher.....................................................6-2
Hazardous driving conditions .........................................5-93
Head restraints ................................................................2-15
Headlamp bulb replacement ...........................................7-70
Headlamp delay function ..............................................3-115
Headlamp position ........................................................3-110
Heated steering wheel.....................................................3-23
Heater
Automatic climate control system............................3-139
Manual climate control system ................................3-129
High - beam operation ..................................................3-111
Hill-start assist control (HAC)........................................5-46
Hood................................................................................3-56
Horn ................................................................................3-24
How to use this manual ....................................................F-6
If the engine overheats......................................................6-7
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing...................6-2
If the engine stalls while driving ......................................6-2
If the engine will not start.................................................6-3
If you have a flat tire ......................................................6-15
If you have a flat tire while driving..................................6-3
Ignition switch ..................................................................5-6
Engine start/stop button................................................5-9
Key ignition swtich ......................................................5-6
Immobilzer system..........................................................3-12
Improtant safety precautions.............................................2-2
Air bag hazards ............................................................2-2
Always wear your seat belt ..........................................2-2
Control your speed .......................................................2-3
Driver distraction..........................................................2-2
Keep your vehicle in safe condition.............................2-3
Restrain all children .....................................................2-2
In case of emergency while driving..................................6-2
Indicator lights (Instrument cluster) .............................3-104
Information mode ...........................................................3-78
Inside rearview mirror ....................................................3-25
Index
H
IG
I-7
Instrument cluster ...........................................................3-67
Automtice transmission shift indicator ......................3-73
Ecoshift dual clutch transmission shift indicator .......3-73
Gauges ........................................................................3-70
Instrument panel illumination ....................................3-69
LCD display control...................................................3-70
Instrument panel fuse......................................................7-58
Instrument panel overview ...............................................1-5
Interior care.....................................................................7-87
Interior features.............................................................3-157
Clock ........................................................................3-160
Clothes hanger..........................................................3-161
Cup holder ................................................................3-157
Floor mat anchor(s) ..................................................3-162
Luggage net holder...................................................3-163
Power outlet..............................................................3-158
Side curtain...............................................................3-163
Sunvisor....................................................................3-158
Interior lamp AUTO cut................................................3-118
Interior lights.................................................................3-118
Door courtesy lamp ..................................................3-120
Glove box lamp ........................................................3-121
Interior lamp AUTO cut ...........................................3-118
Map lamp..................................................................3-118
Room lamp ...............................................................3-119
Trunk room lamp......................................................3-110
Vanity mirror lamp ...................................................3-121
Interior overview...............................................................1-4
Jack and tools..................................................................6-15
Jack label.........................................................................6-22
Jump starting.....................................................................6-4
Keys
Remote key...................................................................3-4
Smart key......................................................................3-8
Label
Air bag warning labels ...............................................2-68
Jack label ....................................................................6-22
Refrigerant label.........................................................8-10
Tire loading information label..................................5-101
Tire sidewall labeling .................................................7-47
Tire specification and pressure label..........................8-10
Vehicle certification label.............................................8-9
Lane departure warning system (LDWS).......................5-69
LCD display....................................................................3-75
A/V mode ...................................................................3-77
Information mode.......................................................3-78
LCD modes ................................................................3-75
I
Index
J
K
L
I-8
SCC/LDWS mode ......................................................3-77
Trip computer modes..................................................3-76
Turn by turn (TBT) mode ..........................................3-77
User settings mode .....................................................3-80
Warning messages ......................................................3-85
LCD Display Control......................................................3-70
LCD modes .....................................................................3-75
Light..............................................................................3-109
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) ................3-116
Auto light position....................................................3-109
Battery saver function ..............................................3-115
Daytime running light ..............................................3-116
Headlamp delay function..........................................3-115
Headlamp position....................................................3-110
High - beam operation..............................................3-111
Interior lights ............................................................3-118
Parking lamp position...............................................3-110
Smart high beam.......................................................3-111
Turn signals ..............................................................3-114
Light bulbs ......................................................................7-69
Lubricants and capacities..................................................8-6
Luggage net holder .......................................................3-163
Main fuse ........................................................................7-60
Maintenance
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............7-21
Maintenance services ...................................................7-6
Owner maintenance......................................................7-7
Scheduled maintenance service....................................7-9
Tire maintenance ........................................................7-47
Maintenance schedule.......................................................7-9
Maintenance under severe usage conditions..............7-20
Normal maintenance schedule ...................................7-10
Maintenance services........................................................7-6
Manual climate control system.....................................3-129
Air conditioning .......................................................3-134
Climate control air filter...........................................3-137
Heating and air conditioning....................................3-130
Manual shift mode ....................................................5-17, 23
Map lamp ......................................................................3-118
Mirrors ............................................................................3-25
Blind spot mirror ........................................................3-41
Day/night rearview mirror..........................................3-25
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with compass and
HomeLink
®
system ..................................................3-33
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with HomeLink
®
system, compass and Blue Link
®
.............................3-26
Folding the side view mirrors ....................................3-42
Inside rearview mirror................................................3-25
Side view mirrors .......................................................3-42
Reverse parking aid function ....................................3-43
Moonroof, see panorama sunroof...................................3-52
Multi box.......................................................................3-156
Multi fuse........................................................................7-60
Index
M
I-9
Multimedia system............................................................4-2
3.8 Inch Mono TFT....................................................4-17
Antenna ........................................................................4-2
AUX, USB and iPod
®
port ..........................................4-2
Blue Link
®
..................................................................4-54
Steering wheel audio control........................................4-3
Voice recognition........................................................4-46
Occupant classification system (OCS) ...........................2-56
Odometer.........................................................................3-72
Oil (Engine) ....................................................................7-24
Outside temperature gauge .............................................3-73
Owner maintenance ..........................................................7-7
Paddle shifter ..................................................................5-24
Panoramic sunroof ..........................................................3-52
Parking brake ..................................................................7-31
Parking brake (Manual) ..................................................5-29
Parking lamp position ...................................................3-110
Passenger’s front air bag.................................................2-47
Power brakes...................................................................5-28
Power outlet ..................................................................3-158
Power window lock button .............................................3-47
Rear combination light bulb replacement.......................7-76
Rear parking assist system(RPAS) ...............................3-125
Rear seats ........................................................................2-12
Rear view camera .........................................................3-124
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure .....................7-42
Recommended lubricants and capacities..........................8-6
Recommended lubricants and capacities
Recommended SAE viscosity number.........................8-8
Refrigerant label .............................................................8-10
Remote key .......................................................................3-4
Replacement light bulb ...................................................7-69
Reporting safety defects .................................................8-12
Reverse parking aid function..........................................3-43
Rocking the vehicle ........................................................5-93
Room lamp....................................................................3-119
Rotation (Tire) ................................................................7-44
Safety messages................................................................F-6
SCC/LDWS mode...........................................................3-77
Scheduled maintenance service ........................................7-9
I
Index
O
P
R
S
I-10
Seat belts .........................................................................2-22
Additional seat belt safety precautions ......................2-30
Care of seat belts ........................................................2-33
Height adjustment ......................................................2-25
Passenger’s 3-point system with convertible
locking retractor .......................................................2-26
Pre-tensioner seat belt ................................................2-27
Rear center seat belt ..................................................2-30
Seat belt restraint system............................................2-24
Seat belt safety precautions........................................2-22
Seat belt warning light ...............................................2-23
Seat warmers...................................................................2-19
Seatback pockets.............................................................2-12
Seats ..................................................................................2-4
Air ventilation seats....................................................2-21
Armrest.......................................................................2-14
Folding rear seats .......................................................2-12
Front seats ....................................................................2-6
Head restraints............................................................2-15
Rear seats....................................................................2-12
Safety precautions ........................................................2-5
Seat warmers ..............................................................2-19
Seatback pockets ........................................................2-12
Shift lock release.............................................................5-25
Shift lock system.............................................................5-25
Side air bags....................................................................2-48
Side curtain ...................................................................3-163
Side view mirrors............................................................3-42
Smart cruise control system............................................5-54
Smart high beam ...........................................................3-111
Smart key ..........................................................................3-8
Smart trunk .....................................................................3-60
Smooth cornering............................................................5-94
Snow tires .......................................................................5-96
Spare tire
Changing tires ............................................................6-16
Spare tire
Compact spare tire......................................................6-20
Special driving conditions ..............................................5-93
Driving at night ..........................................................5-94
Driving in flooded areas.............................................5-95
Driving in the rain ......................................................5-95
Hazardous driving conditions ....................................5-93
Rocking the vehicle....................................................5-93
Smooth cornering .......................................................5-94
Speedometer....................................................................3-70
Starting difficulties, see engine will not start ...................6-3
Steering wheel.................................................................3-22
Electric power steering (EPS) ....................................3-22
Heated steering wheel ................................................3-23
Horn............................................................................3-24
Telescope steering ......................................................3-23
Tilt steering.................................................................3-23
Steering wheel audio control ............................................4-3
Index
I-11
Storage compartment ....................................................3-155
Center console storage .............................................3-155
Glove box .................................................................3-155
Multi box ..................................................................3-156
Sunglass holder ........................................................3-156
Sunglass holder .............................................................3-156
Sunroof............................................................................3-48
Sunvisor ........................................................................3-158
Tachometer......................................................................3-70
Telescope steering...........................................................3-23
Theft-alarm system .........................................................3-19
Tilt steering .....................................................................3-23
Tire chains.......................................................................5-96
Tire loading information label ......................................5-101
Tire Mobility Kit.............................................................6-23
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ........................6-9
Tire rotation ....................................................................7-44
Tire specification and pressure label ..............................8-10
Tire terminology and defintions .....................................7-51
Tires and wheels .............................................................7-41
All season tires ...........................................................7-54
Checking tire inflation pressure .................................7-43
Low aspect ratio tires .................................................7-55
Radial-ply tires ...........................................................7-55
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ...............7-42
Snow tires...................................................................7-54
Summer tires ..............................................................7-54
Tire care......................................................................7-41
Tire maintenance ........................................................7-47
Tire replacement.........................................................7-45
Tire rotation................................................................7-44
Tire sidewall labeling .................................................7-47
Tire terminology and defintions.................................7-51
Tire traction ................................................................7-46
Wheel alignment and tire balance..............................7-45
Wheel replacement.....................................................7-46
Tires and wheels (Spefification).......................................8-4
Towing ............................................................................6-30
Trailer towing................................................................5-105
Transmission
Automatic transmission..............................................5-14
Ecoshift dual clutch transmission ..............................5-18
Paddle shifter..............................................................5-24
Shift lock release ........................................................5-25
Shift lock system ........................................................5-25
Trip A/B ..........................................................................3-93
Trip computer..................................................................3-92
Digital speedometer....................................................3-96
Fuel Economy ............................................................3-94
Trip A/B......................................................................3-93
Trip computer modes ......................................................3-76
Trunk...............................................................................3-57
Smart trunk.................................................................3-60
I
Index
T
I-12
Trunk room lamp ..........................................................3-120
Turn by turn (TBT) mode...............................................3-77
Turn signals...................................................................3-114
User settings mode..........................................................3-80
Vanity mirror lamp........................................................3-121
Vehicle break-in process...................................................F-9
Vehicle certification label .................................................8-9
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders
(EDR) ...........................................................................F-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)................................8-9
Vehicle load limit..........................................................5-100
Volume and weight ...........................................................8-5
Warning lights (Instrument cluster) ................................3-97
Warning messages (LCD display) ..................................3-85
Washer fluid ....................................................................7-31
Wheel alignment and tire balance ..................................7-45
Wheel replacement .........................................................7-46
Windows .........................................................................3-44
Power window lock button ........................................3-47
Windshield defrosting and defogging...........................3-151
Windshield washers ......................................................3-123
Windshield wipers.........................................................3-122
Winter driving.................................................................5-96
Snow tires...................................................................5-96
Tire chains ..................................................................5-96
Winter precautions......................................................5-98
Winter precautions ..........................................................5-98
Wiper blades ...................................................................7-36
Wipers and washers ......................................................3-122
Windshield washers..................................................3-123
Windshield wipers....................................................3-122
Index
U
V
W
Your vehicle at a glance
1
Your vehicle at a glance
1
Exterior overview (I) .............................................1-2
Exterior overview (II) ............................................1-3
Interior overview....................................................1-4
Instrument panel overview...................................1-5
Engine compartment .............................................1-6
1-2
EEXXTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((II))
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Hood..................................................3-56
2. Headlamp..........................................7-70
3. DRL/Position lamp.............................7-75
4.Tires and wheels ...............................7-41
5. Side view mirrors...............................3-40
6. Sunroof*/Panoramic sunroof*...3-48, 3-52
7. Front windshield wiper blades...........7-36
8.Windows............................................3-44
* : if equipped
OLF014001N
■ Front view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-3
Your vehicle at a glance
EEXXTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((IIII))
1
1. Antenna................................................4-2
2. Doors..................................................3-14
3. Fuel filler door.....................................3-63
4. Rear parking assist system..............3-125
5. Rear combination lamp ......................7-76
6. High mounted stop lamp ....................7-80
7. Rearview camera .............................3-124
8.Trunk...................................................3-57
OLF014002N
■ Rear view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-4
Your vehicle at a glance
IINNTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW
1. Door lock/unlock button ....................3-15
2. Driver position memory system ........3-20
3. Side view mirrors control switch........3-40
4. Central door lock switch ....................3-16
5. Power window switches ....................3-45
6. Power window lock switch ................3-47
7. Hood release lever............................3-56
8. Instrument panel illumination
control switch ....................................3-69
9. Blind spot detection system button*....5-74
10. Lane departure warning system
button* ................................................5-69
11. Fuel filler door opener button..........3-63
12.Trunk release button........................3-59
13. ESC OFF button..............................5-43
14. Fuse box..........................................7-57
15. Steering wheel ................................3-22
16. Steering wheel tilt/telescope lever......3-23
17. Seat ..................................................2-4
18. Brake pedal ....................................5-28
19. Accelerator pedal
* : if equipped
OLF014003N
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW
1-5
Your vehicle at a glance
1
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1. Light control/Turn signals..............3-109
2. Steering wheel audio controls*/
Bluetooth
®
wireless technology
hands-free controls*..........................4-3
3. Instrument cluster ..........................3-63
4. Horn................................................3-24
5. Driver’s front air bag........................2-47
6.Wiper/Washer................................3-122
7. Cruise controls* ..............................5-50
8. Engine Start/Stop button/
Key ignition switch ............................5-6
9. Automatic transmission/
Dual clutch
transmission shifter....................5-14, 5-18
10. Drive mode integrated control
system ..........................................5-48
11. Rear parking assist system ........3-124
12. EPB (Electronic Parking Brake)* ..5-31
13. AUTO HOLD ................................5-37
14. Audio system/Navigation system....4-4
15. Digital Clock................................3-160
16.Climate control system ....3-129, 3-139
17. Power outlet................................3-158
18. AUX, USB and iPod
®
port ..............4-2
19. Passenger’s front air bag..............2-47
20. Glove box....................................3-155
* : if equipped
OLF014004N
1-6
Your vehicle at a glance
EENNGGIINNEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
1. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-27
2. Radiator cap .....................................7-28
3. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-30
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-32
5. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-24
6. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-25
7.Windshield washer fluid reservoir.....7-31
8. Fuse box...........................................7-59
9. Battery ..............................................7-38
OLF014006
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Safety system of your vehicle
Important Safety Precautions..............................2-2
Always Wear Your Seat Belt ..........................................2-2
Restrain All Children.........................................................2-2
Air Bag Hazards.................................................................2-2
Driver Distraction ..............................................................2-2
Control Your Speed...........................................................2-3
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition............................2-3
Seats ........................................................................2-4
Safety Precautions ...........................................................2-5
Front Seats .........................................................................2-6
Rear Seats.........................................................................2-12
Head Restraints ...............................................................2-15
Seat Warmers and Air Ventilation Seats...................2-19
Seat Belts..............................................................2-22
Seat Belt Safety Precautions.......................................2-22
Seat Belt Warning Light ................................................2-23
Seat Belt Restraint System...........................................2-24
Additional Seat Belt Safety Precautions...................2-30
Care of Seat Belts...........................................................2-33
Child Restraint System (CRS).............................2-34
Children Always in the Rear.........................................2-34
Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) .................2-35
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-37
Air Bag -
Advanced Supplemental Restraint System....2-45
Where Are the Air Bags?..............................................2-47
How Does the Air Bag System Operate?..................2-50
What to Expect After an Air Bag Inflates................2-55
Occupant Classification System (OCS).......................2-56
Why Didn’t My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision? (Air bags
are not designed to inflate in every collision.) .......2-61
SRS Care............................................................................2-66
Additional Safety Precautions .....................................2-67
Air Bag Warning Labels.................................................2-68
This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers.
It explains how to properly use your seats and seat belts, and how your air bags work.
Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.
2
2-2
You will find many safety precautions
and recommendations throughout
this section, and throughout this man-
ual.The safety precautions in this sec-
tion are among the most important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of accidents. Air bags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with air bags,
ALWAYS make sure you and your
passengers wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
Restrain All Children
All children under age 13 should ride
in your vehicle properly restrained in
a rear seat, not the front seat.Infants
and small children should be
restrained in an appropriate child
restraint. Larger children should use
a booster seat with the lap/shoulder
belt until they can use the seat belt
properly without a booster seat.
Air Bag Hazards
While air bags can save lives, they
can also cause serious or fatal
injuries to occupants who sit too
close to them, or who are not prop-
erly restrained. Infants, young chil-
dren, and shorter adults are at the
greatest risk of being injured by an
inflating air bag. Follow all instruc-
tions and warnings in this manual.
Driver Distraction
Driver distraction presents a serious
and potentially deadly danger, espe-
cially for inexperienced drivers.Safety
should be the first concern when
behind the wheel and drivers need to
be aware of the wide array of potential
distractions, such as drowsiness,
reaching for objects, eating, personal
grooming, other passengers, and
using cellular phones.
Drivers can become distracted when
they take their eyes and attention off
the road or their hands off the wheel
to focus on activities other than driv-
ing.To reduce your risk of distraction
or getting into an accident:
IIMMPPOORRTTAANNTT SSAAFFEETTYY PPRREECCAAUUTTIIOONNSS
Safety system of your vehicle
2-3
Safety system of your vehicle
• ALWAYS set up your mobile devices
(i.e., MP3 players, phones, naviga-
tion units, etc.) when your vehicle is
parked or safely stopped.
• ONLY use your mobile device when
allowed by laws and when conditions
permit safe use. NEVER text or
email while driving. Most states have
laws prohibiting drivers from texting.
Some states and cities also prohibit
drivers from using handheld phones.
• NEVER let the use of a mobile
device distract you from driving.You
have a responsibility to your passen-
gers and others on the road to
always drive safely, with your hands
on the wheel as well as your eyes
and attention on the road.
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current condi-
tions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical
failure can be extremely hazardous.To
reduce the possibility of such prob-
lems, check your tire pressures and
condition frequently, and perform all
regularly scheduled maintenance.
2
2-4
SSEEAATTSS
Safety system of your vehicle
OLF034001N
Front seats
1. Seat sliding forward or rearward
adjustment
2. Seatback angle adjustment
3. Seat cushion height adjustment
4. Lumbar support adjustment*
5. Seat warmer/Air ventilation seat*
6. Head restraint
Rear seats
7. Seat warmer*
8. Armrest
9. Seatback folding lever (trunk)
10. Head restraint
* : if equipped
Safety Precautions
Adjusting the seats so that you are sit-
ting in a safe, comfortable position
plays an important role in driver and
passenger safety together with the
seat belts and air bags in an accident.
Air bags
You can take steps to reduce the risk
of being injured by an inflating air
bag. Sitting too close to an air bag
greatly increases the risk of injury in
the event the air bag inflates.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) recommends
that drivers allow at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and their chest.
Seat belts
Always fasten your seat belt before
starting any trip.
At all times, passengers should sit
upright and be properly restrained.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in appropriate child restraint
systems.Children who have outgrown
a booster seat and adults must be
restrained using the seat belts.
Do not use a cushion that
reduces friction between the seat
and the passenger. The passen-
ger’s hips may slide under the
lap portion of the seat belt during
an accident or a sudden stop.
Serious or fatal internal injuries
could result because the seat
belt cannot operate properly.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
air bag, take the following pre-
cautions:
• Adjust the driver’s seat as far to
the rear as possible while main-
taining the ability to maintain
full control of the vehicle.
• Adjust the front passenger seat
as far to the rear as possible.
• Hold the steering wheel by the
rim with hands at the 9 o’clock
and 3 o’clock positions to mini-
mize the risk of injuries to your
hands and arms.
• NEVER place anything or any-
one between the steering wheel
and the air bag.
• Do not allow the front passen-
ger to place feet or legs on the
dashboard to minimize the risk
of leg injuries.
WARNING
2-5
Safety system of your vehicle
2
2-6
Safety system of your vehicle
Front Seats
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat belt:
• NEVER use one seat belt for
more than one occupant.
• Always position the seatback
upright with the lap portion of
the seat belt snug and low
across the hips.
• NEVER allow children or small
infants to ride in a passenger’s
lap.
• Do not route the seat belt
across your neck,across sharp
edges, or reroute the shoulder
strap away from your body.
• Do not allow the seat belt to
become caught or jammed.
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat:
• NEVER attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is mov-
ing. The seat could respond
with unexpected movement
and may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an acci-
dent.
• Do not place anything under
the front seats. Loose objects
in the driver’s foot area could
interfere with the operation of
the foot pedals, causing an
accident.
• Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position
and proper locking of the seat-
back.
• Do not place a cigarette lighter
on the floor or seat. When you
operate the seat, gas may exit
out of the lighter causing a fire.
(Continued)
WARNING
To prevent injury:
• Do not adjust your seat while
wearing your seat belt.
Moving the seat cushion for-
ward may cause strong pres-
sure on your abdomen.
• Do not allow your hands or
fingers to get caught in the
seat mechanisms while the
seat is moving.
CAUTION
(Continued)
• Use extreme caution when
picking small objects trapped
under the seats or between
the seat and the center con-
sole.Your hands might be cut
or injured by the sharp edges
of the seat mechanism.
2-7
Safety system of your vehicle
Manual adjustment
Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment
lever and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place. Move
forward and rearward without using
the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its orig-
inal position for the seatback to
lock.)
Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dan-
gerous. Even when buckled up, the
protection of your restraint system
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
2
OLF034003N
OLF034002N
NEVER ride with a reclined
seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of seri-
ous or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
Drivers and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
WARNING
2-8
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you.During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger’s neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
Seat cushion height
To change the height of the seat
cushion:
• Push down on the lever several
times, to lower the seat cushion.
• Pull up on the lever several times,
to raise the seat cushion.
Power adjustment
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the outside of the seat cushion.Before
driving, adjust the seat to the proper
position so that you can easily control
the steering wheel, foot pedals and
controls on the instrument panel.
Safety system of your vehicle
OLF034004N
NEVER allow children in the
vehicle unattended. The power
seats are operable when the
engine is turned off.
WARNING
2-9
Safety system of your vehicle
2
To prevent damage to the seats:
• Always stop adjusting the seats
when the seat has been adjust-
ed as far forward or rearward as
possible.
• Do not adjust the seats longer
than necessary when the engine
is turned off. This may result in
unnecessary battery drain.
• Do not operate two or more
seats at the same time.This may
result in an electrical malfunc-
tion.
Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seat-
back reaches the desired position.
NOTICE
OLF034005N OLF034006N
2-10
Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dan-
gerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you.During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger’s neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
Seat cushion height
To change the height of the seat
cushion:
1. Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or push down to
lower the front part of the seat
cushion.Pull the rear portion of the
control switch up to raise or push
down to lower the seat cushion.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Safety system of your vehicle
NEVER ride with a reclined seat-
back when the vehicle is moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a
collision or sudden stop.
Driver and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
WARNING
OLF034007N
2-11
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Lumbar support
(for driver’s seat, if equipped)
To adjust the lumbar support:
1.Press the front portion of the
switch to increase support or the
rear portion of the switch to
decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reach-
es the desired position.
Lumbar support
(for driver’s seat, if equipped)
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the lumbar support
switch.
• Press the front portion of the
switch (1) to increase support or
the rear portion of the switch (2) to
decrease support.
• Move the support position up and
down by pressing the switch (3) or
(4).
According to the equipped feature, the
lumbar support does not operate up or
down when the lumbar support is in
the rearmost position.
In this case, to use the system, slight-
ly increase support by pushing the
front portion of the switch (1).
OLF034008NOLF034074N
■ Type A ■ Type B
2-12
Safety system of your vehicle
Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front seatbacks.
Rear Seats
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
OLF034022N
To prevent the Occupant
Classification System from mal-
functioning:
Do not hang onto the front pas-
senger’s seatback.
WARNING
• Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down
seatback while the vehicle is
moving. This is not a proper
seating position and no seat
belts are available for use.
This could result in serious
injury or death in case of an
accident or sudden stop.
• Objects carried on the folded
down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of
the front seatbacks. This
could allow cargo to slide for-
ward and cause injury or dam-
age during sudden stops.
WARNING
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pockets.
In an accident they could come
loose from the pocket and
injure occupants.
CAUTION
2-13
Safety system of your vehicle
To fold down the rear seatback:
1. Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
2. Lower the rear head restraints to
the lowest position.
3. Pull on the seatback folding lever
(1) located in the trunk.
4. Fold the seatback toward the front
of the vehicle.
5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull
the seatback rearward. Pull the
seatback firmly until it clicks into
place. Make sure the seatback is
locked in place.
When you return the seatback to
its upright position, always be sure
it has locked into position by push-
ing on the top of the seatback.
2
OLF034025 OLF034024 OLF034027
2-14
Safety system of your vehicle
Armrest
The armrest is located in the center
of the rear seat. Pull the armrest
down by using the strap from the
seatback to use it.
You will find cup holders on the cen-
ter armrest.
Do not place objects in the rear
seats, since they cannot be
properly secured and may hit
vehicle occupants in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
WARNING
Make sure the engine is off, the
shift lever is in P (Park), and the
parking brake is securely applied
whenever loading or unloading
cargo.Failure to take these steps
may allow the vehicle to move if
the shift lever is inadvertently
moved to another position.
WARNING
When returning the rear seat-
back from a folded to an upright
position, hold the seatback and
return it slowly. Ensure that the
seatback is completely locked
into its upright position by
pushing on the top of the seat-
back. In an accident or sudden
stop, the unlocked seatback
could allow cargo to move for-
ward with great force and enter
the passenger compartment,
which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING
OLF034065
2-15
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Head Restraints
The vehicle’s front and rear seats
have adjustable head restraints. The
head restraints provide comfort for
passengers, but more importantly
they are designed to help protect
passengers from whiplash and other
neck and spinal injuries during an
accident, especially in a rear impact
collision.
• Be careful when loading
cargo through the rear pas-
senger seats to prevent dam-
age to the vehicle interior.
• When cargo is loaded through
the rear passenger seats,
ensure the cargo is properly
secured to prevent it from
moving while driving.
• Unsecured cargo in the pas-
senger compartment can
cause damage to the vehicle
or injury to it’s occupants.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death in an accident,
take the following precautions
when adjusting your head
restraints:
• Always properly adjust the
head restraints for all passen-
gers BEFORE starting the
vehicle.
• NEVER let anyone ride in a
seat with the head restraints
removed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
Adjust the head restraints so
the middle of the head
restraints is at the same height
as the height of the top of the
eyes.
• NEVER adjust the head
restraint position of the dri-
ver’s seat when the vehicle is
in motion.
• Adjust the head restraint as
close to the passenger’s head
as possible. Do not use a seat
cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback.
• Make sure the head restraint
locks into position after adjust-
ing it.
WARNING
OLF034072N
2-16
To prevent damage, NEVER hit or
pull on the head restraints.
Front seat head restraints
The vehicle’s front and passenger’s
seats are equipped with adjustable
head restraints for the passengers
safety and comfort.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the head restraint:
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the head restraint:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the head restraint support.
2. Lower the head restraint to the
desired position (3).
NOTICE
Safety system of your vehicle
ODH033105L
OLF034010
2-17
Safety system of your vehicle
2
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the head restraint
and seat cushion raised, the head
restraint may come in contact with
the sunvisor or other parts of the
vehicle.
Removal/Reinstallation
To remove the head restraint:
1. Recline the seatback (2) rearward
using the seatback angle lever/
switch (1).
2. Raise the head restraint as far as it
can go.
3. Press the head restraint release
button (3) and the access hole (4)
with a tool (e.g. pin) while pulling
the head restraint up (5).
NOTICE
OLF034015
OLF034011N
OLF034012N
■ Manual seat
■ Power seat
2-18
Safety system of your vehicle
To reinstall the head restraint:
1. Put the head restraint poles (2) into
the holes while pressing the
release button (1).
2. Adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
3. Recline the seatback (4) forward
using the seatback angle lever/
switch (3).
Rear seat head restraints
The rear seats are equipped with
head restraints in all the seating
positions for the passenger’s safety
and comfort.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the head restraint:
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the head restraint:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the head restraint support.
2. Lower the head restraint to the
desired position (3).
OLF034013N
OLF034014N
■ Manual seat
■ Power seat
ODH034111
OLF034023
2-19
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Removal/Reinstallation
To remove the head restraint:
1. Raise the head restraint as far as
it can go.
2. Press the head restraint release
button (1) while pulling the head
restraint up (2).
To reinstall the head restraint:
1. Put the head restraint poles into
the holes (3) while pressing the
release button (1).
2. Adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
Seat Warmers and
Air Ventilation Seats
Seat warmers (if equipped)
Seat warmers are provided to warm
the seats during cold weather.
To prevent damage to the seat
warmers and seats:
• Never use a solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol
or gasoline to clean the seats.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers.
• Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the seat warmer.
NOTICE
OLF034073N
The seat warmers can cause a
serious burn, even at low tem-
peratures and especially if used
for long periods of time.
Passengers must be able to feel
if the seat is becoming too warm
so they can turn it off, if needed.
People who cannot detect tem-
perature change or pain to the
skin should use extreme cau-
tion, especially the following
types of passengers:
• Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients.
• People with sensitive skin or
who burn easily.
• Fatigued individuals.
• Intoxicated individuals.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• People taking medication that
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness.
NEVER place anything on the
seat that insulates against heat
when the seat warmer is in oper-
ation, such as a blanket or seat
cushion. This may cause the
seat warmer to overheat, caus-
ing a burn or damage to the seat.
WARNING
2-20
Safety system of your vehicle
While the engine is running, push
either of the switches to warm the dri-
ver’s seat or passengers’ seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
• Each time you push the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat
changes as follows :
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
Information
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system turns
off or on automatically depending on
seat temperature.
i
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
OFF → HIGH( ) → LOW( )
→
OLF034070N
OLF034071N
■ Front
• Type A • Type B
• Type A • Type B
■ Front
OLF034028
■ Rear
-
Rear
-
Front
2-21
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Air ventilation seats (if equipped)
The air ventilation seats are provided
to cool the front seats by blowing air
through small vent holes on the sur-
face of the seat cushions and seat-
backs.
When the operation of the air ventila-
tion seats are not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
While the engine is running, push the
switch to cool the driver’s seat or the
front passenger’s seat.
• Each time you push the switch, the
airflow changes as follows:
• The air ventilation seats default to
the OFF position whenever the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
To prevent damage to the air ven-
tilation seat system and seats:
• Use the air ventilation seats
ONLY when the air conditioning
is on. Using the air ventilation
seats for prolonged periods of
time with the air conditioning off
could cause the air ventilation
seats to malfunction.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never use a solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol
or gasoline to clean the seats.
• Avoid spilling liquids on the sur-
face of the front seats and seat-
backs; this may cause the air
vent holes to become blocked
and not work properly.
• Do not place materials such as
plastic bags or newspapers
under the seats.They may block
the air intake causing the air
vents to not work properly.
• Do not change the seat covers.It
may damage the air ventilation
seats.
• If the air vents do not operate,
restart the vehicle. If there is no
change, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
OLF034021
■ Front
■ Front
• Type A
• Type B
OLF034020
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
2-22
Safety system of your vehicle
This section describes how to use the
seat belts properly. It also describes
some of the things not to do when
using seat belts.
Seat Belt Safety Precautions
Always fasten your seat belt and
make sure all passengers have fas-
tened their seat belts before starting
any trip. Air bags are designed to
supplement the seat belt as an addi-
tional safety device, but they are not a
substitute. Most states require all
occupants of a vehicle to wear seat
belts.
SSEEAATT BBEELLTTSS
Seat belts must be used by ALL
passengers whenever the vehi-
cle is moving.Take the following
precautions when adjusting and
wearing seat belts:
• ALWAYS properly restrain
children under age 13 in the
rear seats.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• NEVER allow children to ride
in the front passenger seat. If
a child age 13 or older must be
seated in the front seat, move
the seat as far back as possi-
ble and properly restrain them
in the seat.
• NEVER allow an infant or child
to be carried on an occupant’s
lap.
• NEVER ride with the seatback
reclined when the vehicle is
moving.
• Do not allow children to share
a seat or seat belt.
• Do not wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back.
• Always wear both the shoul-
der portion and lap portion of
the lap/shoulder belt.
• Do not use the seat belt if it is
twisted. A twisted seat belt
will not protect you properly
in an accident.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use a seat belt if the
webbing or hardware is dam-
aged.
• Do not latch the seat belt into
the buckles of other seats.
• NEVER unfasten the seat belt
while driving. This may cause
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident.
• Make sure there is nothing in
the buckle interfering with the
seat belt latch mechanism.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the
seat belt adjusting devices
from operating to remove
slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
2-23
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Seat Belt Warning Light
Seat belt warning light
(for driver’s seat)
The driver’s seat belt warning light
and chime will come on according to
the following table when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
*
1
:The Warning Pattern repeats 11 times with
an interval of 24 seconds.If the driver’s seat
belt is buckled, the light will stop within 6
seconds and chime will stop immediately.
*
2
:The light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.
Damaged seat belts and seat
belt assemblies will not operate
properly. Always replace:
• Frayed, contaminated, or dam-
aged webbing
• Damaged hardware
• The entire seat belt assembly
after it has been worn in an
accident, even if damage to
webbing or assembly is not
apparent
WARNING
OLMB033022
Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt
Vehicle
Speed
Light (Blink) Chime
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Buckled 6 seconds None
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Below 3 mph
(5 km/h)
6 seconds None
3 mph~
6 mph
6 seconds
Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)
6 sec. ON / 24 sec. OFF
(11 times)
Unbuckled
Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)
↓
Below 3 mph
(5 km/h)
6 seconds *
1
↓
Stop *
2
2-24
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat belt warning light
(for front passenger’s seat)
The front passenger’s seat belt
warning light will activate to the fol-
lowing table when the ignition switch
is in "ON" position.
*
1
: The seat belt warning light will go off if the
vehicle speed decreases below 3 mph (5
km/h).If the vehicle speed increases above
3 mph (5 km/h), the warning light will blink
again.
Seat Belt Restraint System
Seat Belt-Driver’s 3-point sys-
tem with emergency locking
retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
Pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the metal tab (1) into the
buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length after the lap belt por-
tion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean
forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt
will extend and move with you.
Conditions
Warning
Pattern
Seat Belt
Vehicle
Speed
Light-Blink
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Unbuckled
Above 6mph
(10 km/h)
Continuously
Buckled 6 seconds
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Above 6mph
(10 km/h)
Continuously *
1
Below 6mph
(10 km/h)
None
OLF034029
OLF034030N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OLMB033087
2-25
Safety system of your vehicle
2
If there is a sudden stop or impact,
the belt will lock into position. It will
also lock if you try to lean forward too
quickly.
If you are not able to smoothly pull
enough of the seat belt out from
the retractor, firmly pull the seat
belt out and release it. After
release, you will be able to pull the
belt out smoothly.
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the
shoulder belt anchor to one of the
four different positions for maximum
comfort and safety.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so it lies across your chest
and midway over your shoulder near-
est the door, not over your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has
locked into position.
NOTICE
OLF034067
2-26
Safety system of your vehicle
Rear Seat Belt – Passenger’s 3-
point system with convertible
locking retractor
This type of seat belt combines the
features of both an emergency locking
retractor seat belt and an automatic
locking retractor seat belt. Convertible
retractor type seat belts are installed in
the rear seat positions to help accom-
modate the installation of child
restraint systems. Although a convert-
ible retractor is also installed in the
front passenger seat position, NEVER
place any infant/child restraint system
in the front seat of the vehicle.
To fasten your seat belt:
Pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the metal tab into the buck-
le. There will be an audible "click"
when the tab locks into the buckle.
When not securing a child restraint,
the seat belt operates in the same way
as the driver’s seat belt (Emergency
Locking Retractor Type). It automati-
cally adjusts to the proper length only
after the lap belt portion of the seat
belt is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly across your hips.
(Continued)
• Position one arm under the
shoulder belt and the other over
the belt, as shown in the illus-
tration.
• Always position the shoulder
belt anchor into the locked
position at the appropriate
height.
• Never position the shoulder
belt across your neck or face.
OLMB033025
Improperly positioned seat belts
may increase the risk of serious
injury in an accident.Take the fol-
lowing precautions when adjust-
ing the seat belt:
• Position the lap portion of the
seat belt as low as possible
across your hips, not on your
waist, so that it fits snugly.
(Continued)
WARNING
2-27
Safety system of your vehicle
2
When the seat belt is fully extended
from the retractor to allow the installa-
tion of a child restraint system, the
seat belt operation changes to allow
the belt to retract, but not to extend
(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
Refer to the “Using a Child Restraint
System” section in this chapter.
Although the seat belt retractor
provides the same level of protec-
tion for seated passengers in
either emergency or automatic
locking modes, the emergency
locking mode allows seated pas-
sengers to move freely in their
seat while keeping some tension
on the belt. During a collision or
sudden stop, the retractor auto-
matically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
To deactivate the automatic lock-
ing mode, allow the unbuckled
seat belt to fully retract.
To release your seat belt:
Press the release button (1) in the
locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should
automatically draw back into the
retractor. If this does not happen,
check the belt to be sure it is not twist-
ed, then try again.
Pre-tensioner seat belt
(Driver and front passenger)
Retractor Pre-tensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with driver’s
and front passenger’s Pre-tensioner
Seat Belts. The purpose of the pre-
tensioner is to make sure the seat
belts fit tightly against the occupant’s
body in certain frontal collisions. The
pre-tensioner seat belts may be acti-
vated in crashes where the frontal col-
lision is severe enough.
If the system senses excessive ten-
sion on the driver’s or passenger’s
seat belt when the pre-tensioner acti-
vates, the load limiter inside the pre-
tensioner will release some of the
pressure on the affected seat belt.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor will
lock into position. In certain frontal
collisions, the pre-tensioner will acti-
vate and pull the seat belt into tighter
contact against the occupant’s body.
NOTICE
ODH033057
2-28
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat Belt Anchor Pre-tensioner
The purpose of the Seat Belt Anchor
Pre-tensioner is to help the lap belt fit
tightly against the occupant’s lower
body in certain frontal collisions. The
Seat Belt Anchor Pre-tensioner may
be activated in crashes where the
frontal collision is severe enough.
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt mechanism
deploys during a collision, the
pre-tensioners become hot and
can burn you.
WARNING
• Always wear your seat belt and
sit properly in your seat.
• Do not use the seat belt if it is
loose or twisted. A loose or
twisted seat belt will not pro-
tect you properly in an acci-
dent.
• Do not place anything near the
buckle. This may adversely
affect the buckle and cause it
to function improperly.
• Always replace your pre-ten-
sioners after activation or an
accident.
• NEVER inspect, service, repair
or replace the pre-tensioners
yourself.This must be done by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not hit the seat belt assem-
blies.
WARNING
OLMB033039
2-29
Safety system of your vehicle
2
The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System
consists mainly of the following com-
ponents.Their locations are shown in
the illustration above:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner
3. SRS control module
4. Anchor Pre-tensioner
The sensor that activates the SRS
air bag is connected with the
pre–tensioner seat belts.The SRS
air bag warning light on the instru-
ment panel will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion, and then it should turn off.
If the pre-tensioner is not working
properly, the warning light will illu-
minate even if the SRS air bag is
not malfunctioning. If the warning
light does not illuminate, stays
illuminated or illuminates when
the vehicle is being driven, have
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
inspect the pre-tensioner seat
belts and SRS air bags as soon as
possible.
• Both the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s pre-tensioner seat
belts may be activated in certain
frontal or side collisions or
rollovers.
• The pre-tensioners will not be
activated if the seat belts are not
worn at the time of the collision.
• When the pre-tensioner seat
belts are activated, a loud noise
may be heard and fine dust,
which may appear to be smoke,
may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal
operating conditions and are not
hazardous.
• Although it is non-toxic, the fine
dust may cause skin irritation
and should not be breathed for
prolonged periods. Wash all
exposed skin areas thoroughly
after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were
activated.
NOTICENOTICE
OLMB033040/Q
2-30
Safety system of your vehicle
Rear center seat belt
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
must be used.
Additional Seat Belt Safety
Precautions
Seat belt use during pregnancy
The seat belt should always be used
during pregnancy. The best way to
protect your unborn child is to protect
yourself by always wearing the seat
belt.
Pregnant women should always wear
a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the
shoulder belt across your chest, rout-
ed between your breasts and away
from your neck. Place the shoulder
belt across the chest, routed away
from the neck.Place the lap belt below
the belt line so that it fits snugly and as
low as possible across the hips, not
across the abdomen.
Seat belt use and children
Infant and small children
All 50 states have child restraint laws
which require children to travel in
approved child restraint devices,
including booster seats. The age at
which seat belts can be used instead
of child restraints differs among
states, so you should be aware of the
specific requirements in your state,
and where you are travelling. Infant
and child restraints must be properly
placed and installed in a rear seat.
For more information refer to the
“Child Restraint Systems” section in
this chapter.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to an unborn
child during an accident, preg-
nant women should NEVER
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or over the area of
the abdomen where the unborn
child is located.
WARNING
OLF034062
2-31
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat by a
child restraint system that meets the
requirements of the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards. Before
buying any child restraint system,
make sure that it has a label certify-
ing that it meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213. The
restraint must be appropriate for your
child’s height and weight. Check the
label on the child restraint for this
information. Refer to the “Child
Restraint Systems” section in this
chapter.
Larger children
Children under age 13 and who are
too large for a booster seat must
always occupy the rear seat and use
the available lap/shoulder belts. A
seat belt should lie across the upper
thighs and be snug across the shoul-
der and chest to restrain the child
safely. Check belt fit periodically.
Children are afforded the most safe-
ty in the event of an accident when
they are restrained by a proper
restraint system and/or seat belts in
the rear seat. Always have the
LATCH system inspected by your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer after an
accident. An accident can damage
the LATCH system and may not
properly secure the child restraint.
If a larger child over age 13 must be
seated in the front seat, the child
must be securely restrained by the
available lap/shoulder belt and the
seat should be placed in the rear-
most position.
ALWAYS properly restrain infants
and small children in a child
restraint appropriate for the
child’s height and weight.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to a child and
other passengers, NEVER hold a
child in your lap or arms when
the vehicle is moving.The violent
forces created during an acci-
dent will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the interior of the vehicle.
WARNING
2-32
Safety system of your vehicle
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center
of the vehicle.If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need
to be returned to an appropriate
booster seat in the rear seat.
Transporting an injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
Consult a physician for specific rec-
ommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
Sitting in a reclined position when the
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even when buckled up, the protec-
tions of your restraint system (seat
belts and air bags) is greatly reduced
by reclining your seatback.
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve
the maximum effectiveness of the
restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front and
rear seats should be in an upright
position when the car is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper
protection if the person is lying down
in the rear seat or if the front or rear
seats are in a reclined position.
• NEVER ride with a reclined
seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
• Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of seri-
ous or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
• Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
WARNING
• Always make sure children
are wearing their seat belts
and that they are properly
adjusted before driving.
• NEVER allow the shoulder
belt to contact the child’s
neck or face.
• Do not allow more than one
child to use a single seat belt.
WARNING
2-33
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Care of Seat Belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addi-
tion, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry.If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solu-
tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
The entire seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an acci-
dent.This should be done even if no
damage is visible. Additional ques-
tions concerning seat belt operation
should be directed to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
2-34
Safety system of your vehicle
Children Always in the Rear
Children under age 13 must always
ride in the rear seats and must
always be properly restrained to min-
imize the risk of injury in an accident,
sudden stop or sudden maneuver.
According to accident statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in
the front seat. Even with air bags,
children can be seriously injured
or killed. Children too large for a
child restraint must use the seat belts
provided.
All 50 states have child restraint laws
which require children to travel in
approved child restraint devices.The
laws governing the age or
height/weight restrictions at which
seat belts can be used instead of
child restraints differs among states,
so you should be aware of the spe-
cific requirements in your state, and
where you are travelling.
Child restraint systems must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commer-
cially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
Child restraint systems are generally
designed to be secured in a vehicle
seat by lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH sys-
tem in the rear seats of the vehicle.
CCHHIILLDD RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM ((CCRRSS))
Always properly restrain chil-
dren in the rear seats of the
vehicle.
Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front pas-
senger seat can be forcefully
struck by an inflating air bag
resulting in SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH.
WARNING
2-35
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Child restraint system (CRS)
Infants and younger children must be
restrained in an appropriate rear-fac-
ing or forward-facing CRS that has
first been properly secured to the
rear seat of the vehicle. Read and
comply with the instructions for
installation and use provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint.
Selecting a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
When selecting a CRS for your child,
always:
• Make sure the CRS has a label
certifying that it meets applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS 213).
• Select a child restraint based on
your child’s height and weight.The
required label or the instructions
for use typically provide this infor-
mation.
• Select a child restraint that fits the
vehicle seating position where it
will be used.
• Read and comply with the warn-
ings and instructions for installation
and use provided with the child
restraint system.
(Continued)
• Always follow the child
restraint system manufactur-
er’s instructions for installa-
tion and use.
• Always properly restrain your
child in the child restraint.
• If the vehicle head restraint
prevents proper installation of
a child seat (as described in
the child restraint system
manual), the head restraint of
the respective seating posi-
tion shall be readjusted or
entirely removed.
• Do not use an infant carrier or
a child safety seat that
“hooks” over a seatback, it
may not provide adequate
protection in an accident.
• After an accident, have a
HYUNDAI dealer check the
child restraint system, seat
belts, tether anchors and
lower anchors.
An improperly secured child
restraint can increase the risk
of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH
in an accident. Always take the
following precautions when
using a child restraint system:
• NEVER install a child or infant
restraint in the front passen-
ger’s seat.
• Always properly secure the
child restraint to a rear seat of
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING
2-36
Safety system of your vehicle
Child restraint system types
There are three main types of child
restraint systems: rear-facing seats,
forward-facing seats, and booster
seats. They are classified according
to the child’s age, height and weight.
Rear-facing child seats
A rear-facing child seat provides
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the child.The har-
ness system holds the child in place,
and in an accident, acts to keep the
child positioned in the seat and
reduce the stress to the neck and
spinal cord.
All children under age one must
always ride in a rear-facing infant child
restraint.
Convertible and 3-in-1 child seats typ-
ically have higher height and weight
limits for the rear-facing position,
allowing you to keep your child rear-
facing for a longer period of time.
Continue to use a rear-facing child
seat for as long as your child will fit
within the height and weight limits
allowed by the child seat manufactur-
er. It’s the best way to keep them
safe. Once your child has outgrown
the rear-facing child restraint, your
child is ready for a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness.
OLMB033041
NEVER install a child or infant
restraint in the front passen-
ger’s seat.
Placing a rear-facing child
restraint in the front seat can
result in SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH if the child restraint is
struck by an inflating air bag.
WARNING
2-37
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Forward-facing child restraints
A forward-facing child seat provides
restraint for the child’s body with a
harness. Keep children in a forward-
facing child seat with a harness until
they reach the top height or weight
limit allowed by your child restraint’s
manufacturer.
Once your child outgrows the forward-
facing child restraint, your child is
ready for a booster seat.
Booster seats
A booster seat is a restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s seat
belt system. A booster seat positions
the seat belt so that it fits properly
over the lap of your child.
Keep your child in a booster seat until
they are big enough to sit in the seat
without a booster and still have the
seat belt fit properly. For a seat belt to
fit properly, the lap belt must lie snug-
ly across the upper thighs, not the
stomach.The shoulder belt should lie
snug across the shoulder and chest
and not across the neck or face.
Children under age 13 must always
ride in the rear seats and must always
be properly restrained to minimize the
risk of injury.
Installing a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
Before installing your child
restraint system always:
• Read and follow the instruc-
tions provided by the manu-
facturer of the child restraint.
• Read and follow the instruc-
tions regarding child restraint
systems in this manual.
Failure to follow all warnings
and instructions could increase
the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH if an accident occurs.
WARNING
If the vehicle headrest prevents
proper installation of a child
seat (as described in the child
seat system manual, the head-
rest of the respective seating
position shall be readjusted or
entirely removed.
WARNING
OLF034033
2-38
Safety system of your vehicle
After selecting a proper child seat for
your child, check to make sure it fits
properly in your vehicle. Follow the
instructions provided by the manu-
facturer when installing the child
seat. Note these general steps when
installing the seat to your vehicle:
•
Properly secure the child restraint
to the vehicle.
All child restraints
must be secured to the vehicle with
the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or
with the LATCH system.
• Make sure the child restraint is
firmly secured. After installing a
child restraint to the vehicle, push
and pull the seat forward and from
side-to-side to verify that it is
securely attached to the seat. A
child restraint secured with a seat
belt should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, some side-to-
side movement can be expected.
• Secure the child in the child
restraint. Make sure the child is
properly strapped in the child
restraint according to the manufac-
turer instructions.
Lower Anchors and Tether for
Children (LATCH) System
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving and in an acci-
dent. This system is designed to
make installation of the child restraint
easier and reduce the possibility of
improperly installing your child
restraint. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attach-
ments on the child restraint. The
LATCH system eliminates the need
to use seat belts to secure the child
restraint to the rear seats.
Lower anchors are metal bars built
into the vehicle. There are two lower
anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments.
To use the LATCH system in your
vehicle, you must have a child
restraint with LATCH attachments.
The child seat manufacturer will pro-
vide you with instructions on how to
use the child seat with its attachments
for the LATCH lower anchors.
A child restraint in a closed
vehicle can become very hot.To
prevent burns, check the seat-
ing surface and buckles before
placing your child in the child
restraint.
CAUTION
2-39
Safety system of your vehicle
2
LATCH anchors have been provided
in the left and right outboard rear
seating positions. Their locations are
shown in the illustration.There are no
LATCH anchors provided for the cen-
ter rear seating position.
The lower anchor position indicator
symbols are located on the left and
right rear seat backs to identify the
position of the lower anchors in your
vehicle (see arrows in illustration).
The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions.
To use the lower anchor, push the
upper portion of the lower anchor
cover.
Do not attempt to install a child
restraint system using LATCH
anchors in the rear center seat-
ing position.There are no LATCH
anchors provided for this seat.
Using the outboard seat anchors
can damage the anchors which
may break or fail in a collision
resulting in serious injury or
death.
WARNING
ODH033067
OLF034037
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
2-40
Safety system of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint with
the LATCH anchors system
To install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint in either of the rear outboard
seating positions:
1. Move the seat belt buckle away from
the lower anchors.
2. Move any other objects away from
the anchors that could prevent a
secure connection between the child
restraint and the lower anchors.
3. Place the child restraint on the vehi-
cle seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
instructions provided by the child
restraint manufacturer.
4. Follow the child restraint instructions
for properly adjusting and tightening
the lower attachments on the child
restraint to the lower anchors.
The recommended weight for the
LATCH system is under 65 lb (30
kg).
How to calculate the child
restraint weight :
Child restraint weight =
65 lb (30 kg) - Child weight
NOTICE
Take the following precautions
when using the LATCH system:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your child restraint system.
• To prevent the child from
reaching and taking hold of
unretracted seat belts, buckle
all unused rear seat belts and
retract the seat belt webbing
behind the child. Children can
be strangled if a shoulder belt
becomes wrapped around
their neck and the seat belt
tightens.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single
anchor. This could cause the
anchor or attachment to come
loose or break.
• Always have the LATCH sys-
tem inspected by your author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer after an
accident. An accident can
damage the LATCH system
and may not properly secure
the child restraint.
WARNING
2-41
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Securing a child restraint seat
with “Tether Anchor” system
First secure the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchors or the seat
belt. If the child restraint manufactur-
er recommends that the top tether
strap be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether strap to the top tether
strap anchor.
Child restraint hook holders are
located on the package tray.
To install the tether anchor:
1. Route the child restraint tether strap
over the child restraint seatback.
Route the tether strap under the
head restraint and between the
head restraint posts, or route the
tether strap over the top of the vehi-
cle seatback.Make sure the strap is
not twisted.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the teth-
er strap according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions to firmly
secure the child restraint to the seat.
3. Check that the child restraint is
securely attached to the seat by
pushing and pulling the seat forward
and from side-to-side.
Take the following precautions
when installing the tether strap:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your child restraint system.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single teth-
er anchor. This could cause
the anchor or attachment to
come loose or break.
• Do not attach the tether strap
to anything other than the cor-
rect tether anchor. It may not
work properly if attached to
something else.
• Do not use the tether anchors
for adult seat belts or harness-
es, or for attaching other items
or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING
OLF034035
OLF034034
2-42
Safety system of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint with
a lap belt or lap/shoulder belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child restraints must be secured to
a vehicle rear seat with the lap part
of a lap/shoulder belt.
Automatic locking mode
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emer-
gency conditions (emergency locking
mode), you must manually pull the
seat belt all the way out to shift the
retractor to the “Automatic Locking”
mode to secure a child restraint.
The “Automatic Locking” mode will
help prevent the normal movement
of the child in the vehicle from caus-
ing the seat belt to loosen and com-
promise the child restraint system.To
secure a child restraint system, use
the following procedure.
To install a child restraint system on
the rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the child restraint system on
a rear seat and route the lap/shoul-
der belt around or through the child
restraint, following the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
Be sure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted.
When using the rear center seat
belt, you should also refer to the
“3-point Rear Center Seat Belt”
section in this chapter.
NOTICE
ALWAYS place a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat of
the vehicle.
Placing a rear-facing child
restraint in the front seat can
result in serious injury or death
if the child restraint is struck by
an inflating air bag.
WARNING
OLMB033044
2-43
Safety system of your vehicle
2
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct “click” sound.
Information
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
seat belt all the way out.When the
shoulder portion of the seat belt is
fully extended, it will shift the
retractor to the “Automatic
Locking” (child restraint) mode.
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the seat belt to retract and listen
for an audible “clicking”or “ratchet-
ing” sound. This indicates that the
retractor is in the “Automatic
Locking”mode.If no distinct sound
is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
i
OLMB033045
OLMB033097 OLMB033098
2-44
Safety system of your vehicle
5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place.If it
is not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the “Automatic Locking” mode
by attempting to pull more of the
seat belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot, the retractor is in the
“Automatic Locking” mode.
If your CRS manufacturer instructs or
recommends you to use a tether
anchor with the lap/shoulder belt,
refer to the previous pages for more
information.
When the seat belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position,
the retractor will automatically
switch from the “Automatic
Locking” mode to the emergency
lock mode for normal adult usage.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully.
NOTICE
If the retractor is not in the
“Automatic Locking” mode, the
child restraint can move when
your vehicle turns or stops sud-
denly. A child can be seriously
injured or killed if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
in the car, including manually
pulling the seat belt all the way
out to shift the rectractor to the
“Automatic Locking”mode.
WARNING
2-45
Safety system of your vehicle
2
AAIIRR BBAAGG -- AADDVVAANNCCEEDD SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM
OLF034038
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Driver’s front air bag
2. Passenger’s front air bag
3. Side air bag
4. Curtain air bag
5. Driver’s knee air bag
2-46
Safety system of your vehicle
This vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Air Bag
System for the driver’s seat and front
passenger’s seats.
The front air bags are designed to
supplement the three-point seat
belts. For these air bags to provide
protection, the seat belts must be
worn at all times when driving.
You can be severely injured or killed
in an accident if you are not wearing
a seat belt. Air bags are designed to
supplement seat belts, but do not
replace them. Also, air bags are not
designed to deploy in every collision.
In some accidents, the seat belts are
the only restraint protecting you.
AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ALWAYS use seat belts and child restraints - every trip, every time,
everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or killed in
a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your seat belt
when the air bag inflates.
NEVER place a child in any child restraint or booster seat in the front
passenger seat. An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant
or child causing serious or fatal injuries.
ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the
safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older
must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted
and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.
All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright posi-
tion, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs com-
fortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked
and the engine is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during
an accident, the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.
You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console.
Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. The U.S. National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends that drivers allow at
least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and
the chest.
WARNING
2-47
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Where Are the Air Bags?
Driver’s and passenger’s front
air bags
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Advanced Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) and lap/shoulder belts
at both the driver and passenger
seating positions.
The SRS consists of air bags which
are located in the center of the steer-
ing wheel, in the driver’s side lower
crash pad below the steering wheel
column and the passenger’s side
front panel pad above the glove box.
The air bags are labeled with the let-
ters “AIR BAG”embossed on the pad
covers.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle’s driver and front passen-
gers with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt system
alone. The SRS uses sensors to
gather information about the driver’s
and front passenger’s seat belt
usage and impact severity.
The seat belt buckle sensors deter-
mine if the driver and front passen-
ger’s seat belts are fastened. These
sensors provide the ability to control
the SRS deployment based on
whether or not the seat belts are fas-
tened, and how severe the impact is.
The advanced SRS offers the ability
to control the air bag inflation within
two levels. A first stage level is pro-
vided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for
more severe impacts.
According to the impact severity, and
seat belt usage, the SRS Control
Module (SRSCM) controls the air
bag inflation.Failure to properly wear
seat belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
OLF034039
OLF034040N
OLF034041
■ Driver’s knee air bag
■ Driver’s front air bag
■ Passenger’s front air bag
2-48
Safety system of your vehicle
Side air bags
Your vehicle is equipped with a side air
bag in each front seat.The purpose of
the air bag is to provide the vehicle’s
driver and the front passenger with
additional protection than that offered
by the seat belt alone.
The side air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and point of
impact.
The side and curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle may deploy
if a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
The side air bags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact or rollover
situations.
OLF034042N
OLF034043
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
front air bags, take the following
precautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
• Move your seat as far back as
possible from front air bags,
while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
• Never lean against the door or
center console.
• Do not allow the front passen-
ger to place their feet or legs on
the dashboard.
• No objects should be placed
over or near the air bag mod-
ules on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, and the front
passenger’s panel above the
glove box. Such objects could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to deploy.
WARNING
2-49
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Curtain air bags
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
side air bag, take the following
precautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and seats.
• Hold the steering wheel at the 9
o’clock and 3 o’clock positions,
to minimize the risk of injuries
to your hands and arms.
• Do not use any accessory
seat covers.This could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness
of the system.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
Also, do not attach any
objects around the area the
air bag inflates such as the
door, side door glass, front
and rear pillar.
• Do not place any objects
between the door and the
seat. They may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the side
air bag inflates.
• Do not install any accessories
on the side or near the side air
bags.
• Do not put any objects
between the side air bag label
and seat cushion. It could
cause harm if the vehicle is in
a crash severe enough to
cause the air bags to deploy.
• Do not cause impact to the
doors when the ignition
switch is in the ON position or
this may cause the side air
bags to inflate.
• If the seat or seat cover is
damaged, have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OLF034044
OLF034045
2-50
Safety system of your vehicle
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants
and the rear outboard seat occupants
in certain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side
impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and
impact.
The side and curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle may deploy
if a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
The curtain air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact or rollover
situations.
How Does the Air Bag System
Operate?
The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver’s front air bag module
2. Passenger’s front air bag module
3. Side air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
curtain air bags, take the follow-
ing precautions:
• All seat occupants must wear
seat belts at all times to help
keep occupants positioned
properly.
• Properly secure child restraints
as far away from the door as
possible.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag. Also, do not attach
any objects around the area the
air bag inflates such as the
door, side door glass, front and
rear pillar, roof side rail.
• Do not hang hard or breakable
objects on the clothes hanger.
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies
onto doors, put their arms on
the doors, stretch their arms
out of the window, or place
objects between the doors
and seats.
• Do not open or repair the side
curtain air bags.
WARNING
ODH033104L/Q
2-51
Safety system of your vehicle
2
10. Side pressure sensors
11. Driver’s knee air bag module
12. Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt buckle sensors
13. Anchor pre-tensioner
14. Occupant classification system
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the Engine
Start/Stop button is in the ON posi-
tion to determine if a crash impact is
severe enough to require air bag
deployment or pre-tensioner seat
belt deployment.
SRS warning light
The SRS (Supplement Restraint
System) air bag warning light on the
instrument panel displays the air bag
symbol depicted in the illustration.
The system checks the air bag elec-
trical system for malfunctions. The
light indicates that there is a potential
malfunction with your air bag system,
which could include your side and
curtain air bags used for rollover pro-
tection.
If your SRS malfunctions, the air
bag may not inflate properly dur-
ing an accident increasing the
risk of serious injury or death.
If any of the following condi-
tions occur, your SRS is mal-
functioning:
• The light does not turn on for
approximately six seconds
when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
• The light stays on after illumi-
nating for approximately six
seconds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the
engine is running.
Have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer inspect the SRS as soon
as possible if any of these con-
ditions occur.
WARNING
2-52
Safety system of your vehicle
During a frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s deceleration. If
the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will inflate
the front air bags.
The front air bags help protect the
driver and front passenger by
responding to frontal impacts in
which seat belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When need-
ed, the side air bags help provide
protection in the event of a side
impact or rollover.
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
• Air bags inflate in the event of cer-
tain frontal or side collisions to help
protect the occupants from serious
physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which
the air bags will inflate. Generally,
air bags are designed to inflate
based upon the severity of a colli-
sion and its direction. These two
factors determine whether the sen-
sors produce an electronic deploy-
ment/inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the
density and stiffness of the vehicles
or objects which your vehicle
impacts during a collision. The
determining factors are not limited
to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant. It is
virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an acci-
dent. It is much more likely that you
will simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage com-
partments after the collision.
• In addition to inflating in certain
side collisions, vehicles equipped
with a rollover sensor, side and
curtain air bags will inflate if the
sensing system detects a rollover.
When a rollover is detected, side
and curtain air bags will remain
inflated longer to help provide pro-
tection from ejection, especially
when used in conjunction with the
seat belts.
• To help provide protection, the air
bags must inflate rapidly.The speed
of air bag inflation is a consequence
of extremely short time in which to
inflate the air bag between the
occupant and the vehicle structures
before the occupant impacts those
structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or life-
threatening injuries and is thus a
necessary part of air bag design.
However, the rapid air bag inflation
can also cause injuries which can
include facial abrasions, bruises
and broken bones because the
inflation speed also causes the air
bags to expand with a great deal of
force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the air
bag can cause fatal injuries, espe-
cially if the occupant is positioned
excessively close to the air bag.
2-53
Safety system of your vehicle
2
You can take steps to reduce the risk
of being injured by an inflating air
bag. The greatest risk is sitting too
close to the air bag.An air bag needs
about 10 inches (25 cm) of space to
inflate. NHTSA recommends that
drivers allow at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.
When the SRSCM detects a suffi-
ciently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically
deploy the front air bags.
OHM039102N
■ Driver’s front air bag (1)
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
air bag, take the following pre-
cautions:
• NEVER place a child restraint
in the front passenger seat.
Always properly restrain chil-
dren under age 13 in the rear
seats of the vehicle.
• Adjust the front passenger’s
and driver’s seats as far to the
rear as possible while allow-
ing you to maintain full con-
trol of the vehicle.
• Hold the steering wheel with
hands at the 9 o’clock and 3
o’clock positions.
• Never place anything or any-
one between the air bag and
the seat occupant.
• Do not allow the front passen-
ger to place their feet or legs
on the dashboard.
WARNING
2-54
Safety system of your vehicle
Upon deployment, tear seams mold-
ed directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers allows full
inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
tion with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver or the front passen-
ger forward motion, reducing the risk
of head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibili-
ty and the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
OHM039103N
■ Driver’s front air bag (2)
OHM039104N
■ Driver’s front air bag (3)
OLMB033057
■ Passenger’s front air bag
To prevent objects from becom-
ing dangerous projectiles when
the passenger’s air bag inflates:
• Do not install or place any
objects (drink holder, CD
holder, stickers, etc.) on the
front passenger’s panel above
the glove box where the pas-
senger’s air bag is located.
• Do not install a container of
liquid air freshener near the
instrument cluster or on the
instrument panel surface.
WARNING
2-55
Safety system of your vehicle
2
After an air bag inflates, take
the following precautions:
• Open your windows and doors
as soon as possible after
impact to reduce prolonged
exposure to the smoke and
powder released by the inflat-
ing air bag.
• Do not touch the air bag stor-
age area’s internal compo-
nents immediately after an air
bag has inflated. The parts
that come into contact with an
inflating air bag may be very
hot.
(Continued)
WARNING
What to Expect After an Air
Bag Inflates
After a frontal or side air bag inflates,
it will deflate very quickly. Air bag
inflation will not prevent the driver
from seeing out of the windshield or
being able to steer. Curtain air bags
may remain partially inflated for
some time after they deploy.
Noise and smoke from inflating
air bag
When the air bags inflate, they make
a loud noise and may produce
smoke and powder in the air inside of
the vehicle. This is normal and is a
result of the ignition of the air bag
inflator. After the air bag inflates, you
may feel substantial discomfort in
breathing because of the contact of
your chest with both the seat belt and
the air bag, as well as from breathing
the smoke and powder. The powder
may aggravate asthma for some
people. If you experience breathing
problems after an air bag deploy-
ment, seek medical attention imme-
diately.
Though the smoke and powder are
nontoxic, they may cause irritation to
the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and seek
medical attention if the symptoms
persist.
(Continued)
• Always wash exposed skin
areas thoroughly with cold
water and mild soap.
• Always have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer replace the air
bag immediately after deploy-
ment. Air bags are designed to
be used only once.
2-56
Safety system of your vehicle
Occupant Classification
System (OCS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) in the front passenger’s seat.
Main components of the
Occupant Classification System
• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat cushion.
• Electronic system to determine
whether the passenger air bag
systems should be activated or
deactivated.
• An indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicating the front passen-
ger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag indi-
cator light is interconnected with
the OCS.
The OCS is designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated front
passenger and determine if the pas-
senger's front air bag should be
enabled (may inflate) or not.
The purpose is to help reduce the
risk of injury or death from an inflat-
ing air bag to certain front passenger
seat occupants, such as children, by
requiring the air bag to be automati-
cally turned OFF.
For example, if a child restraint of the
type specified in the regulations is on
the seat, the occupant classification
sensor can detect it and cause the
air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occu-
pants who are properly seated and
wearing the seat belt properly,
should not cause the passenger air
bag to be automatically turned OFF.
For small adults it may be turned
OFF, however, if the occupant does
not sit in the seat properly (for exam-
ple, by not sitting upright, by sitting
on the edge of the seat, or by other-
wise being out of position), this could
cause the sensor to turn the air bag
OFF.
You will find the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator on the center
facia panel. This system detects the
conditions 1-4 in the following table
and activates or deactivates the front
passenger air bag based on these
conditions.
OLF034029N
OLF034067N
■ Type A
■ Type B
2-57
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Always be sure that you and all vehi-
cle occupants are seated properly
and wearing the seat belt properly for
the most effective protection by the
air bag and the seat belt.
The OCS may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which
can affect the classification system.
These include:
• Failing to sit in an upright position.
• Leaning against the door or center
console.
• Sitting towards the sides of the
front of the seat.
• Putting their legs on the dashboard
or resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
• Wearing the seat belt improperly.
• Reclining the seatback.
• Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear
or hip protection wear.
• Putting an additional thick cushion
on the seat.
• Putting electrical devices (e.g.
notebook, satellite radio) on the
seat with inverter charging.
Condition and operation in the front passenger Occupant Classification System
Condition detected by the
occupant classification system
Indicator/Warning light Devices
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light
SRS
warning light
Front passenger
air bag
1. Adult *
1
Off Off Activated
2. Infant *
2
or child restraint
system with 12 months old *
3
*
4
On Off Deactivated
3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated
4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated
*
1
The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front
passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique
and posture.
*
2
Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has out-
grown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize
him/her as an adult depending upon his/her physique or sitting position.
*
3
Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
*
4
The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12 months
to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front passenger seat.This is
a normal condition.
2-58
Safety system of your vehicle
Riding in an improper position or placing weight on the front passenger’s seat when it is unoccupied by a
passenger adversely affects the OCS.To reduce the risk of serious injury or death:
WARNING
OVQ036013NB
OLMB033100
OLMB033101
OLMB033103
OLMB033102
OLMB033104
• NEVER put a heavy load in
the front seat or seatback
pocket, or hang any items
on the front passenger
seat.
• NEVER place your feet on
the front passenger seat-
back.
• NEVER sit with your hips
shifted towards the front
of the seat.
• NEVER ride with the seat-
back reclined when the
vehicle is moving.
• NEVER place your feet or
legs on the dashboard.
• NEVER lean on the door or
center console or sit on
one side of the front pas-
senger seat.
(continued)
2-59
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Proper seated position for OCS
If the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”
indicator is on when an adult is seat-
ed in the front passenger seat, place
the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF
position and ask the passenger to sit
properly (sitting upright with the seat
back in an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their seat
belt on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor). Restart
the engine and have the person
remain in that position.This will allow
the system to detect the person and
to enable the passenger air bag. If
the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator is still on, ask the passen-
ger to move to the rear seat.
B990A01O
Never allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front passenger
seat when the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator is illuminat-
ed. During a collision,the air bag
will not inflate if the indicator is
illuminated. Have your passen-
ger reposition himself in the
seat. If the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator remains illu-
minated after the passenger
repositions himself properly and
the vehicle is restarted, have the
passenger move to the rear seat
because the air bag will not
inflate.
WARNING
(continued)
• Do not put an electronic
device (ex. Laptop computer,
after market DMB, navigation,
satellite audio, video game
machine, MP3, AC inverter,
etc.) in the front passenger
seatback pocket or on the
front passenger seat.
• Do not place a sitting mat on
the front passenger seat.
• Do not place any items under
the front passenger seat.
• Do not place sharp objects on
the front passenger seat.
These may damage the occu-
pant detection system, if they
puncture the seat cushion.
• Avoid spilling liquids on the
front seat; this may cause the
OCS not to work properly.
Keep the front seat dry at all
times.
2-60
Safety system of your vehicle
The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator illuminates for approxi-
mately 4 seconds after the ignition
switch is in the ON position or
after the engine is started. If the
front passenger seat is occupied,
the OCS will then classify the front
passenger after several more sec-
onds.
Do Not Install a Child Restraint
in the Front Passenger’s Seat
Even though your vehicle is equipped
with the OCS, never install a child
restraint in the front passenger’s seat.
An inflating air bag can forcefully
strike a child or child restraint result-
ing in serious or fatal injury.
NOTICE
• NEVER place a rear-facing or
front-facing child restraint in
the front passenger’s seat of
the vehicle.
• An inflating frontal air bag
could forcefully strike a child
resulting in serious injury or
death.
• Always properly restrain chil-
dren in an appropriate child
restraint in the rear seat of the
vehicle.
WARNING
1JBH3051
2-61
Safety system of your vehicle
Why Didn’t My Air Bag Go Off
in a Collision?
Air bags are not designed to inflate in
every collision. There are certain
types of accidents in which the air bag
would not be expected to provide
additional protection. These include
rear impacts, second or third colli-
sions in multiple impact accidents, as
well as low speed impacts. Damage
to the vehicle indicates a collision
energy absorption, and is not an indi-
cator of whether or not an air bag
should have inflated.
Air bag collision sensors
2
To reduce the risk of an air bag
deploying unexpectedly and
causing serious injury or death:
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where air
bags or sensors are installed.
• Do not perform maintenance
on or around the air bag sen-
sors.If the location or angle of
the sensors is altered, the air
bags may deploy when they
should not or may not deploy
when they should.
• Do not install bumper guards
or replace the bumper with a
non-genuine HYUNDAI parts.
This may adversely affect the
collision and air bag deploy-
ment performance.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Place the ignition switch in
the LOCK/OFF or ACC posi-
tion when the vehicle is being
towed to prevent inadvertent
air bag deployment.
• Have all air bag repairs conduct-
ed by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
WARNING
2-62
Safety system of your vehicle
1. SRS control module/Rollover sensor
2. Front impact sensor
3. Side pressure sensor
4. Side impact sensor
OLF034046N/OLF034047/OLF034048N/OLF034049N/OLF034068N
2-63
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags and the driver’s knee
air bag are designed to inflate in a
frontal collision depending on the
severity, speed, or angles of impact
of the front collision.
Side and curtain air bags
Side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the severity, speed, or
angles of impact resulting from a
side impact collision.
Although the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s air bags are designed to
inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of col-
lisions if the front impact sensors
detect a sufficient impact. Side and
curtain air bags are designed to
inflate only in side impact collisions
or rollover situations, but they may
inflate in other collisions if the side
impact sensors detect a sufficient
impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle
traffic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.
OLF034051
OLF034052
OLF034050
2-64
Safety system of your vehicle
Air bag non-inflation conditions
In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags
are designed not to deploy in such
cases because they may not provide
benefits beyond the protection of the
seat belts.
Front air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because
occupants are moved backward by
the force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not provide
any additional benefit.
Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move in the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, front air bag
deployment would not provide addi-
tional occupant protection.
However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate depending on the severi-
ty, vehicle speed and angles of
impact.
OLF034055OLF034054
OLF034053
2-65
Safety system of your vehicle
2
In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would
not be able to provide any additional
benefit, and thus the sensors may
not deploy any air bags.
Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehicle
causing it to “ride” under a vehicle
with a higher ground clearance. Air
bags may not inflate in this "under-
ride" situation because deceleration
forces that are detected by sensors
may be significantly reduced by such
“underride” collisions.
Front air bags may not inflate in
rollover accidents because air bag
deployment could not provide protec-
tion to the occupants.
However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate when the vehicle is rolled
over by a side impact collision.
ODH033076 OLF034056 OLF034057
2-66
Safety system of your vehicle
Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated and the colli-
sion energy is absorbed by the vehi-
cle structure.
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-
free and there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illumi-
nate when the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton is in the ON position, or continu-
ously remains on, have your vehicle
immediately inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel, the
front passenger’s panel, front seats
and roof rails must be performed by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Improper handling of the SRS system
may result in serious personal injury.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death, take the follow-
ing precautions:
• Do not attempt to modify or
disconnect the SRS compo-
nents or wiring, including the
addition of any kind of badges
to the pad covers or modifica-
tions to the body structure.
• Do not place objects over or
near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, or the front passen-
ger’s panel above the glove
box.
• Clean the air bag pad covers
with a soft cloth moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely
affect the air bag covers and
proper deployment of the sys-
tem.
• Always have inflated air bags
replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
WARNING
OLF034058
2-67
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Additional Safety Precautions
Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash or
emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or be ejected
from the vehicle.
Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
seat belt can reduce the protection
provided by the seat belt and increase
the chance of serious injury in a crash
Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the sup-
plemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the opera-
tion of the supplemental restraint sys-
tem sensing components and wiring
harnesses.
Do not cause impact to the doors.
Impact to the doors when the Engine
Start/Stop button is in the ON position
may cause the air bags to inflate.
Modifications to accommodate
disabilities. If you require modifica-
tion to your vehicle to accommodate
a disability, contact the HYUNDAI
Customer Connect Center at 1-877-
378-8727.
Adding equipment to or modify-
ing your air bag equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle’s frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle’s air bag system.
(Continued)
• If components of the air bag
system must be discarded,or if
the vehicle must be scrapped,
certain safety precautions
must be observed. Consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
the necessary information.
Failure to follow these precau-
tions could increase the risk of
personal injury.
Air Bag Warning Labels
OLF034059N/OLF034060N/OLF034061
Air bag warning labels, required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), are attached to
alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.Be sure to read all of the information about the
air bags that are installed on your vehicle in this Owners Manual.
Safety system of your vehicle
2-68
Convenient features of your vehicle
Accessing your vehicle .........................................3-4
Remote Key.........................................................................3-4
Smart Key............................................................................3-8
Immobilizer System.........................................................3-12
Door locks.............................................................3-14
Outside the Vehicle.........................................................3-14
Inside the Vehicle............................................................3-15
Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features...............................3-17
Child-Protector Rear Door locks ................................3-18
Theft-alarm system.............................................3-19
Driver position memory system.........................3-20
Storing Positions into Memory....................................3-20
Easy Access Function ....................................................3-21
Steering wheel......................................................3-22
Electric Power Steering (EPS) .....................................3-22
Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering..............................3-23
Heated Steering Wheel..................................................3-23
Horn....................................................................................3-24
Mirrors...................................................................3-25
Inside Rearview Mirror ..................................................3-25
Side view Mirrors ............................................................3-40
Reverse Parking Aid Function......................................3-43
Windows ................................................................3-44
Power Windows...............................................................3-45
Sunroof..................................................................3-48
Sunroof opening and closing.......................................3-48
Sliding the sunroof .........................................................3-48
Tilting the sunroof..........................................................3-49
Sunshade...........................................................................3-50
Resetting the sunroof....................................................3-50
Panoramic sunroof ..............................................3-52
Sunshade...........................................................................3-52
Sliding the Sunroof.........................................................3-53
Tilting the Sunroof .........................................................3-53
Closing the Sunroof........................................................3-54
To Reset the Sunroof.....................................................3-55
Exterior features .................................................3-56
Hood ...................................................................................3-56
Trunk ..................................................................................3-57
Smart Trunk......................................................................3-60
Fuel Filler Door................................................................3-63
Instrument cluster................................................3-67
Instrument Cluster Control............................................3-69
LCD Display Control........................................................3-70
3
LCD Display...........................................................3-75
LCD Modes........................................................................3-75
Trip Computer Mode.......................................................3-76
Turn By Turn (TBT) Mode ............................................3-77
SCC/LDWS Mode.............................................................3-77
A/V Mode..........................................................................3-77
Information Mode ...........................................................3-78
User Settings Mode........................................................3-80
Warning Messages..........................................................3-85
Trip computer .......................................................3-92
Trip A/B .............................................................................3-93
Fuel Economy...................................................................3-94
Digital Speedometer .......................................................3-96
Warning and indicator lights..............................3-97
Warning Lights.................................................................3-97
Indicator Lights..............................................................3-104
Light.....................................................................3-109
Exterior Lights ...............................................................3-109
Smart High Beam ..........................................................3-111
Welcome System...........................................................3-117
Interior Lights ................................................................3-118
Wipers and washers ..........................................3-122
Windshield Wipers ........................................................3-122
Windshield Washers .....................................................3-123
Driver assist system ..........................................3-124
Rear View Camera ........................................................3-124
Rear Parking Assist System .......................................3-125
Defroster.............................................................3-128
Rear Window Defroster ..............................................3-128
Manual climate control system........................3-129
Heating and Air Conditioning.....................................3-130
System Operation .........................................................3-135
System Maintenance....................................................3-137
Automatic climate control system...................3-139
Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning.................3-140
Manual heating and Air Conditioning ......................3-141
System Operation .........................................................3-147
System Maintenance....................................................3-149
Windshield defrosting and defogging ...............3-151
Manual Climate Control System ................................3-151
Automatic Climate Control System ...........................3-152
Climate control additional features...................3-154
Automatic Ventilation...................................................3-154
Sunroof Inside Air Recirculation...............................3-154
Storage compartment........................................3-155
Center Console Storage ..............................................3-155
Glove Box........................................................................3-155
Sunglass Holder.............................................................3-156
Multi box .........................................................................3-156
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Interior features.................................................3-157
Cup Holder ......................................................................3-157
Sunvisor...........................................................................3-158
Power Outlet ..................................................................3-158
Clock.................................................................................3-160
Clothes Hanger ..............................................................3-161
Floor Mat Anchor(s).....................................................3-162
Side Curtain ....................................................................3-163
Luggage Net Holder .....................................................3-163
3
3-4
Convenient features of your vehicle
Remote Key (if equipped)
Your HYUNDAI uses a remote key,
which you can use to lock or unlock
a door (and trunk) and even start the
engine.
1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3.Trunk Unlock
4. Panic
Locking
To lock :
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
trunk.
2. Press the Door Lock button (1) on
the remote key.
3.The hazard warning lights will
blink and the chime will sound
once if the lock button is pressed
once more within four seconds.
4. Make sure the doors are locked by
checking the position of the door
lock button inside the vehicle.
Information
After locking the doors, if you press
the Door Lock button again within
four seconds, the hazard warning
lights will blink and the horn will
sound one time to confirm that the
doors are locked.
i
AACCCCEESSSSIINNGG YYOOUURR VVEEHHIICCLLEE
OHG040006
Do not leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren. Unattended children
could place the key in the igni-
tion switch and may operate
power windows or other con-
trols, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
3-5
Convenient features of your vehicle
Unlocking
To unlock:
1.Press the Door Unlock button (2)
on the remote key.
2.The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
If you press the Door Unlock button
again within four seconds, then all
the doors will unlock.
Information
After unlocking the doors, the doors
will lock automatically after 30 sec-
onds unless a door is opened.
Trunk unlocking
To unlock:
1. Press the Trunk Unlock button (3)
on the remote key for more than
one second.
2.The hazard warning lights will
blink two times.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will lock automati-
cally.
Information
• After unlocking the trunk, the trunk
will lock automatically.
• The word "HOLD" is written on the
button to inform you that you must
press and hold the button for more
than one second.
Panic button
Press the Panic button (4) for more
than one second. The horn sounds
and hazard warning lights flash for
about 30 seconds.
To cancel the panic mode, press any
button on the remote key.
Start-up
For more information, refer to the
“Key Ignition Switch” section in chap-
ter 5.
To prevent damaging the remote
key:
• Keep the remote key away from
water or any liquid and fire. If the
inside of the remote key gets
damp (due to drinks or mois-
ture), or is heated, internal cir-
cuit may malfunction, excluding
the car from the warranty.
• Avoid dropping or throwing the
remote key.
• Protect the remote key from
extreme temperatures.
NOTICE
ii
3
3-6
Mechanical key
If the remote key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
door by using the mechanical key.
Press the release button then the key
will unfold automatically.
To fold the key, fold the key manually
while pressing the release button.
Remote key precautions
The remote key will not work if any of
the following occur:
• The key is in the ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 90 feet [30 m]).
• The remote key battery is weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The remote key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the remote key.
When the remote key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you have
a problem with the remote key con-
tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If the remote key is in close proximi-
ty to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phones normal operational signals.
This is especially important when the
phone is active such as making and
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the remote key and
your mobile phone in the same pants
or jacket pocket and always try to
maintain an adequate distance
between the two devices.
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLF044001
3-7
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the device.
Keep the remote key away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves to
the key surface.
Battery replacement
If the remote key is not working prop-
erly, try replacing the battery with a
new one.
Battery Type: CR2032
To replace the battery:
1. Pry open the rear cover of the
remote key.
2. Remove the old battery and insert
the new battery. Make sure the
battery position is correct.
3. Reinstall the rear cover of the
remote key.
If you suspect your remote key might
have sustained some damage, or
you feel your remote key is not work-
ing correctly contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s) and reg-
ulation.
i
NOTICE
i
3
OLM042302
3-8
Convenient features of your vehicle
Smart Key (if equipped)
Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key,
which you can use to lock or unlock
a door (and trunk) and even start the
engine.
1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3.Trunk Unlock
4. Panic
Locking
To lock :
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
trunk.
2. Either press the door handle but-
ton or press the Door Lock button
(1) on the smart key.
3.The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
4. Make sure the doors are locked by
checking the position of the door
lock button inside the vehicle.
Information
The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is within
28~40 inches (0.7~1 m) from the out-
side door handle.
Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will not
lock and the chime will sound for
three seconds if any of the following
occur:
• The Smart Key is in the vehicle.
• The Engine Start/Stop button is in
ACC or ON position.
• Any door except the trunk is open.
i
OLF044002NOLF044003/Q
Do not leave the Smart Key in
your vehicle with unsupervised
children. Unattended children
could press the Engine Start/
Stop button and may operate
power windows or other con-
trols, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
3-9
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Unlocking
To unlock:
1. Carry the Smart Key.
2. Either press the driver's outside
door handle button or press the
Door Unlock button (2) on the
smart key.
3. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
If you press the driver's outside
door handle button or Door Unlock
button on the smart key again
within four seconds, then all the
doors will unlock.
Information
• The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is with-
in 28~40 inches (0.7~1 m) from the
outside door handle and other peo-
ple can also open the doors.
• If you press the front passenger's
outside door handle, while carrying
the Smart Key, all doors will unlock.
• After unlocking the doors, the doors
will lock automatically after 30 sec-
onds unless a door is opened.
Trunk opening
To open:
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Either press the trunk handle but-
ton or press and hold the Trunk
Unlock button (3) on the smart key
for more than one second.
3. The hazard warning lights will
blink two times.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will lock automati-
cally.
Information
The trunk handle button will only
operate when the smart key is within
28 inches (0.7 m) from the trunk han-
dle.
i
i
OLF046002N
3-10
Convenient features of your vehicle
Panic button
Press the Panic button (4) and hold
for more than one second. The horn
sounds and hazard warning lights
blink for about 30 seconds.To cancel
the panic mode, press any button on
the Smart Key.
Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key.
For more information, refer to the
“Engine Start/Stop Button” sec-
tion in chapter 5.
To prevent damaging the smart key:
• Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid and fire. If the
inside of the smart key gets
damp (due to drinks or mois-
ture), or is heated, internal cir-
cuit may malfunction, excluding
the car from the warranty.
• Avoid dropping or throwing the
smart key.
• Protect the smart key from
extreme temperatures.
Mechanical key
If the Smart Key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
door by using the mechanical key.
Press and hold the release button (1)
and remove the mechanical key (2).
Insert the mechanical key into the
key hole on the door.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
Loss of a smart key
A maximum of two Smart Keys can
be registered to a single vehicle. If
you happen to lose your smart key,
you should immediately take the
vehicle and remaining keys to your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or tow
the vehicle, if necessary.
NOTICE
OLF044007
3-11
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Smart key precautions
The smart key will not work if any of
the following occur:
• The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the trans-
mitter.
• The smart key is near a mobile two
way radio system or a cellular
phone.
• Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you have
a problem with the smart key, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the smart key is in close proximity
to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phones normal operational signals.
This is especially important when the
phone is active such as making and
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the smart key and your
mobile phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and always try to main-
tain an adequate distance between
the two devices.
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the device.
i
Keep the smart key away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves
to the key surface.
CAUTION
3-12
Convenient features of your vehicle
Battery replacement
If the Smart Key is not working prop-
erly, try replacing the battery with a
new one.
Battery Type: CR2032
To replace the battery:
1. Pry open the rear cover of the
smart key.
2. Remove the old battery and insert
the new battery.
3. Reinstall the rear cover of the
smart key.
If you suspect your smart key might
have sustained some damage, or
you feel your smart key is not work-
ing correctly, contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
and regulation(s).
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from theft. If an improperly
coded key (or other device) is used,
the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
When the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, the immobilizer sys-
tem indicator should come on briefly,
then go off. If the indicator starts to
blink, the system does not recognize
the coding of the key.
Place the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, then place the
ignition switch to the ON position again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e., key
chain) is near the key. The engine
may not start because the metal may
interrupt the transponder signal from
transmitting normally.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of the key, it is
recommended that you contact your
HYUNDAI dealer.
i
OLF044008
3-13
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle inoperable.
The transponder in your key is an
important part of the immobilizer
system. It is designed to give
years of trouble-free service, how-
ever you should avoid exposure to
moisture, static electricity and
rough handling. Immobilizer sys-
tem malfunction could occur.
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the device.
i
NOTICE
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and
should be kept confidential.
WARNING
3-14
Convenient features of your vehicle
Operating Door Locks from
Outside the Vehicle
Mechanical key
If you lock the driver's door with a
mechanical key, all vehicle doors will
lock. If you unlock the driver's door
with a mechanical key, the driver's
door will unlock.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
Remote key
To lock the doors, press the Door
Lock button (1) on the remote key.
Press the Door Unlock button (2) on
the remote key, the driver's door will
unlock. If you press the Door Unlock
button on the remote key again with-
in four seconds, then all the doors
will unlock.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
Information
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operat-
ing temporarily in order to protect
the circuit and prevent damage to
system components.
i
DDOOOORR LLOOCCKKSS
OLF046009N
■ Remote key ■ Smart key
OLF044470N/Q
3-15
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Smart key
To lock the doors, press the button
on the outside door handle while car-
rying the Smart Key with you or
press the Door Lock button on the
Smart Key.
Press the button on the driver's out-
side door handle while carrying the
Smart Key with you or press the
Door Unlock button on the Smart
Key, the driver's door will unlock. If
you press the button on the front
passenger's outside door, all doors
will unlock.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
Information
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operat-
ing temporarily in order to protect
the circuit and prevent damage to
system components.
Operating Door Locks from
Inside the Vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button (1) to the "Unlock" posi-
tion. The red mark (2) on the door
lock button will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the "Lock" position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door han-
dle (3) outward.
i
OLF044010
Unlock
Lock
OLF046002N
OLF044003
Door
Unlock
Door
Lock
3-16
Convenient features of your vehicle
• If the inner door handle of the dri-
ver's (or front passenger's) door is
pulled when the door lock button is
in the lock position, the button is
unlocked and door opens.
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
key is in the ignition switch and any
front door is open.
• Doors cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and any
door is open.
Information
If a power door lock ever fails to func-
tion while you are in the vehicle try
one or more of the following tech-
niques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
mechanical key to unlock the door
from outside.
With the central door lock
switch
When pressing the ( ) switch (1), all
vehicle doors will lock.
When pressing the ( ) switch (2), all
vehicle doors will unlock.
If the key is in the ignition switch and
any door is opened, the doors will not
lock even though the lock button (1) of
the central door lock switch is pressed.
If the smart key is in the vehicle and
any door is opened, the doors will
not lock even though the lock button
(1) of the central door lock switch is
pressed.
i
The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion. If the
doors are unlocked, the risk of
being thrown from the vehicle in
a crash is increased.
WARNING
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle. An
enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
serious injury to unattended
children or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle. Children
might operate features of the
vehicle that could injure them,
or they could encounter other
harm, possibly from someone
gaining entry to the vehicle.
WARNING
■ Driver’s door
OLF044011N/OLF044480N
3-17
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features
Impact sensing door unlock
system
All doors will be automatically
unlocked when an impact causes the
air bags to deploy.
Speed sensing door lock system
All doors will be automatically locked
when vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph
(15 km/h).
All of the doors will be automatically
unlocked after the engine is turned off.
Shift lever auto door lock
All doors will be automatically locked
when shifting the shift lever out of P
(Park) with the engine running.
You can activate or deactivate the
Auto Door Lock/Unlock features from
the User Settings Mode on the LCD
display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.
Always secure your vehicle.
Leaving your vehicle unlocked
increases the potential risk to
you or others from someone
hiding in your vehicle.
To secure your vehicle, while
depressing the brake, move the
shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion, engage the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in
the LOCK/OFF position, close
all windows, lock all doors, and
always take the key with you.
WARNING
Opening a door when something
is approaching may cause dam-
age or injury. Be careful when
opening doors and watch for
vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles
or pedestrians approaching the
vehicle in the path of the door.
CAUTION
3-18
Convenient features of your vehicle
Child-Protector Rear Door locks
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children seated in the
rear from accidentally opening the
rear doors.The rear door safety locks
should be used whenever children
are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock is located on
the edge of each rear door.When the
child safety lock is in the lock (1)
position, the rear door will not open if
the inner door handle (2) is pulled.
To lock the child safety lock, insert a
screwdriver into the hole and turn it
to the lock position.
To allow a rear door to be opened
from inside the vehicle, unlock the
child safety lock.
If children accidently open the
rear doors while the vehicle is
in motion, they could fall out of
the vehicle.The rear door safety
locks should always be used
whenever children are in the
vehicle.
WARNING
OLF044012
3-19
Convenient features of your vehicle
This system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables. The horn will
sound and the hazard warning lights
will blink continuously if any of the
following occurs:
- A door is opened without using the
remote key or smart key.
- The trunk is opened without using
the remote key or smart key.
- The engine hood is opened.
The alarm continues for 30 seconds,
then the system resets. To turn off
the alarm, unlock the doors with
the remote key or smart key.
The Theft Alarm System automati-
cally sets 30 seconds after you lock
the doors and the trunk. For the sys-
tem to activate, you must lock the
doors and the trunk from outside the
vehicle with the remote key or smart
key or by pressing the button on the
outside of the door handles with the
smart key in your possession.
The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once to
indicate the system is armed.
Once the security system is set,
opening any door, the trunk, or the
hood without using the remote key or
smart key will cause the alarm to
activate.
The Theft Alarm System will not set if
the hood, the trunk, or any door is
not fully closed. If the system will not
set, check the hood, the trunk, or the
doors are fully closed.
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it.
Information
• Do not lock the doors until all pas-
sengers have left the vehicle. If the
remaining passenger leaves the
vehicle when the system is armed,
the alarm will be activated.
• If the vehicle is not disarmed with the
remote key or smart key, open the
doors by using the mechanical key
and place the ignition switch in the
ON position (for remote key) or start
the engine (for smart key) by direct-
ly pressing the ignition switch with
the smart key.
• When the system is disarmed but a
door or trunk is not opened within 30
seconds, the system will be rearmed.
i
TTHHEEFFTT--AALLAARRMM SSYYSSTTEEMM
3
3-20
Convenient features of your vehicle
The Driver Position Memory System
is provided to store and recall the fol-
lowing memory settings with a sim-
ple button operation.
- Driver’s seat position
- Side view mirror position
- Instrument panel illumination intensity
If the battery is disconnected, the
position memory will be lost and the
driving positions must be stored in
the system again.
If the Driver Position Memory
System does not operate normally,
have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Storing Positions into Memory
1. Check that the shift lever is in P
(Park) while the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat position,
side view mirror position and
instrument panel illumination
intensity to positions comfortable
for the driver.
3. Press the SET button.The system
will beep once and notify you
"Press button to save settings"on
the LCD display.
4. Press one of the memory buttons
(1 or 2) within 5 seconds.The sys-
tem will beep twice when the mem-
ory has been successfully stored.
5.
"Driver 1 (or 2) settings saved" will
appear on the LCD display.
DDRRIIVVEERR PPOOSSIITTIIOONN MMEEMMOORRYY SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OLF044013
Never attempt to operate the driv-
er position memory system while
the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
WARNING
OLF044403N/OLF044404N
3-21
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Recalling positions from memory
1. Check that the shift lever is in P
(Park) while the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
2. Press the desired memory button
(1 or 2).The system will beep once,
and then the driver’s seat position,
side view mirror position and instru-
ment panel illumination intensity
will automatically adjust to the
stored positions.
3.
"Driver 1(or 2) settings is applied" will
appear on the LCD display.
• While recalling the "1" memory
position, pressing the SET or 1
button temporarily stops the
adjustment of the recalled memo-
ry position. Pressing the 2 button
recalls the "2" memory position.
• While recalling the "2" memory
position, pressing the SET or 2
button temporarily stops the
adjustment of the recalled memo-
ry position. Pressing the 1 button
recalls the "1" memory position.
• While recalling the stored posi-
tions, pressing one of the con-
trol buttons for the driver’s seat,
side view mirror or instrument
panel illumination will cause the
movement of that component to
stop and move in the direction
that the control button is
pressed.
Easy Access Function
When exiting the vehicle the driver’s
seat will move rearward when the
engine is turned off and the shift lever
in P (Park).
When entering the vehicle the dri-
ver’s seat will move forward when the
ignition switch is placed to the ACC
position.
You can activate or deactivate the
Easy Access Function from the User
Settings Mode on the LCD display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.
NOTICE
OLF044401N/OLF044402N
3-22
Convenient features of your vehicle
SSTTEEEERRIINNGG WWHHEEEELL
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
The system assists you with steering
the vehicle.If the engine is turned off
or if the power steering system
becomes inoperative, you may still
steer the vehicle, but it will require
increased steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The steering effort may be high
immediately after placing the igni-
tion switch in the ON position.
This happens as the system per-
forms the EPS system diagnostics.
When the diagnostics is completed,
the steering wheel will return to its
normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the ignition switch is
in the ON or OFF position.
• Motor noise may be heard when the
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driv-
ing speed.
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, abnormal
noise may occur. If temperature
rises, the noise will disappear. This
is a normal condition.
i
If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate nor-
mally, the warning light ( ) will
illuminate on the instrument
cluster. You may steer the vehi-
cle, but it will require increased
steering efforts.Take your vehi-
cle to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system
checked as soon as possible.
CAUTION
3-23
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering
Adjust the steering wheel so it points
toward your chest, not toward your
face. Make sure you can see the
instrument panel warning lights and
gauges. After adjusting, push the
steering wheel both up and down to
be certain it is locked in position.
Always adjust the position of the
steering wheel before driving.
To change the steering wheel angle
and height:
1. Pull down the lock-release lever (1).
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and height (3).
3. Pull up the lock-release lever to
lock the steering wheel in place.
Information
After adjustment, sometimes the lock
release lever may not lock the steering
wheel. It is not a malfunction. This
occurs when two gears are not
engaged correctly. In this case, adjust
the steering wheel again and then lock
the steering wheel.
Heated Steering Wheel
(if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position or when the engine is running,
press the heated steering wheel but-
ton to warm the steering wheel. The
indicator on the button will illuminate.
i
OLF044015
OLF044016
OLF044017
■ Type A
■ Type B
NEVER adjust the steering
wheel while driving. This may
cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
WARNING
3-24
Convenient features of your vehicle
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button again.The indicator
on the button will turn off.
The heated steering wheel will auto-
matically turn off after approximately
30 minutes.
Do not install any cover or acces-
sory on the steering wheel. The
cover or accessory could cause
damage to the heated steering
wheel system.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on your
steering wheel (see illustration). The
horn will operate only when this area
is pressed.
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist.
Do not press on the horn with a
sharp-pointed object.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OLF044018
3-25
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
MMIIRRRROORRSS
Inside Rearview Mirror
Before you start driving, adjust the
rearview mirror to the center on the
view through the rear window.
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that may cause the
liquid cleaner to enter the mirror
housing.
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
NOTICE
Make sure your line of sight is
not obstructed. Do not place
objects in the rear seat, cargo
area, or behind the rear head-
rests which could interfere with
your vision through the rear
window.
WARNING
NEVER adjust the mirror while
driving. This may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident.
WARNING
To prevent serious injury during
an accident or deployment of
the air bag, do not modify the
rearview mirror and do not
install a wide mirror.
WARNING
OLF044019N
OLF044474N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Day
Night
3-26
Convenient features of your vehicle
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicles behind you during night
driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
Blue Link
®
center (if equipped)
For details, refer to the Blue Link
®
Owner’s Guide, Navigation Manual
or Audio Manual.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with HomeLink
®
system,
compass and Blue Link
®
(for U.S.A)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror
with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass
Display and an Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System. During
nighttime driving, this feature will
automatically detect and reduce
rearview mirror glare while the com-
pass indicates the direction the vehi-
cle is pointed. The HomeLink
®
Universal Transceiver allows you to
activate your garage door(s), electric
gate, home lighting, etc.
OLF044021
3-27
Convenient features of your vehicle
(1) Telematics button
(2) Telematics button
(3) Telematics button
(4) Compass control button &
Dimming ON/OFF button
(5) Status indicator LED
(6) Channel 1 button
(7) Channel 2 button
(8) Channel 3 button
(9) Compass display
(10) Rear light sensor
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision
Safety™ (NVS
®
) Mirror
(if equipped)
The NVS
®
Mirror automatically
reduces glare by monitoring light lev-
els in the front and the rear of the
vehicle. Any object that obstructs
either light sensor will degrade the
automatic dimming control feature.
For more information regarding
NVS
®
mirrors and other applica-
tions, please refer to the Gentex
website:
www.gentex.com
Your mirror will automatically dim
upon detecting glare from the vehi-
cles traveling behind you. The auto-
dimming function can be controlled
by pressing the Dimming ON/OFF
button:
1. Pressing and holding the button
for 3 seconds turns the auto-dim-
ming function OFF which is indi-
cated by the green Status
Indicator LED turning off.
2. Pressing and holding the button
for 3 seconds again turns the
auto-dimming function ON which
is indicated by the green Status
Indicator LED turning on.
The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion each time the vehicle is started.
Z-Nav™ Compass Display
The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is
also equipped with a Z-Nav™
Compass that shows the vehicle
Compass heading in the Display
Window using the 8 basic cardinal
headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
3
OLF044475N
3-28
Convenient features of your vehicle
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn
the display feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the button
within 1 second to turn the display
feature OFF.
2. Press and release the button
again within 1 second to turn the
display back ON.
Additional options can be set with
press and hold sequences of the
button and are detailed below.
There is a difference between mag-
netic north and true north. To com-
pensate for this difference you will
need to adjust the Zone setting based
on where you live.
B520C05NF
3-29
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
To adjust the Zone setting:
1.Determine the desired Zone
Number based upon your current
location on the Zone Map.
2. Press and hold the button for 6
seconds, the current Zone
Number will appear on the display.
3. Pressing and holding the button
again will cause the numbers to
increment (Note: they will repeat
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing
the button when the desired Zone
Number appears on the display
will set the new Zone.
4.Within about 5 seconds the com-
pass will start displaying a com-
pass heading again.
There are some conditions that can
cause changes to the vehicle mag-
nets, such as installing a ski rack or
a CB antenna. Body repair work on
the vehicle can also cause changes
to the vehicle’s magnetic field. In
these situations, the compass will
need to be re-calibrated to quickly
correct these changes.
If you need to recalibrate the com-
pass:
1. Press and hold the button for
more than 9 seconds. When the
compass memory is cleared a "C"
will appear in the display.
2. Drive the vehicle in 2 complete cir-
cles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System can replace up to three
hand-held radio-frequency (RF)
transmitters with a single built-in
device. This innovative feature will
learn the radio frequency codes of
most current transmitters to operate
devices such as gate operators,
garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems, even home
lighting. Both standard and rolling
code-equipped transmitters can be
programmed by following the out-
lined procedures.
Additional HomeLink
®
information
can be found at: www.homelink.com
or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Retain the original transmitter of the
RF device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as for
future HomeLink
®
programming. It is
also suggested that upon the sale of
the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink
®
buttons be erased for
security purposes.
3-30
Convenient features of your vehicle
Programming HomeLink
®
Please note the following:
• When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park the
vehicle outside of the garage.
• It is recommended that a new bat-
tery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being pro-
grammed to HomeLink
®
for quicker
training and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal.
• Some vehicles may require the
ignition switch to be placed in the
ACC (or "Accessories") position for
programming and/or operation of
HomeLink
®
.
• In the event that there are still pro-
gramming difficulties or questions
after following the programming
steps listed below, contact
HomeLink
®
at: www.homelink.com
or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Programming
To train most devices, follow these
instructions:
1. For first-time programming, press
and hold the two outside buttons
(
,
), HomeLink
®
Channel 1
and Channel 3, until the indicator
light begins to flash (after 10 sec-
onds). Release both buttons. Do
not hold the buttons for longer
than 20 seconds.
ODH044413N
Flashing
Before programming HomeLink
®
to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and
objects are out of the way of the
device to prevent potential harm
or damage. Do not use the
HomeLink
®
with any garage door
opener that lacks the safety stop
and reverse features required by
U.S.federal safety standards (this
includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April
1, 1982). A garage door that can-
not detect an object - signaling
the door to stop and reverse -
does not meet current U.S. feder-
al safety standards. Using a
garage door opener without
these features increases the risk
of serious injury or death.
WARNING
3-31
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm)
away from the HomeLink
®
button
you wish to program while keeping
the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink
®
and hand-
held transmitter buttons until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light changes
from a slow to a rapid blinking
light. Now you may release both
the HomeLink
®
and hand-held
transmitter buttons.
Information
Some devices may require you to
replace this Programming step 3 with
procedures noted in the "Gate
Operator/Canadian Programming"
chapter. If the HomeLink
®
indicator
light does not change to a rapidly
blinking light after performing these
steps, contact HomeLink
®
at
www.homelink.com.
4. Firmly press, hold for 5 seconds and
release the programmed
HomeLink
®
button up to two sepa-
rate times to activate the door. If the
door does not activate, press and
hold the just-trained HomeLink
®
but-
ton and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on con-
stantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate
when the HomeLink
®
button is
pressed and released.
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly
for 2 seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with
"Programming" steps 5-7 to com-
plete the programming of a rolling
code equipped device (most com-
monly a garage door opener).
5. At the garage door opener receiv-
er (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the "learn" or "smart" but-
ton. This can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
i
ODH044414N
Flashing
3-32
Convenient features of your vehicle
6.Firmly press and release the
"learn" or "smart" button. (The
name and color of the button vary
by manufacturer). There are 30
seconds to initiate step 7.
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly
press, hold for 2 seconds and
release the programmed
HomeLink
®
button. Repeat the
"press/hold/release" sequence a
second time, and, depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped device),
repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming
process.
HomeLink
®
should now activate your
rolling code equipped device.
Gate operator & Canadian program-
ming
During programming, your handheld
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press the
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System button (note steps 2
through 3 in the Programming portion
of this document) while you press
and re-press ("cycle") your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until
the frequency signal has been
learned. The indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly after several
seconds upon successful training.
Operating HomeLink
®
To operate, simply press and release
the programmed HomeLink
®
button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security sys-
tem, entry door lock, home/office
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink
®
button
To program a device to HomeLink
®
using a HomeLink
®
button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1.Press and hold the desired
HomeLink
®
button. DO NOT
release the button.
2.The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds.Without releasing
the HomeLink
®
button, proceed
with "Programming" step 2.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink
®
at www.homelink.com
or
1-800-355-3515.
3-33
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Erasing HomeLink
®
buttons
Individual buttons cannot be erased.
However, to erase all three pro-
grammed buttons:
1.Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons until the indi-
cator light begins to flash after 10
seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 20 seconds.
The Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System is now in the training
(learn) mode and can be pro-
grammed at any time following the
appropriate steps in the
Programming chapters above.
NVS
®
is a registered trademark and
Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex
Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.
HomeLink
®
is a registered trademark
owned by Johnson Controls,
Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
FCC ID: NZLTLMHL4
IC: 4112A-TLMHL4
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
3. The transceiver has been tested and
complies with FCC and Industry
Canada rules. Changes or modifica-
tions not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to
operate the device.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with compass and HomeLink
®
system (for Canada)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror
with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass
Display and an Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System.
During nighttime driving, this feature
will automatically detect and reduce
rearview mirror glare while the com-
pass indicates the direction the vehi-
cle is pointed. The HomeLink
®
Universal Transceiver allows you to
activate your garage door(s), electric
gate, home lighting, etc.
i
3-34
Convenient features of your vehicle
(1) Channel 1 button
(2) Channel 2 button
(3) Status indicator LED
(4) Channel 3 button
(5) Rear light sensor
(6) Dimming ON/OFF button
(7) Compass control button
(8) Compass display
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision
Safety™ (NVS
®
) Mirror
(if equipped)
The NVS
®
Mirror automatically
reduces glare by monitoring light lev-
els in the front and the rear of the
vehicle. Any object that obstructs
either light sensor will degrade the
automatic dimming control feature.
For more information regarding
NVS
®
mirrors and other applica-
tions, please refer to the Gentex
website:
www.gentex.com
The auto-dimming function can be
controlled by pressing the ON/OFF
button:
1. Pressing the button turns the auto-
dimming function OFF which is
indicated by the green Status
Indicator LED turning off.
2. Pressing the button again turns
the auto-dimming function ON
which is indicated by the green
Status Indicator LED turning on.
The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion each time the vehicle is started.
Z-Nav™ Compass Display
The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is
also equipped with a Z-Nav™
Compass that shows the vehicle
Compass heading in the Display
Window using the 8 basic cardinal
headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
OLF044476N
3-35
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn
the display feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the button to
turn the display feature OFF.
2. Press and release the button
again to turn the display back ON.
Additional options can be set with
press and hold sequences of the but-
ton and are detailed below.
There is a difference between mag-
netic north and true north. To com-
pensate for this difference you will
need to adjust the Zone setting
based on where you live.
B520C05NF
3-36
Convenient features of your vehicle
To adjust the Zone setting:
1.Determine the desired Zone
Number based upon your current
location on the Zone Map.
2. Press and hold the button for
more than 3 but less than 6 sec-
onds, the current Zone Number
will appear on the display.
3. Pressing and holding the button
again will cause the numbers to
increment (Note: they will repeat
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing
the button when the desired Zone
Number appears on the display
will set the new Zone.
4.Within about 5 seconds the com-
pass will start displaying a com-
pass heading again.
There are some conditions that can
cause changes to the vehicle mag-
nets, such as installing a ski rack or
a CB antenna. Body repair work on
the vehicle can also cause changes
to the vehicle’s magnetic field. In
these situations, the compass will
need to be re-calibrated to quickly
correct these changes.
If you need to recalibrate the com-
pass:
1. Press and hold the button for
more than 6 seconds. When the
compass memory is cleared a "C"
will appear in the display.
2. Drive the vehicle in 2 complete cir-
cles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System can replace up to three hand-
held radio-frequency (RF) transmit-
ters with a single built-in device. This
innovative feature will learn the radio
frequency codes of most current
transmitters to operate devices such
as gate operators, garage door open-
ers, entry door locks, security sys-
tems, even home lighting. Both stan-
dard and rolling code-equipped trans-
mitters can be programmed by fol-
lowing the outlined procedures.
Additional HomeLink
®
information
can be found at: www.homelink.com
or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Retain the original transmitter of the
RF device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as for
future HomeLink
®
programming. It is
also suggested that upon the sale of
the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink
®
buttons be erased for
security purposes.
3-37
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Programming HomeLink
®
Please note the following:
• When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park the
vehicle outside of the garage.
• It is recommended that a new bat-
tery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being pro-
grammed to HomeLink
®
for quicker
training and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal.
• Some vehicles may require the
ignition switch to be placed in the
ACC (or "Accessories") position for
programming and/or operation of
HomeLink
®
.
• In the event that there are still pro-
gramming difficulties or questions
after following the programming
steps listed below, contact
HomeLink
®
at: www.homelink.com
or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Rolling code programming
Rolling code devices which are
"code-protected" and manufactured
after 1996 may be determined by the
following:
• Reference the device owner’s
manual for verification.
• The handheld transmitter appears
to program the HomeLink
®
Universal Transceiver but does not
activate the device.
• Press and hold the trained
HomeLink button. The device has
the rolling code feature if the indi-
cator light flashes rapidly and then
turns solid after 2 seconds.
Before programming HomeLink
®
to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and
objects are out of the way of the
device to prevent potential harm
or damage. Do not use the
HomeLink
®
with any garage door
opener that lacks the safety stop
and reverse features required by
U.S.federal safety standards (this
includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April
1, 1982). A garage door that can-
not detect an object - signaling
the door to stop and reverse -
does not meet current U.S. feder-
al safety standards. Using a
garage door opener without
these features increases the risk
of serious injury or death.
WARNING
3-38
Convenient features of your vehicle
To train rolling code devices, follow
these instructions:
1. At the garage door opener receiv-
er (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the "learn" or "smart" but-
ton. This can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
Exact location and color of the but-
ton may vary by garage door
opener brand. If there is difficulty
locating the training button, refer-
ence the device owner’s manual or
please visit our Web site at
www.homelink.com.
2.Firmly press and release the
"learn" or "smart" button (which
activates the "training light"). You
will have 30 seconds to initiate
step 3.
3. Return to the vehicle and firmly
press, hold for two seconds and
then release the desired
HomeLink
®
button. Repeat the
"press/hold/release" sequence a
second time to complete the pro-
gramming. (Some devices may
require you to repeat this
sequence a third time to complete
the programming.)
4. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe
the red Status Indicator LED. If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and
your device should activate.
5.To program the remaining two
HomeLink
®
buttons, follow either
steps 1 through 4 above for other
Rolling Code devices or steps 2
through 5 in Standard Programming
for standard devices.
Standard programming
To train most devices, follow these
instructions:
1. For first-time programming, press
and hold the two outside buttons,
HomeLink
®
Channel 1 and
Channel 3 Buttons, until the indi-
cator light begins to flash (after 20
seconds). Release both buttons.
Do not hold the buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm)
away from the HomeLink
®
buttons
while keeping the indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink
®
and hand-
held transmitter button. DO NOT
release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
4.While continuing to hold the but-
tons the red Indicator Status LED
will flash slowly and then rapidly
after HomeLink
®
successfully
trains to the frequency signal from
the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons.
3-39
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe
the red Status Indicator LED. If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and
your device should activate when
the HomeLink
®
button is pressed
and released.
6.To program the remaining two
HomeLink
®
buttons, follow steps 2
through 5.
Gate operator & Canadian program-
ming
During programming, your handheld
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press the
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System button (note
steps 2 through 4 in the Standard
Programming portion of this docu-
ment) while you press and re-press
("cycle") your handheld transmitter
every two seconds until the frequen-
cy signal has been learned.The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training.
Operating HomeLink
®
To operate, simply press and release
the programmed HomeLink
®
button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security sys-
tem, entry door lock, home/office
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time.
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink
®
button
To program a new device to a previ-
ously trained HomeLink
®
button, fol-
low these steps:
1.Press and hold the desired
HomeLink
®
button. Do NOT
release until step 4 has been com-
pleted.
2.When the indicator light begins to
flash slowly (after 20 seconds),
position the handheld transmitter 1
to 3 inches away from the
HomeLink
®
surface.
3.Press and hold the handheld
transmitter button.The HomeLink
®
indicator light will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly.
4.When the indicator light begins to
flash rapidly, release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe
the red Status Indicator LED. If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and
your new device should activate.
3-40
Convenient features of your vehicle
Erasing HomeLink
®
buttons
Individual buttons cannot be erased.
However, to erase all three pro-
grammed buttons:
1.Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons until the indi-
cator light begins to flash-after 20
seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 30 seconds.
The Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System is now in the training
(learn) mode and can be pro-
grammed at any time following the
appropriate steps in the Programming
chapters above.
NVS
®
is a registered trademark and
Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex
Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.
HomeLink
®
is a registered trademark
owned by Johnson Controls,
Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3
IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
3. The transceiver has been tested and
complies with FCC and Industry
Canada rules. Changes or modifica-
tions not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to
operate the device.
Side View Mirrors
Be sure to adjust mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand side view
mirrors.The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch.The
mirror heads can be folded to pre-
vent damage during an automatic
car wash or when passing through a
narrow street.
The right side view mirror is convex.
Objects seen in the mirror are closer
than they appear.
i
OLF044024
3-41
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Use your interior rearview mirror or
direct observation to determine the
actual distance of following vehicles
when changing lanes.
Blind spot mirror
The Blind Spot Mirror (BSM) is a
supplemental mirror that reduces the
driver’s blind spot by showing the
rear side area of the vehicle. The
blind spot mirror is equipped on the
left-hand side view mirror.
Do not clean the mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum
based cleaning products.
NOTICE
Do not adjust or fold the side
view mirrors while driving. This
may cause loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident.
WARNING
• Do not scrape ice off the mir-
ror face; this may damage the
surface of the glass.
• If the mirror is jammed with
ice, do not adjust the mirror by
force. Use an approved spray
de-icer (not radiator antifreeze)
spray, or a sponge or soft cloth
with very warm water, or move
the vehicle to a warm place
and allow the ice to melt.
CAUTION
OLF044477N
OLF044478N
• Always check the road condi-
tion while driving for unex-
pected situations even though
the vehicle is equipped with a
blind spot mirror.
• The blind spot mirror is a
device made for convenience.
Do not solely rely on the mir-
ror but always pay attention to
traffic around you.
WARNING
3-42
Convenient features of your vehicle
Side view mirrors control
Adjusting the rearview mirrors:
1. Move the lever (1) towards the
L(Left) or R(Right) to select the
rearview mirror you would like to
adjust.
2. Use the mirror adjustment control
switch to position the selected mir-
ror up, down, left or right.
3. After adjustment, place the lever
(1) in the center to prevent inad-
vertent adjustment.
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjust-
ing angles, but the motor contin-
ues to operate while the switch
is pressed. Do not press the
switch longer than necessary,
the motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the side
view mirrors by hand or the
motor may be damaged.
Folding the side view mirrors
To fold the side view mirrors, grasp
the housing of the mirror and then
fold it toward the rear of the vehicle.
NOTICE
OLF044025N
OLF044026
3-43
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Reverse Parking Aid Function
When you move the shift lever to the
R (Reverse) position, the side view
mirror(s) will rotate downwards to aid
with driving in reverse. The position
of the side view mirror switch (1)
determines whether or not the mir-
rors will move:
Left/Right :When either the L (Left) or
R (Right) switch is select-
ed, both side view mirrors
will move.
Neutral : When neither switch is select-
ed, the side view mirrors will
not move.
The side view mirrors will automati-
cally revert to their original positions if
any of the following occur:
• The ignition switch is placed to
either the LOCK/OFF position or
the ACC position.
• The shift lever is moved to any
position except R (Reverse).
• The remote control side view mirror
switch is not selected.
OLF044014N
3-44
Convenient features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window
(7) Power window lock switch
WWIINNDDOOWWSS
OLF044030N
3-45
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Power Windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to be able to raise or lower
the windows.Each door has a Power
Window switch to control that door’s
window. The driver has a Power
Window Lock switch which can block
the operation of passenger windows.
The power windows will operate for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition switch is placed in the ACC
or LOCK/OFF position. However, if
the front doors are opened, the
Power Windows cannot be operated
even within the 30 second period.
Information
• In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
• While driving with the rear win-
dows down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) opened (or partially
opened), your vehicle may demon-
strate a wind buffeting or pulsation
noise. This noise is normal and can
be reduced or eliminated by taking
the following actions. If the noise
occurs with one or both of the rear
windows down, partially lower both
front windows approximately one
inch. If you experience the noise
with the sunroof open, slightly close
the sunroof.
Window opening and closing
To open:
Press the window switch down to the
first detent position (5). Release the
switch when you want the window to
stop.
To close:
Pull the window switch up to the first
detent position (5). Release the win-
dow switch when you want the win-
dow to stop.
i
To avoid serious injury or death,
do not extend your head, arms
or body outside the windows
while driving.
WARNING
OLF044031
3-46
Convenient features of your vehicle
Auto up/down window
(if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the sec-
ond detent position (6) completely
lowers or lifts the window even when
the switch is released. To stop the
window at the desired position while
the window is in operation, pull up or
press down and release the switch.
To reset the power windows
If the power windows do not operate
normally, the automatic power win-
dow system must be reset as follows:
1. Place the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the window and continue
pulling up on the power window
switch for at least one second.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have the
system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Automatic reverse (if equipped)
If a window senses any obstacle while
it is closing automatically, it will stop
and lower approximately 12 inches (30
cm) to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is
pulled up continuously, the window
will stop upward movement then
lower approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).
If the power window switch is pulled
up continuously again within 5 sec-
onds after the window is lowered by
the automatic window reversal fea-
ture, the automatic window reversal
will not operate.
Information
The automatic reverse feature is only
active when the “Auto Up” feature is
used by fully pulling up the switch to
the second detent.
i
OLF044032
Make sure body parts or other
objects are safely out of the way
before closing the windows to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
Objects less than 0.16 inch (4 mm)
in diameter caught between the
window glass and the upper win-
dow channel may not be detected
by the automatic reverse window
and the window will not stop and
reverse direction.
WARNING
3-47
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Power window lock switch
The driver can disable the power
window switches on the rear passen-
gers’ doors by pressing the power
window lock switch.
When the power window lock switch
is pressed:
• The driver’s master control can
operate all the power windows.
• The front passenger’s control can
operate the front passenger’s
power window.
• The rear passenger’s control can-
not operate the rear passengers’
power window.
• To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver’s door and
the individual door window
switch in opposite directions at
the same time. If this is done,the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
NOTICE
OLF044033
Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power window
lock switch in the LOCK posi-
tion. Serious injury or death can
result from unintentional win-
dow operation by a child.
WARNING
3-48
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control
switch located on the overhead con-
sole.
The sunroof can only be opened,
closed, or tilted when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
Sunroof opening and closing
To open:
Press the sunroof control lever back-
ward to the first detent position.
Release the switch when you want
the sunroof to stop.
To close:
Press the sunroof control lever back-
ward to the first detent position.
Release the switch when you want
the sunroof to stop.
Sliding the sunroof
Pressing the sunroof control lever
backward or forward momentarily to
the second detent position completely
opens or closes the sunroof even
when the switch is released. To stop
the sunroof at the desired position
while the sunroof is in operation, press
the sunroof control lever backward or
forward and release the switch.
Information
To minimize wind noise while driving,
it is recommended that you drive with
the sunroof slightly closed (stop the
sunroof about 2 inch (5 cm) before the
maximum slide open position).
To prevent damage to the sunroof
and the motor, do not continue to
press the sunroof control lever
after the sunroof is in the fully
open, closed or tilt position(s).
NOTICE
i
SSUUNNRROOOOFF ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLFC044034CN
OLFC044036CN
3-49
Convenient features of your vehicle
Automatic reversal
If the sunroof senses an obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it
should reverse direction and stop to
allow the object to be cleared.
Tilting the sunroof
Tilt the sunroof open:
Push the sunroof control lever
upward until the sunroof moves to
the desired position.
To close the sunroof:
Pull the sunroof lever downward until
the sunroof moves to the desired
position.
3
OLFC044037CNOLFC044035CN
• Make sure heads, other body
parts or other objects are
safely out of the way before
closing the sunroof to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage.
• Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
may cause loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident.
• To avoid serious injury or
death, do not extend your
head, arms or body outside
the sunroof while driving.
WARNING
3-50
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the sunroof
guide rail or between the sun-
roof and roof panel which can
make a noise.
• Do not try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice as the
motor could be damaged.
Information
After washing the vehicle or after a
rain, be sure to wipe off the water on
the sunroof before operating the sun-
roof.
Sunshade
The sunshade will open automatical-
ly with the sunroof when the glass
panel moves. If you want it closed,
move the sunshade manually.
The sunroof is made to slide
together with the sunshade. Do
not leave the sunshade closed
while the sunroof is open.
Resetting the sunroof
Sunroof needs to be reset if the fol-
lowing occurs :
- Battery is discharged or discon-
nected or the related fuse has been
replaced or disconnected
- The one-touch sliding function of
the sunroof does not normally oper-
ate
Reset procedure :
1. Place the ignition switch to the ON
position or start the engine. It is
recommended to reset the sunroof
while the engine is running.
2. Push the control lever forward.The
sunroof will close completely or tilt
depending on the condition of the
sunroof.
3. Release the control lever until the
sunroof does not move.
NOTICE
i
NOTICE
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLFC044038CN
3-51
Convenient features of your vehicle
4. Push the control lever forward
about 10 seconds.
- When the sunroof is in the close
position :
The glass will tilt and slightly
move up and down.
- When the sunroof is in the tilt
position:
The glass will slightly move up
and down.
Do not release the lever until the
operation is completed.
If you release the lever during opera-
tion, start the procedure again from
step 2.
5.Within 3 seconds, push the control
lever forward until the sunroof
operates as follows:
Tilt down → Slide Open → Slide
Close.
Do not release the lever until the
operation is completed.
If you release the lever during opera-
tion, start the procedure again from
step 2.
6. Release the sunroof control lever
after all steps have completed.
(The sunroof system has been
reset.)
Information
• If the sunroof is not reset when the
vehicle battery is disconnected or
discharged, or the sunroof fuse is
blown, the sunroof may not operate
normally.
• For more detailed information, we
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
3
3-52
Convenient features of your vehicle
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position before you can open or
close the sunroof.
Information
In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
To prevent damage to the sunroof
and the motor, do not continue to
press the sunroof control lever
after the sunroof is in the fully
open, closed or tilt position(s).
Sunshade
• To open the sunshade, press the
sunshade control switch (1).
• To close the sunshade, press the
sunshade control switch (2). If you
press the switch when the sunroof
glass is opened, the sunroof glass
will close then the sunshade will
close.
To stop the sliding at any point, press
the sunshade control switch momen-
tarily.
NOTICE
i
PPAANNOORRAAMMIICC SSUUNNRROOOOFF ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OLF044034
Never adjust the sunroof or sun-
shade while driving. This could
result in loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
WARNING
OLF044035
• Make sure heads, other body
parts or objects are out of the
way before using the sunroof.
• Do not leave the engine run-
ning and the key in your vehi-
cle with unsupervised children.
Unattended children could
operate the sunroof, which
could result in serious injury.
WARNING
3-53
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Sliding the Sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward, the sunshade will slide all
the way open then the sunroof glass
will slide all the way open.To stop the
sunroof movement at any point, pull
or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward, the sunroof glass will slide
all the way open.To stop the sunroof
movement at any point, pull or push
the sunroof control lever momentarily.
Information
Only the front glass of the panoramic
sunroof opens and closes.
Tilting the Sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunshade will slide open
then the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
i
OLF044036 OLF044037
3-54
Convenient features of your vehicle
Closing the Sunroof
Press the sunshade CLOSE button.
The sunroof glass will close then the
sunshade will close.To stop the sun-
roof movement at any point, press
the sunshade control switch momen-
tarily.
Automatic reverse
If the sunroof senses any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction then stop to allow
the object to be cleared.
OLF044038 ODH043039
• Make sure heads, other body
parts or other objects are
safely out of the way before
closing the sunroof to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage.
Objects that are small caught
between the sunroof glass
and the front glass channel
may not be detected by the
automatic reverse glass and
the glass will not stop and
reverse direction.
• To avoid serious injury or
death, do not extend your
head, arms or body outside
the sunroof while driving.
• A panoramic sunroof is made
of glass, therefore it may break
in an accident. If you do not
have your seat belt on, you
may stick out of the broken
glass and get injured or killed.
For all passengers safety, have
an appropriate protection on
(ex. seat belt, child restraint
system, etc.).
WARNING
3-55
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the sunroof
guide rail or between the sun-
roof and roof panel.
• Do not try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
motor could be damaged.
Information
After the vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
To Reset the Sunroof
Sunroof needs to be reset if the fol-
lowing occurs :
- Battery is discharged or discon-
nected or the related fuse has been
replaced or disconnected
- The one-touch sliding function of
the sunroof does not normally oper-
ate
1.Turn the engine on and close the
sunroof glass and sunshade com-
pletely.
2. Release the control lever.
3. Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close
(about 10 seconds) until the sun-
roof slightly moves. Then, release
the lever.
4. Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close until
the sunroof operates as follows:
Sunshade Open → Glass Tilt Open
→ Glass Slide Open → Glass Slide
Close → Sunshade Close
Then, release the control lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system is reset.
For more information, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
If you do not reset the sunroof, it may
not work properly.
i
i
NOTICE
OLF044040
3-56
Convenient features of your vehicle
Hood
Opening the hood
1. Park the vehicle and set the park-
ing brake.
2. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
3. Raise the hood slightly, push the
secondary latch up (1) inside of
the hood center and lift the hood
(2). After it has been raised about
halfway, it will raise completely by
itself.
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compart-
ment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be
removed from the engine com-
partment.
2. Lower the hood halfway (lifted
approximately 30cm from the
closed position) and push down to
securely lock in place. Then dou-
ble check to be sure the hood is
secure.
EEXXTTEERRIIOORR FFEEAATTUURREESS
OLF044041
OLF044042N
3-57
Convenient features of your vehicle
Trunk
Opening the trunk
1. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
2.Then do one of the following :
- Press the Remote key or Smart
Key Trunk Unlock button for more
than one second.
- Press the button on the trunk
itself with the Smart Key in your
possession.
- Use the mechanical key.
- Use the trunk release button.
3. Lift the trunk lid up.
3
• Before closing the hood,
ensure all obstructions are
removed from around hood
opening.
• Always double check to be
sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away.
Check there is no hood open
warning light or message dis-
played on the instrument clus-
ter. Driving with the hood
opened may cause a total loss
of visibility, which might
result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with
the hood in the raised posi-
tion, as vision is obstructed,
which might result in an acci-
dent, and the hood could fall
or be damaged.
WARNING
OLF044043
OLF044044
■ Inside
■ Outside
3-58
Convenient features of your vehicle
Closing the trunk
Lower the trunk lid and press down
until it locks.
To prevent damage to the trunk lift
cylinders and the attached hard-
ware, always close the trunk
before driving.
Information
In cold and wet climates,trunk lock
and trunk mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing con-
ditions.
Emergency trunk safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Emergency Trunk Safety Release
lever located inside the trunk. When
someone is inadvertently locked in
the trunk, the trunk can be opened by
moving the lever in the direction of the
arrow and pushing the trunk open.
i
NOTICE
Make sure there are no people
or objects around the trunk
before opening or closing the
Power Trunk.Wait until the trunk
is open fully and stopped
before loading or unloading
cargo from the vehicle.
WARNING
Always keep the trunk lid com-
pletely closed while the vehicle is
in motion. If it is left open or ajar,
poisonous exhaust gases con-
taining carbon monoxide (CO)
may enter the vehicle and seri-
ous illness or death may result.
WARNING
OLF044045
3-59
Convenient features of your vehicle
Trunk lid control switch
The trunk lid control switch is used to
prevent unauthorized access to the
trunk.
• When the trunk lid control switch is
in the UNLOCK position ( ), the
trunk can be unlocked with the
trunk release button and the
remote key or smart key.
• When the trunk lid control switch is
in the LOCK position ( ), the trunk
can be unlocked with the mechani-
cal key of the remote key or smart
key.
3
• You and your passengers
must be aware of the location
of the Emergency Trunk
Safety Release lever in this
vehicle and how to open the
trunk in case you are acciden-
tally locked in the trunk.
• NEVER allow anyone to occu-
py the trunk of the vehicle at
any time. If the trunk is par-
tially or totally latched and the
person is unable to get out,
serious injury or death could
occur due to lack of ventila-
tion, exhaust fumes and rapid
heat build-up, or because of
exposure to cold weather con-
ditions. The trunk is also a
highly dangerous location in
the event of a crash because it
is not a protected occupant
space but is a part of the vehi-
cle’s crush zone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Your vehicle should be kept
locked and the Smart Key
should be kept out of the reach
of children. Parents should
teach their children about the
dangers of playing in trunks.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies only.
WARNING
OLF044004
3-60
Convenient features of your vehicle
Smart Trunk (if equipped)
On a vehicle equipped with a smart
key, the trunk can be opened using
the Smart Trunk system.
How to use the Smart Trunk
The trunk can be opened with no-
touch activation satisfying all the
conditions below.
• After 15 seconds when all doors
are closed and locked
• Positioned in the detecting area for
more than 3 seconds.
Information
• The Smart Trunk does not operate
when:
- The smart key is detected within
15 seconds after the doors are
closed and locked, and is continu-
ously detected.
- The smart key is detected within
15 seconds after the doors are
closed and locked, and within 60
inches (1.5 m) from the front door
handles. (for vehicles equipped
with Welcome Light)
- A door is not locked or closed.
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
1. Setting
To activate the Smart Trunk, go to
User Settings Mode and select
Smart Trunk on the LCD display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.
i
OLF044046
OLF054450N
3-61
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
2. Detect and Alert
If you are positioned in the detecting
area (20~40 inches (50 ~100 cm)
behind the vehicle) carrying a smart
key, the hazard warning lights will blink
and chime will sound for about 3 sec-
onds to alert you the smart key has
been detected and the trunk will open.
Information
Do not approach the detecting area if
you do not want the trunk to open. If
you have unintentionally entered the
detecting area and the hazard warn-
ing lights and chime starts to operate,
leave the detecting area with the
smart key. The trunk will stay closed.
3. Automatic opening
The hazard warning lights will blink
and chime will sound 2 times and
then the trunk will open.
i
OLF044047N OLF044048
• Make sure you close the trunk
before driving your vehicle.
• Make sure there are no people
or objects around the trunk
before opening or closing the
trunk.
• Make sure objects in the trunk
do not come out when open-
ing the trunk on a slope. It
may cause serious injury.
• Make sure to deactivate the
Smart Trunk when washing
your vehicle. Otherwise, the
trunk may open inadvertently.
• The key should be kept out of
reach of children. Children
may inadvertently open the
Smart Trunk while playing
around the rear area of the
vehicle.
WARNING
3-62
Convenient features of your vehicle
How to deactivate the Smart
Trunk function using the smart
key
If you press any button of the smart
key during the Detect and Alert
stage, the Smart Trunk function will
be deactivated.
Make sure to be aware of how to
deactivate the Smart Trunk function
for emergency situations.
Information
• If you press the door unlock button
(2), the Smart Trunk function will
be deactivated temporarily. But, if
you do not open any door for 30 sec-
onds, the smart trunk function will
be activated again.
• If you press the trunk open button
(3) for more than 1 second, the
trunk opens.
• If you press the door lock button (1)
or trunk open button (3) when the
Smart Trunk function is not in the
Detect and Alert stage, the smart
trunk function will not be deactivated.
• In case you have deactivated the
Smart Trunk function by pressing
the smart key button and opened a
door, the smart trunk function can
be activated again by closing and
locking all doors.
Detecting area
• The Smart Trunk operates with a
welcome alert if the smart key is
detected within 20~40 inches
(50~100 cm) from the trunk.
• The alert stops at once if the smart
key is positioned outside the
detecting area during the Detect
and Alert stage.
i
OLF044006
OLF044050N
1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3.Trunk open
4. Panic
3-63
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
• The Smart Trunk function will not
work if any of the following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the
transmitter.
- The smart key is near a mobile two
way radio system or a cellular
phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
• The detecting range may decrease
or increase when :
- One side of the tire is raised to
replace a tire or to inspect the vehi-
cle.
- The vehicle is parked on a slope or
unpaved road, etc.
Fuel Filler Door
Opening the fuel filler door
The fuel filler door must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pushing
the fuel filler door opener button.
1.Turn the engine off.
2. Push the fuel filler door opener
button.
3. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to
fully open.
4.To remove the fuel tank cap (2),
turn it counterclockwise. You may
hear a hissing noise as the pres-
sure inside the tank equalizes.
5. Place the cap on the fuel filler door.
i
OLF044052
OLF044051
3-64
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
If the fuel filler door does not open
because ice has formed around it, tap
lightly or push on the door to break
the ice and release the door. Do not
pry on the door. If necessary, spray
around the door with an approved de-
icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-
freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm
place and allow the ice to melt.
Closing the fuel filler door
1.To install the fuel tank cap, turn it
clockwise until it “clicks” one time.
2. Close the fuel filler door until it is
latched securely.
i
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. Failure to follow
these guidelines may result in
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station.
• Before refueling, note the
location of the Emergency
Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,
at the gas station.
• Before touching the fuel noz-
zle, you should eliminate the
potential build-up of static
electricity by touching a metal
part of the vehicle, a safe dis-
tance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas
source, with your bare hand.
• Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric cur-
rent and/or electronic interfer-
ence from cellular phones can
potentially ignite fuel vapors
and cause a fire.
(Continued)
WARNING
3-65
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refuel-
ing.You can generate a build-
up of static electricity by
touching, rubbing or sliding
against any item or fabric
capable of producing static
electricity. Static electricity
discharge can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire. If you
must re-enter the vehicle, you
should once again eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touch-
ing a metal part of the vehicle,
away from the fuel filler neck,
nozzle or other gasoline
source, with your bare hand.
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be
sure to place the container on
the ground prior to refueling.
Static electricity discharge
from the container can ignite
fuel vapors causing a fire.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Once refueling has begun,
contact between your bare
hand and the vehicle should
be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Use only approved portable
plastic fuel containers designed
to carry and store gasoline.
• When refueling, always move
the shift lever to the P (Park)
position, set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch to the LOCK/OFF posi-
tion. Sparks produced by
electrical components related
to the engine can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire.
• Do not use matches or a
lighter and do not smoke or
leave a lit cigarette in your
vehicle while at a gas station,
especially during refueling.
• Do not over-fill or top-off your
vehicle tank, which can cause
gasoline spillage.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If a fire breaks out during refu-
eling, leave the vicinity of the
vehicle, and immediately con-
tact the manager of the gas
station and then contact the
local fire department. Follow
any safety instructions they
provide.
• If pressurized fuel sprays out,
it can cover your clothes or
skin and thus subject you to
the risk of fire and burns.
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
3-66
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel Requirements"
suggested in the Introduction chapter.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted sur-
faces may damage the paint.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction
of the fuel system or emission
control system.
Emergency fuel filler door release
If the fuel filler door does not open
using the remote fuel filler door
release button, you can open it man-
ually. Pull the release located on the
left side of the trunk compartment.
NOTICE
i
OLF044054
3-67
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT CCLLUUSSTTEERR
1.Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5.Warning and indicator lights
6. LCD display (including Trip computer)
OLF044100N/OLF046101N
■■
Type A
The actual cluster in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
■■
Type B
3-68
Convenient features of your vehicle
1.Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5.Warning and indicator lights
6. LCD display (including Trip computer)
OLF044504N/OLF046505N
■■
Type C
The actual cluster in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
■■
Type D
3-69
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Instrument Cluster Control
Adjusting instrument cluster
illumination
When the vehicle's parking lights or
headlights are on, press the illumina-
tion control button to adjust the
brightness of the instrument panel
illumination.
When pressing the illumination con-
trol button, the interior switch illumi-
nation intensity is also adjusted. The
selected brightness of illumination
can be saved in the Driver Position
Memory System (if equipped).
For more information, refer to
"Driver position Memory System"
in this chapter.
• The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is displayed.
• If the brightness reaches the maxi-
mum or minimum level, an alarm
will sound.
OLF044102
OLF044142L
OLF044143L
■ Type A, C
■ Type B, D
3-70
Convenient features of your vehicle
LCD Display Control
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
(1) : MODE button for changing
modes
(2) ▲, ▼ : MOVE switch for chang-
ing items
(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for
setting or resetting the
selected item
For more information on LCD
Modes, refer to "LCD Display" in
the next pages of this chapter.
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilo-
meters per hour (km/h).
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revo-
lutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the cor-
rect shift points and to prevent lug-
ging and/or over-revving the engine.
OLF044201
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type C
OLF044103N
OLF044500N
■ Type A, B
■ Type C, D
OLF044105L
OLF044501N
■ Type A, B
■ Type C, D
3-71
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
This gauge indicates the tempera-
ture of the engine coolant when the
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button is ON.
If the gauge pointer moves
beyond the normal range area
toward the "H" position, it indi-
cates overheating that may dam-
age the engine.
Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. If your vehicle
overheats, refer to "If the Engine
Overheats" in chapter 6.
NOTICENOTICE
OLF044107
OLF044506N
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type C, D
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The
engine coolant is under pressure
and could severely burn. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
WARNING
3-72
Convenient features of your vehicle
Fuel Gauge
This gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
Information
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a
low fuel warning light, which will
illuminate when the fuel tank is
nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier
than usual due to the movement of
fuel in the tank.
Avoid driving with an extremely
low fuel level. Running out of fuel
could cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance that the vehicle has been driv-
en and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 miles
or kilometers.
NOTICE
i
OLF044108
OLF044503N
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type C, D
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.You
must stop and obtain additional
fuel as soon as possible after
the warning light comes on or
when the gauge indicator comes
close to the "E (Empty)" level.
WARNING
OLF046559N/OLF0436558N
■ Type A, C ■ Type B, D
3-73
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Outside temperature gauge
This gauge indicates the current out-
side air temperatures by 1°F (1°C).
- Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F
(-40°C ~ 60°C)
The outside temperature on the dis-
play may not change immediately
like a general thermometer to pre-
vent the driver from being inattentive.
To change the temperature unit from
°F to °C or °C to °F, it can be select-
ed by one of the following methods :
- Go to User Settings Mode ➝ Other
Features ➝ Temperature Unit.
- Press the AUTO button for 3 sec-
onds while pressing the OFF button.
(Automatic climate control system)
Both the temperature unit on the
cluster LCD display and climate con-
trol screen will change.
Automatic transmission shift
indicator / Ecoshift dual clutch
transmission shift indicator
(If equipped)
This indicator displays which auto-
matic transmission shift lever is
selected.
•Park :P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
•Drive :D
• Sports Mode
- Auto Transmission :1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
- Ecoshift Dual Clutch Transmission:
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
OLF046565N/OLF046564N
■ Type A, C ■ Type B, D
OLF046562L/OLF044540
■ Type A, C ■ Type B, D
3-74
Convenient features of your vehicle
Shift indicator pop-up
(if equipped)
The pop-up displays the current gear
position selected for 2 seconds
(P/R/N/D).
Icy Road Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light is to warn the driv-
er the road may be icy.
When the following conditions occur,
the warning light (including Outside
Temperature Gauge) blinks 5 times
and then illuminates, and also warn-
ing chime sounds 1 times.
- The temperature on the Outside
Temperature Gauge is below
approximately 40°F (4°C).
Information
If the icy road warning light appears
while driving, you should drive more
attentively and safely refraining from
over-speeding, rapid acceleration,
sudden braking or sharp turning, etc.
i
OLF046421/OLF046420
■ Type A, C ■ Type B, D
OLF046112N/OLF046113N
■ Type A, C ■ Type B, D
3-75
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
LCD Modes
LLCCDD DDIISSPPLLAAYY
Modes Symbol Description
Trip Computer
This mode displays information related to driving such as tripmeter, fuel
economy, etc.
For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Turn By Turn (TBT)
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the navigation.
SCC/LDWS
(If equipped)
This mode displays the state of the Smart Cruise Control (SCC) and Lane
Departure Warning System (LDWS).
For more information, refer to "Smart Cruise Control (SCC)" and
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) in chapter 5.
A/V
(If equipped)
This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
Information
This mode displays information such as tire pressure, service intervals, warning
messages related to the Smart Cruise Control, etc.
User Settings On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.
For more information on controlling the LCD Modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in the previous pages of
this chapter.
or or
3-76
Convenient features of your vehicle
Cannot edit settings while driv-
ing
This warning message illuminates if
you try to select the other User
Settings item when driving.
For safety, change the User Settings
after parking the vehicle and moving
the shift lever to P (Park) position.
Quick guide (Help, if equipped)
Press and hold the OK button in the
User Settings Mode, the explanation
about the selected item is displayed.
Trip Computer Mode
This mode displays driving informa-
tion like the tripmeter, fuel economy,
and so on.
For more information, refer to
"Trip Computer" in this chapter.
OLF044168L
OLF046432N/OLF046438N
■ Type A, C ■ Type B, D
OLF046563L
3-77
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Turn By Turn (TBT) Mode
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
SCC/LDWS Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
Smart Cruise Control (SCC) and
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS).
For more information, refer to
"Smart Cruise Control (SCC)" and
"Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS)" in chapter 5.
A/V Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.
OLF044174N
OLF046172/OLF046173
■ Type A, C ■ Type B, D
OLF046175/OLF046176
■ Type A, C ■ Type B, D
3-78
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information Mode
Tire pressure information
Displays tire pressure information.
Service Interval
Service in
If the remaining mileage or time
reaches 900 miles (1,500 km) or 30
days, "Service in" message is dis-
played for several seconds each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop button to the ON position.
For the setting of the service inter-
val, refer to "User Settings Mode"
of the LCD display.
Service required
If you exceed specified service inter-
val, "Service required" message will
be displayed each time you set the
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button to the ON position.
To reset the service interval, press
the OK button for more than 1 sec-
ond.
OLF044421L/OLF044420L
■ Type A, C ■ Type B, D
OLF044179L/OLF044180L
■ Type A, C ■ Type B, D
OLF044455N/OLF044454N
■ Type A, C ■ Type B, D
3-79
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Service in OFF
If the service interval is not set,
"Service in OFF" message is dis-
played.
Information
If any of the following conditions
occurs, the mileage and days may be
incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
Warning Message
If one of followings occurs, warning
messages will be displayed on the
information mode for several seconds.
- Malfunction of below systems
• Smart Cruise Control (SCC)
• Blind Spot Detection (BSD)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
• Automatic Emergency Braking
system (AEB)
• High Beam Assist system (HBA)
i
OLF044457N/OLF044456N
■ Type A, C ■ Type B, D
3-80
Convenient features of your vehicle
User Settings Mode
On this mode, you can change setting of the instrument cluster, doors, lamps, and so on.
Driving Assist
Items Explanation
SCC
(Smart Cruise Control)
Adjust the sensitivity of Smart Cruise Control (SCC) in 3 stages.
- Slow / Normal / Fast
For more information, refer to "Smart Cruise Control (SCC)" in chapter 5.
AEB
(Autonomous Emergency
Braking, if equipped)
To activate or deactivate the AEB system.
For more information, refer to "Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB)" in chapter 5.
FCW
(Forward Collision Warning,
if equipped)
To adjust the initial warning alert time for the Forward Collision Warning / Autonomous
Emergency Braking system.The option settings are Slow, Normal, or Fast.
For more information, refer to "Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB)" in chapter 5.
RCTA
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
To activate or deactivate the RCTA system.
For more information, refer to "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" in chapter 5.
3-81
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Door
Items Explanation
Auto Lock
• Off : The auto door lock operation will be deactivated.
• Enable on Speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3mph
(15km/h).
• Enable on Shift: All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transmission shift lever is shift-
ed from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
Auto Unlock
• Off : The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.
• Vehicle Off: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed from the
ignition switch or the Engine Start/Stop button is set to the OFF position.
• On Shift to P: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transmission shift lever is
shifted to the P (Park) position.
Two Press Unlock
• OFF :The two press unlock function will be deactivated.Therefore, all doors will unlock if the door
is unlocked.
• ON :The driver’s door will unlock if the door is unlocked.When the door is unlocked again within
4 seconds, all doors will unlock.
Door Lock Sound To activate or deactivate the lock sound when locking doors.
Smart Trunk
(Smart key)
To activate or deactivate the Smart Trunk system.
For more information, refer to "Smart Trunk" in this chapter.
Lights
3-82
Convenient features of your vehicle
Items Explanation
One Touch Turn Signal
• Off:The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated.
• 3, 5, 7 Flashes :The lane change signals will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is
moved slightly.
For more information, refer to "Light" in this chapter.
Head Lamp Delay
• On:The head lamp delay function will be activated.
• Off:The headlamp delay function will be deactivated.
For more information, refer to "Light" in this chapter.
Welcome Light
• On:The welcome light function will be activated.
• Off:The welcome light function will be deactivated.
For more information, refer to "Welcome System" in this chapter.
Sound
Items Explanation
Park Assist System Vol. • Adjust the Park Assist System volume. (Level 1~3)
BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
Sound
• Off :The BSD sound function will be deactivated.
• On :The BSD sound function will be activated.
3-83
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Items Explanation
Seat Easy Access
• None :The seat easy access function will be deactivated.
• Normal/Extended:
- When you turn off the engine, the driver’s seat will automatically move rearward short (Normal) or
long (Extended) for you to enter or exit the vehicle more comfortably.
- If you change the Engine Start/Stop button from OFF position to the ACC, ON, or START position,
the driver’s seat will return to the original position.
For more information, refer to "Driver Position Memory System" in this chapter.
Items Explanation
Service Interval
On this mode, you can activate the service interval function with mileage (km or mi.) and period
(months).
• Off :The service interval function will be deactivated.
• On :You can set the service interval (mileage and months).
Service Interval
Seat/Steering
3-84
Convenient features of your vehicle
Other Features
Items Explanation
Fuel Economy Auto Reset
• Off :The average fuel economy will not reset automatically whenever refueling.
• After Ignition :The average fuel economy will reset automatically when driving.
• After Refueling :The average fuel economy will reset automatically when refueling.
For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Shift gear Pop-up
If you select this function, the current shift gear position is displayed in the cluster for about 2 sec-
onds when shifting into other positions (P/R/N/D).
If you do not select this function, the shift gear Pop-up is not displayed in the cluster.
Fuel Economy Unit Choose the fuel economy unit. (US gallon, UK gallon)
Temperature Unit Choose the temperature unit. (°C,°F)
Tire Pressure Unit Choose the tire pressure unit. (psi, kPa, Bar)
Language
Choose the language. (English, French, Spanish etc.)
Vehicles equipped with the AVN (Audio/Video/Navigation) system must change the language from
the AVN system.
For more information, please refer to the manual that was separately supplied with your
vehicle.
3-85
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Warning Messages
(if equipped)
Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine
This warning message illuminates if
you try to start the engine with the
shift lever not in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position.
Information
You can start the engine with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position. But,
for your safety, we recommend that
you start the engine with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position.
Shift to "P"
• This message illuminates if you try
to turn off the engine without the
shift lever in P (Park) position.
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).
Press START button again
• This message illuminates if you
can not operate the Engine Start/
Stop button when there is a prob-
lem with the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton system.
• It means that you could start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop button once more.
• If this warning illuminates each
time you press the Engine Start/
Stop button, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
i
OLF044126L
OLF044130L
OLF044128L
3-86
Convenient features of your vehicle
Press brake pedal to start engine
• This warning message illuminates
if the Engine Start/Stop button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the brake pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the brake pedal to start the engine.
Press START button with key
• This warning message illuminates
if you press the Engine Start/Stop
button while the warning message
"Key not detected" is illuminating.
• At this time, the immobilizer indica-
tor light blinks.
Low Key Battery
This warning message illuminates if
the battery of the smart key is dis-
charged when the Engine Start/Stop
button changes to the OFF position.
OLF044124L OLF044120L OLF044122L
3-87
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Key not detected
This warning message illuminates if
the smart key is not detected when
you press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton.
Key not in vehicle
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not in the vehicle
when you press the Engine Start/
Stop button.
• It means that you should always
have the smart key with you.
Align steering wheel
• This warning message illuminates
if you start the engine when the
steering wheel is turned to more
than 90 degrees to the left or right.
• It means that you should turn the
steering wheel and make the angle
of the steering wheel be less than
30 degrees.
OLF044116LOLF044118L OLF044150L/OLF044152L
3-88
Convenient features of your vehicle
Steering wheel aligning is com-
pleted
If the steering wheel aligning is com-
pleted after "Align steering wheel"
warning message is displayed, this
message is displayed for 2 seconds.
Door / Hood / Trunk Open
It means that any door, hood, or
trunk is open.
Sunroof Open
This warning message illuminates if
you turn off the engine when the sun-
roof is open.
OLF044154L
OLF044136 OLF054446
Before driving the vehicle, you
should confirm that the door
/hood/trunk is fully closed.
Also, check there is no door/
hood/trunk open warning light
or message displayed on the
instrument cluster.
CAUTION
3-89
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse
• This warning message illuminates
if the brake switch fuse is discon-
nected.
• It means that you should replace
the fuse with a new one. If that is
not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop button for 10 seconds in
the ACC position.
Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"
• This warning message illuminates
if the fuse switch under the steer-
ing wheel is OFF.
• It means that you should turn the
fuse switch on.
For more information, refer to
"Fuses" in chapter 7.
Low Tire Pressure
This warning message illuminates if
the tire pressure is low with the igni-
tion switch or the Engine/Start Button
in ON position.
For more information, refer to
"Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
OLF044132L OLF044148L OLF044146L
3-90
Convenient features of your vehicle
Low Washer Fluid
• This warning message illuminates
if the washer fluid level in the reser-
voir is nearly empty.
• It means that you should refill the
washer fluid.
Low Fuel
This warning message illuminates if
the fuel tank is nearly empty.
- When the low fuel level warning
light is illuminated.
- When the trip computer displays
"--- mile (or km)" as distance to empty.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
Engine has overheated
This warning message illuminates
when the engine coolant tempera-
ture is above 248°F (120°C). This
means that the engine is overheated
and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer
to "Overheating" in chapter 6.
OLF044156L OLF044160L OLF044158L
3-91
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Check headlight
This warning message illuminates if
there is a malfunction (burned-out
bulb except LED lamp or circuit mal-
function) with the headlamp. In this
case, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• When replacing the bulb,use the
same wattage bulb.
For more information, refer to
"BULB WATTAGE" in chapter 8.
• If the different wattage bulb is
equipped with the vehicle, this
warning message is not dis-
played.
Check AEB system (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if the sensor or cover is dirty or
obscured with foreign matter such
as snow.Clean the sensor or cover
by using a soft cloth.
• This warning message illuminates
if there is a malfunction with the
Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) system. In this case, have
your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more details, refer to
"Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) System" in chapter 5.
NOTICE
OLF044166L
OLF044167L
■ Type A, C
■ Type B, D
OLF056473N
3-92
Convenient features of your vehicle
Overview
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
Information
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.
Trip Modes
To change the trip mode, rotate the
MOVE switch "▲ , ▼" on the steering
wheel.
For more information, refer to
"LCD Display Control" in this
chapter
i
TTRRIIPP CCOOMMPPUUTTEERR
• Tripmeter [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]
TRIP A
• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
TRIP B
• Distance To Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
FUEL ECONOMY
Digital Speedometer
3-93
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Trip A/B
Information
If you reset one of the tripmeter,
elapsed time, and average vehicle
speed, they will be reset all together.
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving
distance since the last tripmeter
reset.
- Distance range:
0.0 ~ 9999.9 mi. or km
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
OK button on the steering wheel
for more than 1 second when the
tripmeter is displayed.
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
• The average vehicle speed is cal-
culated by the total driving dis-
tance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range:0 ~ 999 MPH or km/h
• To reset the average vehicle
speed, press the OK button on the
steering wheel for more than 1
second when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.
Information
• The average vehicle speed is not dis-
played if the driving distance has
been less than 0.19 miles (300
meters) since the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button was
turned to ON.
• Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the average vehicle speed keeps cal-
culating while the engine is running.
i
i
OLF046432N
OLF046438N
■ Type A, C
■ Type B, D
3-94
Convenient features of your vehicle
Elapsed Time (3)
• The elapsed time is the total driv-
ing time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm):00:00 ~ 99:59
• To reset the elapsed time, press the
OK button on the steering wheel for
more than 1 second when the
elapsed time is displayed.
Information
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
elapsed time keeps running while the
engine is running.
Fuel Economy
Distance To Empty (1)
• The distance to empty is the esti-
mated distance the vehicle can be
driven with the remaining fuel.
- Distance range: 1 ~ 9999 mi. or
1 ~ 9999 km
• If the estimated distance is below
1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will
display "---" as distance to empty.
Information
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been inter-
rupted, the distance to empty func-
tion may not operate correctly.
• The distance to empty may differ
from the actual driving distance as
it is an estimate of the available
driving distance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 1.6 gal-
lons (6 liters) of fuel are added to the
vehicle.
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehicle.
ii
OLF046431N
OLF046437N
■ Type A, C
■ Type B, D
3-95
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calcu-
lated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range:
0.0 ~ 99.9 MPG or L/100km or
km/L
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automati-
cally.
Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the OK button on the
steering wheel for more than 1 sec-
ond when the average fuel economy
is displayed.
For more information on the OK
button, refer to the "LCD Display
Control" in this chapter.
Automatic reset
To make the average fuel economy
be reset automatically whenever refu-
eling, select the "Auto Reset" mode in
User Setting menu of the LCD display
(Refer to "LCD Display").
Under "Auto Reset" mode, the aver-
age fuel economy will be cleared to
zero (---) when the vehicle speed
exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more
than 1.6 gallons (6 liters).
Information
The average fuel economy is not dis-
played for more accurate calculation
if the vehicle does not drive more than
0.19 miles (300 meters) since the igni-
tion switch or the Engine Start/Stop
button is turned to ON.
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few seconds
when the vehicle speed is more than
6.2 MPH (10 km/h).
- Fuel economy range:
0 ~ 50 MPG or 0 ~ 30 L/100km
i
3-96
Convenient features of your vehicle
Digital Speedometer
This message shows the speed of
the vehicle (km/h, MPH).
One time driving information
mode
This display shows trip distance (1),
average fuel economy (2) and the
vehicle can be driven with the
remaining fuel (3).
This information is displayed for a
few seconds when you turn off the
engine and then goes off automati-
cally.The information provided is cal-
culated according to each trip.
If the estimated distance is below
1mi. (1km), the distance to empty (3)
will display as "---" and a refuel mes-
sage will appear (4).
Information
If "Sunroof Open" warning message
is displayed in the cluster, this display
may not be displayed in the cluster.
i
OLF046439N
OLF046440N
■ Type A, C
■ Type B, D
OLF044418N
OLF044419N
■ Type A, C
■ Type B, D
3-97
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Warning Lights
Information
Make sure that all warning lights are
OFF after starting the engine. If any
light is still ON, this indicates a situa-
tion that needs attention.
Supplemental Restraint
System Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more information, refer to the
"Seat Belts" in chapter 2.
i
WWAARRNNIINNGG AANNDD IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLIIGGHHTTSS
3-98
Convenient features of your vehicle
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds.
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
If the brake fluid level in the reser-
voir is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and
add fluid as required (For more
information, refer to "Brake
Fluid" in chapter 7).Then check all
brake components for fluid leaks. If
any leak on the brake system is still
found, the warning light remains on,
or the brakes do not operate prop-
erly, do not drive the vehicle. In this
case, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
diagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual sys-
tems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driv-
ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-
al engine braking and stop the vehi-
cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
3-99
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking sys-
tem will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Electronic Brake force
Distribution (EBD)
System Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate
at the same time while driving:
When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warn-
ing light ON is dangerous. If the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light illuminates with
the parking brake released, it
indicates that the brake fluid
level is low.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
3-100
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
- Electronic
Brake force Distribution (EBD)
System Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on or
both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Lights are on, the
speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter
may not work. Also, the EPS Warning
Light may illuminate and the steering
effort may increase or decrease.
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
i
Electronic Brake force
Distribution (EBD) System
Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
3-101
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
- Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may cause
damage to the emission control
systems which could affect dri-
vability and/or fuel economy.
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) illuminates, potential catalyt-
ic converter damage is possible
which could result in loss of
engine power.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Charging System
Warning Light
If this warning light comes on while
the engine is running, the battery is
not being charged. Immediately turn
off all electrical accessories. Try not
to use electrically operated controls,
such as the power windows.Keep the
engine running; starting the engine
will quickly discharge the battery.
If there is a malfunction with either
the alternator or electrical charging
system:
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the elec-
trical charging system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
NOTICE
3-102
Convenient features of your vehicle
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more infor-
mation, refer to "Engine Oil" in
chapter 7). If the level is low, add
oil as required.
If the warning light remains on
after adding oil and restarting the
engine or if oil is not available, turn
off the engine.There is a mechan-
ical concern that needs to be
repaired before you can continue
driving. In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
- Engine Oil Pressure Warning light
To prevent severe engine damage,
after the Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light is illuminated and as
soon as it is safe to do so, turn the
engine off and check the oil level.
If the oil level is low, fill the engine
oil to the proper level and start the
engine again. If the light stays on
with the engine running, turn the
engine off immediately.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Low Fuel Level
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
- Low Fuel Level
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below "E" can cause the
engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter (if equipped).
NOTICE
NOTICE
3-103
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated (The
location of the underinflated tires
are displayed on the LCD display).
For more information, refer to
"Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
This warning light remains on after
blinking for approximately 60 sec-
onds or repeats blinking and off at
the intervals of approximately 3
seconds:
When there is a malfunction with the
TPMS.
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more information, refer to
"Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB) Warning
light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates :
• When the AEB system is turned off.
• When the radar or its cover is
stained. Remove the stains with a
soft cloth.
• When there is a malfunction with
AEB. In this case, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Safe Stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle insta-
bility, immediately take your
foot off the accelerator pedal,
apply the brakes gradually with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
WARNING
3-104
Convenient features of your vehicle
Electronic Parking
Brake (EPB) Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPB.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
- Electronic
Parking Brake (EPB) Warning
Light
The Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)
Warning Light may illuminate when
the Electronic Stability control (ESC)
Indicator Light comes on to indicates
that the ESC is not working properly
(This does not indicate malfunction of
the EPB).
Master Warning Light
This indicator light illuminates
When there is a malfunction on the
low washer, Smart cruise control,
and so on.
To identify the details of the warning,
look at the LCD display.
Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
For more information, refer to
"Electronic Stability Control (ESC)"
in chapter 5.
i
EPB
3-105
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC sys-
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
ton.
For more information, refer to
"Electronic Stability Control (ESC)"
in chapter 5.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (Without Smart
Key)
This indicator light illuminates:
When the vehicle detects the immo-
bilizer in your key properly while the
ignition switch is ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks:
When there is a malfunction with the
immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (With Smart Key)
This indicator light illuminates for
up to 30 seconds:
When the vehicle detects the smart
key in the vehicle properly while the
ignition switch or the Engine Start/
Stop button is ACC or ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine.
3-106
Convenient features of your vehicle
This indicator light illuminates for
2 seconds and goes off:
When the vehicle can not detect the
smart key which is in the vehicle
while the ignition switch or the
Engine Start/Stop button is ON.
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery of the smart key
is weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start the
engine if you press the ignition
switch or the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton with the smart key. (For more
information, refer to "Starting
the Engine" in chapter 5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks:
When you turn the turn signal light
on.
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system.In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
- The indicator light does not blink
but illuminates.
- The indicator light blinks more
rapidly.
- The indicator light does not illumi-
nate at all.
High Beam Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position.
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Smart High Beam indi-
cator (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates :
• When the high-Beam is on with the
light switch in the AUTO light posi-
tion.
• If your vehicle detects oncoming or
preceding vehicles, the Smart High
Beam system will switch the high
beam to low beam automatically.
For more information, refer to
"Smart High Beam" in this chapter.
3-107
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Light ON Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
When the tail lights or headlights are
on.
Adaptive Front Lighting
System (AFLS) Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the Engine Start/
Stop Button to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the AFLS.
If there is a malfunction with the
AFLS:
1. Drive carefully to a safe location
and stop the vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and restart the
engine. If the indicator light
remains on, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Cruise Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
When the cruise control system is
enabled.
For more information, refer to
"Cruise Control System" in chap-
ter 5.
Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
When the cruise control speed is set.
For more information, refer to
"Cruise Control System" in chap-
ter 5.
AUTO HOLD Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• [White] When you activate the auto
hold system by pressing the AUTO
HOLD button.
• [Green] When you stop the vehicle
completely by depressing the
brake pedal with the auto hold sys-
tem activated.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
tion with the auto hold system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
For more information, refer to
"Auto Hold" in chapter 5.
CRUISE
SET
AUTO
HOLD
AFLS
3-108
Convenient features of your vehicle
SPORT Mode Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
When you select "SPORT" mode as
drive mode.
For more information, refer to
"Drive Mode Integrated Control
System" in chapter 5.
ECO Mode Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates :
When you select "ECO" mode as
drive mode.
For more information, refer to
"LCD Display" in this chapter.
Lane Departure
Warning System
(LDWS) Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• [White] When you activate the lane
departure warning system by
pressing the LDWS button, system
operating conditions are not satis-
fied or the sensor does not detect
the lane line.
• [Green] When you activate the lane
departure warning system by
pressing the LDWS button, system
operating conditions are satisfied
and the sensor detect the lane line.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
tion with the lane departure warn-
ing system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
For more information, refer to
"Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS)" in chapter 5.
SPORT
Do not watch the ECO indicator
light while driving.This will dis-
tract you and may cause an
accident that results in severe
personal injury.
WARNING
3-109
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
LLIIGGHHTT
Exterior Lights
Lighting control
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) DRL OFF position
(2) AUTO light position
(3) Parking lamp position
(4) Headlamp position
(1) OFF position
(2) DRL position
(3) Parking lamp position
(4) Headlamp position
AUTO light position (if equipped)
The parking lamp and headlamp will
be turned ON or OFF automatically
depending on the amount of light
outside the vehicle.
Even with the AUTO light feature in
operation, it is recommended to
manually turn ON the lamps when
driving at night or in a fog, or when
you enter dark areas, such as tun-
nels and parking facilities.
OLF044085N
OLF044084N
OLF044084A
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-110
Convenient features of your vehicle
• Do not cover or spill anything on
the sensor (1) located in front of
the instrument panel.
• Do not clean the sensor using a
window cleaner, the cleanser may
leave a light film which could
interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of metallic coat-
ing on the front windshield, the
AUTO light system may not work
properly.
Parking lamp position ( )
The parking lamp, license plate lamp
and instrument panel lamp are turned
ON.
Headlamp position ( )
The headlamp, parking lamp, license
plate lamp and instrument panel lamp
are turned ON.
Information
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlamp.
i
NOTICE
OLF044086N OLF044087N
3-111
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlamp,
push the lever away from you. The
lever will return to its original position.
The high beam indicator will light
when the headlamp high beams are
switched on.
To turn off the high beam headlamp,
pull the lever towards you. The low
beams will turn on.
To flash the high beam headlamp,
pull the lever towards you, then
release the lever. The high beams
will remain ON as long as you hold
the lever towards you.
Smart High Beam
(if equipped)
The Smart High Beam is a system
that automatically adjusts the head-
lamp range (switches between high
beam and low beam) according to
the brightness of other vehicles and
road conditions.
OLF044088N
OLF044090N
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles approaching
you. Using high beam could
obstruct the other driver's vision.
WARNING
OLF044089N
3-112
Convenient features of your vehicle
Operating condition
1. Place the light switch in the AUTO
position.
2. Turn on the high beam by pushing
the lever away from you.
The smart high beam ( ) indica-
tor will illuminate.
3. The Smart High Beam will turn on
when vehicle speed is above 28
mph (45km/h).
• If the lever is pushed away when
the Smart High Beam is operat-
ing, the Smart High Beam will
turn off and the high beam will
be on continuously. The smart
high beam ( ) indicator will
turn off.
• If the lever is pulled towards you
when the Smart High Beam is
operating, the Smart High Beam
will turn off.
4. If the light switch is placed to the
headlamp position, the Smart
High Beam will turn off and the
low beam will be on continuously.
The high beam switches to low beam
in the below conditions.
- When the Smart High Beam is off.
- When the light switch is not in the
AUTO position.
- When the headlamp is detected
from the on-coming vehicle.
- When the tail lamp is detected
from the front vehicle.
- When the surrounding is bright
enough high beams are not need-
ed.
- When streetlights or other lights
are detected.
- When vehicle speed is below 18
mph (35km/h).
Warning light and message
When the Smart High Beam Assist
System is not working properly, the
warning message will come on for a
few second. After the message dis-
appears, the master warning light will
illuminate. Take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked.
OLF054445N/OLF054030
■ Warning message ■ Master warning
3-113
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
The system may not operate nor-
mally in the below conditions.
• When the light from the on-
coming or front vehicle is not
detected because of lamp dam-
age, hidden from sight, etc.
• When the lamp of the on-com-
ing or front vehicle is covered
with dust, snow or water.
• When the light from the on-
coming or front vehicle is not
detected because of exhaust
fume, smoke, fog, snow, etc.
• When the front window is cov-
ered with foreign matters such
as ice,dust, fog,or is damaged.
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
• When there is a similar shape
lamp with the front vehicle’s
lamps.
• When it is hard to see because
of fog, heavy rain or snow.
• When the headlamp is not
repaired or replaced at an
authorized dealer.
• When headlamp aiming is not
properly adjusted.
• When driving on a narrow
curved road or rough road.
• When driving downhill or uphill.
• When only part of the vehicle
in front is visible on a cross-
road or curved road.
• When there is a traffic light,
reflecting sign, flashing sign
or mirror.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the road conditions are
bad such as being wet or cov-
ered with snow.
• When the front vehicle's head-
lamps are off but the fog lamps
on.
• When a vehicle suddenly
appears from a curve.
• When the vehicle is tilted from
a flat tire or being towed.
• When the LDWS (Lane
Departure Warning System)
warning light illuminates. (if
equipped)
3-114
Convenient features of your vehicle
Turn signals and lane change
signals
To signal a turn, push down on the
lever for a left turn or up for a right
turn in position (A). To signal a lane
change, move the turn signal lever
slightly and hold it in position (B).The
lever will return to the OFF position
when released or when the turn is
completed.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one
of the turn signal bulbs may be
burned out and will require replace-
ment.
Onetouch turn signal function
To activate an One Touch Turn Signal
function, move the turn signal lever
slightly and then release it. The lane
change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7
times.
You can activate or deactivate the
One Touch Turn Signal function or
choose the number of blinking (3, 5,
or 7) from the User Settings Mode
(Light) on the LCD display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.
OLF044091N
• Do not place any accessories,
stickers or tint the windshield.
• Have the windshield glass
replaced from an authorized
dealer.
• Do not remove or impact relat-
ed parts of the Smart High
Beam system.
• Be careful that water doesn’t
get into the Smart High Beam
unit.
• Do not place objects on the
dashboard that reflects light
such as mirrors, white paper,
etc.The system may malfunc-
tion if sunlight is reflected.
• At times, the Smart High
Beam system may not work
properly, always check the
road conditions for your safe-
ty. When the system does not
operate normally, manually
change between the high
beam and low beam.
WARNING
3-115
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Battery saver function
The purpose of this feature is to pre-
vent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lamp when the
key is removed (remote key) or when
the driver turns the engine off (smart
key) and opens the driver-side door.
With this feature, the parking lamps
will turn off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lamps on
when the engine is turned off, perform
the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lamps OFF and
ON again using the light switch on
the steering column.
Headlamp delay function
(if equipped)
If the key is removed from the ignition
switch or placed in the ACC position or
the LOCK/OFF position with the head-
lamps ON, the headlamps (and/or
parking lamps) remain on for about 5
minutes. However, if the driver’s door
is opened and closed, the headlights
are turned off after 15 seconds.
However, with the engine off if the dri-
ver's door is opened and closed, the
headlamps (and/or parking lamps) are
turned off after 15 seconds.
The headlamps (and/or parking lamps)
can be turned off by pressing the lock
button on the remote key or smart key
twice or turning the light switch to the
OFF or AUTO position.However, if you
turn the light switch to the AUTO posi-
tion when it is dark outside, the head-
lamps will not be turned off.
You can activate or deactivate the
Headlamp Delay function from the
User Settings Mode (Light) on the
LCD display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except dri-
ver's door), the battery saver func-
tion does not operate and the
headlamp delay function does not
turn off automatically.Therefore, It
causes the battery to be dis-
charged. In this case, make sure
to turn off the lamp before getting
out of the vehicle.
NOTICE
3-116
Convenient features of your vehicle
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting
System) a.k.a. DBL (Dynamic
Bending Light) (if equipped)
Adaptive front lighting system uses
the steering angle and vehicle speed
to help maximize your field of vision
by swiveling and leveling the head-
lamp.
Change the switch to the AUTO posi-
tion when the engine is running. The
adaptive front lighting system will
operate when the headlamps are
ON.To turn off the AFLS, change the
switch to other positions. After turn-
ing the AFLS off, headlamp swiveling
no longer occurs, but the leveling will
operate continuously.
If the AFLS malfunction indicator
comes on, the AFLS is not working
properly. Drive to the nearest safe
location and restart the engine. If the
indicator continuously remains on,
we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Daytime running light (DRL)
(if equipped)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
can make it easier for others to see
the front of your vehicle during the
day, especially after dawn and before
sunset.
for U.S.A
The DRL will turn off when:
• Type A
1. The light switch is not in the AUTO
position.
2. The parking brake is applied.
3. The engine is turned off.
• Type B
1. The light switch is not in DRL posi-
tion.
2. The parking brake is applied.
3. The engine is turned off.
for Canada
The DRL will turn off when:
1. The light switch is in the headlamp
position, including the operation
that the headlamp is turned on
automatically in the AUTO light
position.
2. The parking brake is applied.
3. The engine is turned off.
OAD045436N
3-117
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Welcome System (if equipped)
Welcome light
Door handle lamp (if equipped)
When all the doors (and trunk) are
closed and locked, the door handle
lamp will come on for about 15 sec-
onds if any of the below is performed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or
smart key.
• When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
• When the vehicle is approached
with the smart key in possession.
Headlamp and Parking lamp
When the headlamp (lamp switch in
the headlamp or AUTO position) is
on and all doors (and trunk) are
locked and closed, the parking lamp
and headlamp will come on for 15
seconds if/or any of the below is per-
formed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or
smart key.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button on the remote key or
smart key the parking lamp and
headlamp will turn off immediately.
You can activate or deactivate the
Welcome Light from the User
Settings Mode (Light) on the LCD
display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.
Interior lamp
When the interior lamp switch is in
the DOOR position and all doors
(and trunk) are closed and locked,
the room lamp will come on for 30
seconds if any of the below is per-
formed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or
smart key.
• When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button on the remote key or
smart key the room lamp will turn off
immediately.
OLF044083N
3-118
Convenient features of your vehicle
Interior Lights
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine
is turned off or the battery will dis-
charge.
Interior lamp AUTO cut
The interior lamps will automatically
go off approximately 20 minutes after
the engine is turned off and the
doors closed.If a door is opened, the
lamp will go off 40 minutes after the
engine is turned off. If the doors are
locked by the remote key or smart
key and the vehicle enters the armed
stage of the theft alarm system, the
lamps will go off five seconds later.
Front lamps
NOTICE
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark. The
interior lights may obscure your
view and cause an accident.
WARNING
OLF044096N
OLF044097N
OLF046557N
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type C
3-119
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
(1) Front Map Lamp
(2) Front Door Lamp
(3) Front Room Lamp
Front Map Lamp:
Press either of these lens (1) to turn
the map lamp on or off.This light pro-
duces a spot beam for convenient
use as a map lamp at night or as a
personal lamp for the driver and the
front passenger.
Front Door Lamp :
The front or rear room lamps come
on when the front or rear doors are
opened if the engine is running or
not.When doors are unlocked by the
remote key or smart key, the front
and rear lamps come on for approxi-
mately 15 seconds as long as any
door is not opened. The front and
rear room lamps go out gradually
after approximately 15 seconds if the
door is closed. However, if the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position or all
doors are locked, the front and rear
lamps will turn off immediately.
If a door is opened with the ignition
switch in the ACC position or the
LOCK/OFF position, the front and
rear lamps stay on for about 20 min-
utes. However, if a door is opened
with the ignition switch in the ON
position, the lamps stays on continu-
ously.
Front Room Lamp:
• Type A
: Press this switch to turn the
front and rear room lamps on.
: Press this switch to turn the
front and rear room lamps off.
• Type B
: Press this switch to turn the
front and rear room lamps on
and off.
3-120
Convenient features of your vehicle
Rear lamps
Rear Room Lamp :
Press this switch to turn the room
lamp on and off.
Trunk room lamp
The trunk room lamp comes on
when the trunk is opened.
The trunk lamp comes on as long
as the trunk lid is open.To prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain, close the trunk lid securely
after using the trunk.
Door courtesy lamp
The door courtesy lamp comes ON
when the door is opened to assist
entering or exiting the vehicle. It also
serves as a warning to passing vehi-
cles that the vehicle door is open.
When the ignition switch is in the
LOCK/OFF or ACC position, the
door courtesy lamp turns off after 20
minutes.
NOTICE
OLF044255 OLF044256
OLF044098
OLF044099
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-122
Convenient features of your vehicle
A :Wiper speed control
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
C :Wash with brief wipes
Windshield Wipers
Operates as follows when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
push the lever upward and
release.The wipers will oper-
ate continuously if the lever is
held in this position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation.
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. To
vary the speed setting, move
the speed control lever.
LO :The wiper runs at a lower speed.
HI : The wiper runs at a higher speed.
Information
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windshield wipers to
ensure proper operation.
If you do not remove the snow and/or
ice before using the wiper and washer,
it may damage the wiper and washer
system.
i
WWIIPPEERRSS AANNDD WWAASSHHEERRSS
OLF044278
3-123
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Windshield Washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles. The spray and
wiper operation will continue until
you release the lever. If the washer
does not work, you may need to add
washer fluid to the washer fluid
reservoir.
If equipped with the Headlamp
Washer, washer fluid will be sprayed
on the headlamp at the same time you
operate the windshield washer when:
1.The ignition switch is in the ON
position.
2.The light switch is in the headlamp
position.
• To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not oper-
ate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windshield, do not
operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers and washer system,
use anti-freezing washer fluids
in the winter season or cold
weather.
NOTICE
When the outside temperature is
below freezing, ALWAYS warm
the windshield using the
defroster to prevent the washer
fluid from freezing on the wind-
shield and obscuring your vision
which could result in an acci-
dent and serious injury or death.
WARNING
OLF044095N
3-124
Convenient features of your vehicle
DDRRIIVVEERR AASSSSIISSTT SSYYSSTTEEMM
Rear View Camera
The Rear View Camera will activate
when the engine is running and the
shift lever is in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion.
This is a supplemental system that
shows behind the vehicle through the
navigation display while backing-up.
Always keep the camera lens
clean. The camera may not work
normally if the lens is covered
with foreign matter.
NOTICE
OLF044282N
OLF044281
The Rear View Camera is not a
safety device. It only serves to
assist the driver in identifying
objects directly behind the mid-
dle of the vehicle. The camera
does NOT cover the complete
area behind the vehicle.
WARNING
• Never rely solely on the Rear
View Camera when backing-
up.
• ALWAYS look around your
vehicle to make sure there are
no objects or obstacles before
moving the vehicle in any
direction to prevent a collision.
• Always pay close attention
when the vehicle is driven
close to objects, particularly
pedestrians, and especially
children.
WARNING
3-125
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Rear Parking Assist System
(if equipped)
The Rear Parking Assist System
assists the driver during reverse
movement of the vehicle by chiming
if any object is sensed within the dis-
tance of 50 inches (120 cm ) behind
the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem that senses objects within the
range and location of the sensors, it
cannot detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed.
Operation of the Rear Parking
Assist System
Operating condition
• This system will activate when
backing up with the ignition switch
in the ON position.However, if vehi-
cle speed exceeds 3 mph (5km/h),
the system may not detect objects.
• If vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10
km/h), the system will not warn you
even though objects are detected.
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
OLF044062
Sensor
• ALWAYS look around your vehi-
cle to make sure there are not
any objects or obstacles before
moving the vehicle in any direc-
tion to prevent a collision.
• Always pay close attention
when the vehicle is driven close
to objects,particularly pedestri-
ans, and especially children.
• Be aware that some objects
may not be visible on the
screen or be detected by the
sensors, due to the objects
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effective-
ness of the sensor.
WARNING
3-126
Convenient features of your vehicle
Types of warning sound and indicator
• The indicator may differ from the
illustration as objects or sensors
status. If the indicator blinks,
have your vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the audible warning does not
sound or if the buzzer sounds
intermittently when shifting into R
(Reverse) position, this may indi-
cate a malfunction with the
Parking Assist System. If this
occurs,have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.
To turn off the Rear Parking
Assist System
Push the button to turn off the Rear
Parking Assist System.The indicator
light on the button will turn on.
NOTICE
OLF044479N
Types of warning sound Indicator
When an object is 47 in. to 24
in. (120 cm to 60 cm) from the
rear bumper : Buzzer beeps
intermittently.
When an object is 24 in. to 12
in. (60 cm to 30 cm) from the
rear bumper : Buzzer beeps
more frequently.
When an object is within 12
in. (30 cm) of the rear bumper
: Buzzer beeps continuously.
3-127
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Non-operational conditions of
Parking Assist System
The Rear Parking Assist System
may not operate normally when:
• Moisture is frozen to the sensor.
• Sensor is covered with foreign mat-
ter, such as snow or water, or the
sensor cover is blocked.
There is a possibility of the Rear
Parking Assist System malfunction
when:
• Driving on uneven road surfaces
such as unpaved roads, gravel,
bumps, or gradient.
• Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes
can interfere with the sensor.
• Heavy rain or water spray is present.
• Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are present near the sensor.
• The sensor is covered with snow.
• Any non-factory equipment or
accessories have been installed, or
if the vehicle bumper height or sen-
sor installation has been modified.
Detecting range may decrease when:
• Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
• Undetectable objects smaller than
40 inches (1 m) and narrower than
6 inches (14 cm) in diameter.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
• Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
• Objects, which tend to absorb sen-
sor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
Sensor may not recognize objects
less than 12 inches (30 cm) from
the sensor, or it may sense an
incorrect distance.
Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor with any hard objects that
could damage the surface of the
sensor. Sensor damage could
occur.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Your new vehicle warranty does
not cover any accidents or dam-
age to the vehicle or injuries to
its occupants related to a Rear
Parking Assist System. Always
drive safely and cautiously.
WARNING
3-128
Convenient features of your vehicle
DDEEFFRROOSSTTEERR
To prevent damage to the conduc-
tors bonded to the inside surface
of the rear window, never use
sharp instruments or window
cleaners containing abrasives to
clean the window.
If you want to defrost and defog
the front windshield, refer to the
"Windshield Defrosting and
Defogging" section in this chapter.
Rear Window Defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the interior and exterior of the rear
window, while engine is running.
• To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the center
facia switch panel. The indicator on
the rear window defroster button illu-
minates when the defroster is ON.
• To turn off the defroster, press the
rear window defroster button again.
Information
• If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
• The rear window defroster automat-
ically turns off after approximately
20 minutes or when the ignition
switch is in the LOCK/OFF position.
Side view mirror defroster
If your vehicle is equipped with the
side view mirror defrosters, they will
operate at the same time you turn on
the rear window defroster.
i
NOTICE
OLF044204
OLF044205
■ Manual climate control system
• Type B
• Type A
■ Automatic climate control system
• Type B
• Type A
3-129
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
MMAANNUUAALL CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OLF044202/OLF044203
1. Fan speed control knob
2.Temperature control knob
3. Mode selection buttons
4. Front windshield defroster button
5. Rear window defroster button
6. Air intake control button
7. A/C (Air conditioning) button
■■
Type A
■■
Type B
3-130
Convenient features of your vehicle
Heating and Air Conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling :
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air or recirculated
air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
OLF044207N
*
*
* : if equipped
3-131
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dash-
board outlets, or windshield. Five
symbols are used to represent Face,
Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and
Defrost air position.
Face-Level (B, D, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, D, C, E, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield, side
window defrosters, and side vents.
Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters, and side vents.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side vents.
OLF044206
3-132
Convenient features of your vehicle
MAX A/C-Level (B, D)
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool
the inside of the vehicle faster. Air
flow is directed toward the upper
body and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and
the recirculated air position will be
selected automatically.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened ( )
or closed ( ) separately using the
thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivered from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature will increase by
turning the knob to the right.
The temperature will decrease by
turning the knob to the left.
OLF044208 OLF044209 OLF044210
3-133
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Air intake control
This button is used to select the out-
side (fresh) air position or recirculat-
ed air position.
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the
button illuminates when
the recirculated air posi-
tion is selected.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger com-
partment will be drawn
through the climate con-
trol system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the
button will turn off when
the outside (fresh) air
position is selected.
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Information
Prolonged use of the air conditioning
with the recirculated air position
selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.
i
OLF044211
3-134
Convenient features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
Turn the knob to the right to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the
knob to the left to decrease fan
speed and airflow.
Setting the fan speed control knob to
the "0" position turns off the fan.
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the sys-
tem on (indicator light will illuminate)
and off.
OLF044212 OLF044213
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, that may cause
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
(without the air conditioning
selected) may allow humidity
to increase inside the vehicle
which may fog the glass and
obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause seri-
ous injury or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
WARNING
3-135
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
System Operation
Ventilation
1. Select the Face Level mode.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Select the Floor Level mode.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system on.
If the windshield fogs up, select the
Floor & Defrost mode or press
the Front Defrost mode.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the car through the
ventilation system, temporarily set
the air intake control to the recircu-
lated air position. Return the con-
trol to the fresh air position when
the irritation has passed. This will
help keep the driver alert and com-
fortable.
• To prevent the inside of the wind-
shield from fogging, set the air
intake control to the fresh air posi-
tion and fan speed to the desired
position, turn on the air conditioning
system, and adjust the temperature
control to desired temperature.
Air conditioning
All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning
Systems are filled with environmen-
tally friendly R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the air conditioning button.
3. Set the mode to the Face Level
mode.
4. Set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. However,
prolonged operation of the recircu-
lated air position will excessively
dry the air.In this case, change the
air position.
5. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position then set the fan
speed control to the highest speed.
3-136
Convenient features of your vehicle
When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the engine tem-
perature gauge closely while driv-
ing up hills or in heavy traffic
when outside temperatures are
high. Air conditioning system
operation can cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the blow-
er fan, but turn the air condition-
ing system off if the engine tem-
perature gauge indicates engine
overheating.
Air conditioning system operation
tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• After sufficient cooling has been
achieved, switch back from the
recirculated air to the fresh outside
air position.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system with the win-
dows and sunroof closed.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
• If you operate air conditioner
excessively, the difference between
the temperature of the outside air
and that of the windshield could
cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, causing loss
of visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button to
the position and fan speed
control to the lower speed.
NOTICE
3-137
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
System Maintenance
Climate control air filter
This filter is installed behind the glove
box. It filters the dust or other pollu-
tants that enter the vehicle through the
heating and air conditioning system.
Have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer according to the maintenance
schedule. If the car is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent air condi-
tioner filter inspections and changes
are required.
If the air flow rate suddenly decreas-
es, the system should be checked at
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative influence on the air
conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrig-
erant is used. Otherwise, damage
to the compressor and abnormal
system operation may occur.
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
Because the refriger-
ant is at very high
pressure, the air con-
ditioning system
should only be serv-
iced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used, oth-
erwise damage to the vehicle
and personal injury may occur.
WARNING
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
3-138
Convenient features of your vehicle
Air Conditioning refrigerant label
The actual Air Conditioning refriger-
ant label in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below :
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
Refer to chapter 8 for more detail
location of the air conditioning refrig-
erant label.
ODH043365
■ Example
3-139
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM
OLF044214/OLF044215
1. Driver’s temperature control knob
2. Passenger’s temperature control knob
3. AUTO (automatic control) button
4. OFF button
5. Fan speed control button
6. Air conditioning button
7. SYNC button
8. Front windshield defroster button
9. Rear window defroster button
10. Mode selection button
11. Air intake control button
12. Climate control information screen
■■
Type A
■■
Type B
3-140
Convenient features of your vehicle
Automatic Heating and Air
Conditioning
The Automatic Climate Control
System is controlled by setting the
desired temperature.
1. Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake
and air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically by the temperature set-
ting you select.
2.Turn the temperature control knob
to the desired temperature. If the
temperature is set to the lowest
setting (Lo), the air conditioning
system will operate continuously.
To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button of the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windshield defroster button
(Press the button one more time
to deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The 'AUTO'
sign will illuminate on the infor-
mation display once again.)
- Fan speed control button
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other functions
operate automatically.
For your convenience and to improve
the effectiveness of the climate con-
trol, use the AUTO button and set the
temperature to 73°F (23°C).
OLF044216
OLF044217
3-141
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Never place anything near the
sensor to ensure better control of
the heating and cooling system.
Manual Heating and Air
Conditioning
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pushing
buttons other than the AUTO button.
In this case, the system works
sequentially according to the order of
buttons selected.
When pressing any button except the
AUTO button while using automatic
operation, the functions not selected
will be controlled automatically.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling:
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
7. Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
NOTICE
OLF044218N
3-142
Convenient features of your vehicle
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
OLF044219
■ Type A
■ Type B
OLF044207N
*
*
* : if equipped
3-143
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
The air flow outlet direction is cycled
as follows:
Face-Level (B, D, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window
defrosters.
OLF044221
■ Type B
OLF044220
■ Type A
3-144
Convenient features of your vehicle
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened ( )
or closed ( ) separately using the
thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivered from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
Turn the knob to the right to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the
knob to the left to decrease fan
speed and airflow.
The temperature will increase or
decrease by 1°F/0.5°C for each but-
ton press. When set to the lowest
temperature setting, the air condi-
tioning will operate continuously.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
• Press the "SYNC" button to oper-
ate the driver and passenger side
temperature equally.
The passenger side temperature
will be set to the same temperature
as the driver side temperature.
• Turn the left temperature control
knob. The driver and passenger
side temperature will be adjusted
equally.
OLF044222
■ Rear (if equipped)
OLF044209
■ Front
OLF044223
■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side
OLF044224
3-145
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Adjusting the driver and passen-
ger side temperature individually
Press the "SYNC" button again to
operate the driver and passenger
side temperature individually. The
button indicator will turn off.
Temperature conversion
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Fahrenheit.
To change the temperature unit from
°F to °C or °C to °F:
- On the instrument cluster, go to
User Settings Mode ➝ Other
Features ➝ Temperature Unit.
- Press the AUTO button for 3 sec-
onds while pressing the OFF button.
(Automatic climate control system)
Both the temperature unit on the
cluster LCD display and climate con-
trol screen will change.
Air intake control
This button is used to select the out-
side (fresh) air position or recirculat-
ed air position.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Information
Prolonged use of the air conditioning
with the recirculated air position
selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.
i
OLF044226
■ Type B
OLF044225
■ Type A
3-146
Convenient features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by pushing the fan
speed control button.
The higher the fan speed is, the
more air is delivered.
Pressing the OFF button turns off the
fan.
Information
For better sound quality, fan speed
may automatically slow down for a
couple of minutes when you activate
voice recognition or hands free.
Air conditioning
Push the A/C button to manually turn
the system on (indicator light will illu-
minate) and off.
i
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, that may cause
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
(without the air conditioning
selected) may allow humidity
to increase inside the vehicle
which may fog the glass and
obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause seri-
ous injury or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
WARNING
OLF044228OLF044227
3-147
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
OFF mode
Push the OFF button of the front to
turn off the air climate control sys-
tem. You can still operate the mode
and air intake buttons as long as the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
System Operation
Ventilation
1. Select the Face Level mode.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Select the Floor Level mode.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system on.
If the windshield fogs up, select the
Floor & Defrost mode or press
the Front Defrost mode.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the car through the
ventilation system, temporarily set
the air intake control to the recircu-
lated air position. Return the con-
trol to the fresh air position when
the irritation has passed. This will
help keep the driver alert and com-
fortable.
• To prevent the inside of the wind-
shield from fogging, set the air
intake control to the fresh air posi-
tion and fan speed to the desired
position, turn on the air conditioning
system, and adjust the temperature
control to desired temperature.
OLF044230
3-148
Convenient features of your vehicle
Air conditioning
All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning
Systems are filled with environmen-
tally friendly R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the air conditioning button.
3. Set the mode to the Face Level
mode.
4. Set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. However,
prolonged operation of the recircu-
lated air position will excessively
dry the air.In this case, change the
air position.
5. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position then set the fan
speed control to the highest speed.
When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the engine tem-
perature gauge closely while driv-
ing up hills or in heavy traffic
when outside temperatures are
high. Air conditioning system
operation can cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the blow-
er fan, but turn the air condition-
ing system off if the engine tem-
perature gauge indicates engine
overheating.
Air conditioning system operation
tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• After sufficient cooling has been
achieved, switch back from the
recirculated air to the fresh outside
air position.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system with the win-
dows and sunroof closed.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
NOTICE
3-149
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
• If you operate air conditioner
excessively, the difference between
the temperature of the outside air
and that of the windshield could
cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, causing loss
of visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button to
the position and fan speed
control to the lower speed.
System Maintenance
Climate control air filter
This filter is installed behind the glove
box. It filters the dust or other pollu-
tants that enter the vehicle through the
heating and air conditioning system.
Have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer according to the maintenance
schedule. If the car is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent air con-
ditioner filter inspections and
changes are required.
If the air flow rate suddenly decreas-
es, the system should be checked at
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative influence on the air
conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrig-
erant is used. Otherwise, damage
to the compressor and abnormal
system operation may occur.
NOTICE
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
3-150
Convenient features of your vehicle
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Air Conditioning refrigerant label
The actual Air Conditioning refriger-
ant label in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below :
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
Refer to chapter 8 for more detail
location of the air conditioning refrig-
erant label.
Because the refriger-
ant is at very high
pressure, the air con-
ditioning system
should only be serv-
iced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used, oth-
erwise damage to the vehicle
and personal injury may occur.
WARNING
ODH043365
■ Example
3-151
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD DDEEFFRROOSSTTIINNGG AANNDD DDEEFFOOGGGGIINNGG
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set the
mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear win-
dow, side view mirrors, and all side
windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster effi-
ciency and to reduce the probability
of fogging up the inside of the wind-
shield.
If the engine temperature is still
cold after starting, then a brief
engine warm up period may be
required for the vented air flow to
become warm or hot.
Manual Climate Control System
To defog inside windshield
1. Select any fan speed except “0”
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the or position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be select-
ed automatically.Additionally, the air
conditioning will automatically oper-
ate if the mode is selected to the
position.
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, press the correspon-
ding button manually.
NOTICE
Windshield heating
Do not use the or posi-
tion during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temper-
ature of the outside air and that
of the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility could cause an acci-
dent resulting in serious injury
or death. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button
to the position and fan
speed control knob or button to
a lower speed.
WARNING
OLF044231
3-152
Convenient features of your vehicle
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme
hot position.
3. Select the position.
4.The outside (fresh) air and air con-
ditioning will be selected automat-
ically.
Automatic Climate Control
System
To defog inside windshield
1. Select desired fan speed.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4.The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position is
not selected automatically, adjust the
corresponding button manually.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme
hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4.The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.
OLF044233
■ Type A
■ Type B
OLF044232
OLF044236
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-153
Convenient features of your vehicle
Defogging logic (if equipped)
To reduce the probability of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake or air conditioning are con-
trolled automatically according to
certain conditions such as or
position. To cancel or return the
defogging logic, do the following.
Manual climate control system
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defroster button ( ).
3. Press the air intake control button
at least 5 times within 10 seconds.
The indicator on the air intake button
blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of
interval. It indicates that the defog-
ging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
Automatic climate control sys-
tem
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defroster button ( ).
3.While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button at least 5 times with-
in 3 seconds.
The climate control information
screen will blink 3 times with 0.5 sec-
onds of interval. It indicates that the
defogging logic is canceled or
returned to the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
3
3-154
Convenient features of your vehicle
CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL AADDDDIITTIIOONNAALL FFEEAATTUURREESS ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
Automatic Ventilation
(if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position or when the engine is run-
ning and temperature is below 59°F
(15°C) with the recirculated air posi-
tion selected more than five minutes,
the air intake position will automati-
cally change to the outside (fresh) air
position.
To cancel or reset the Automatic
Ventilation
When the air conditioning system is
on, select Face Level mode and
while pressing the A/C button, press
the recirculated air position button
five times within three seconds.
Sunroof Inside Air
Recirculation (if equipped)
When the heater or air conditioning
system is on with the sunroof
opened, the outside (fresh) air posi-
tion will be automatically selected. At
this time, if you press the recirculated
air position button, the recirculated
air position will be selected but will
change back to the outside (fresh) air
position after 3 minutes.
When the sunroof is closed, the air
intake position will return to the orig-
inal position that was selected.
3-155
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
SSTTOORRAAGGEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartments.
Center Console Storage
To open :
Press the button (1).
Glove Box
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with the mechanical key (1).
To open:
Pull the lever (2).
NOTICE
Never store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot tem-
peratures for extended periods.
WARNING
ALWAYS keep the storage com-
partment covers closed secure-
ly while driving. Items inside
your vehicle are moving as fast
as the vehicle. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there
is a crash, the items may fly out
of the compartment and may
cause an injury if they strike the
driver or a passenger.
WARNING
OLF044261
OLF044262
ALWAYS close the glove box
door after use.
An open glove box door can
cause serious injury to the pas-
senger in an accident, even if the
passenger is wearing a seat belt.
WARNING
3-156
Convenient features of your vehicle
Sunglass Holder
To open:
Press the cover and the holder will
slowly open. Place your sunglasses
in the compartment door with the
lenses facing out.
To close:
Push back into position.
Make sure the sunglass holder is
closed while driving.
Multi box
To open the cover, press the cover
and it will slowly open. To close the
cover, press the cover and it will
slowly close.
For the safety of the passengers,
when the cover is closed, the cover
locks if the vehicle shakes by sudden
acceleration and braking.
To unlock the cover, press the cover
twice.
OLF044263
• Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sun-
glass holder. Such objects can
be thrown from the holder in
the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring
the passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked
by an open sunglass holder.
• Do not put the glasses forcibly
into a sunglass holder. It may
cause personal injury if you
try to open it forcibly when the
glasses are jammed in holder.
WARNING
OLF044279N
3-157
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
IINNTTEERRIIOORR FFEEAATTUURREESS
Cup Holder
Cups or small beverages cups may
be placed in the cup holders.
Rear
Pull the armrest down to use the cup
holders.
• Keep your drinks sealed while
driving to prevent spilling your
drink. If liquid spills, it may get
into the vehicle's electrical/elec-
tronic system and damage elec-
trical/electronic parts.
• When cleaning spilled liquids, do
not dry the cup holder at high
temperature. This may damage
the cup holder.
NOTICE
OLF044266
■ Front
■ Rear
OLF044265N
• Avoid abrupt starting and
braking when the cup holder
is in use to prevent spilling
your drink. If hot liquid spills,
you could be burned. Such a
burn to the driver could cause
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident.
• Do not place uncovered or
unsecured cups, bottles,
cans, etc., in the cup holder
containing hot liquid while the
vehicle is in motion. Injuries
may result in the event of sud-
den stop or collision.
• Only use soft cups in the cup
holders. Hard objects can
injure you in an accident.
WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of
direct sun light and do not put
them in a hot vehicle. It may
explode.
WARNING
3-158
Convenient features of your vehicle
Sunvisor
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
sunvisor and slide the mirror cover (3).
Adjust the sunvisor forward or back-
ward (4) as needed. Use the ticket
holder (5 and 6) to hold tickets.
Close the vanity mirror cover
securely and return the sunvisor
to its original position after use.
• Do not put several tickets in the
ticket holder at one time. This
could cause damage to the tick-
et holder.
• Avoid putting a plastic card
such as a credit card in the tick-
et holder located in the outside
of the sunvisor.This could cause
damage to the plastic card.
Power Outlet (if equipped)
The power outlet is designed to pro-
vide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 180
W(Watt) with the engine running.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OLF044267
For your safety, do not block
your view when using the sunvi-
sor.
WARNING
OLF044269
■ Front
■ Rear (if equipped)
OLF044268N
3-159
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
To prevent damage to the Power
Outlets :
• Use the power outlet only when
the engine is running and
remove the accessory plug after
use. Using the accessory plug
for prolonged periods of time
with the engine off could cause
the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric acces-
sories which are less than 180
W(Watt) in electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet.These devices may
cause excessive audio static
and malfunctions in other elec-
tronic systems or devices used
in your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Push the plug in as far as it will
go. If good contact is not made,
the plug may overheat and the
fuse may open.
• Plug in battery equipped electri-
cal/electronic devices with
reverse current protection. The
current from the battery may
flow into the vehicle’s electri-
cal/electronic system and cause
system malfunction.
NOTICE
Avoid electrical shocks. Do not
place your fingers or foreign
objects (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet or touch the power outlet
with a wet hand.
WARNING
3-160
Convenient features of your vehicle
Clock
With Audio system
Whenever the battery terminals or
related fuses are disconnected, you
must reset the time.
To set the time:
The ignition switch must be in the
ACC position or the ON position.
• H (Hour, 1)
Each time you press the "H" button,
the clock will change backward by
one hour. Pressing and holding the
"H" button will change the clock
backward continuously.
Release the button at the desired time.
• M (Minute, 2)
Each time you press the "M" button ,
the clock will change backward by
one minute.Pressing and holding the
"M" button will change the clock
backward continuously.
Release the button at the desired time.
• Display conversion
To change the 12 hour format to the
24 hour format, press the "H" and
"M" button simultaneously for more
than 4 seconds.
For example, if the "H" and "M" but-
ton is pressed when the time is 10:15
p.m., the display will change to 22:15
With Navigation system
You can set the clock by using the
Navigation system.
Do not adjust the clock while
driving, you may lose your
steering control and cause an
accident that results in severe
personal injury or death.
WARNING
OLF044237
OLF044238
3-161
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
GPS Time check
The clock is automatically updated
through the navigation system.
GPS Time non-check
The clock can be manually adjusted.
1. Select the "System Settings" on
the "INFO/Setup" screen.
2. Select the "Clock Settings".
3.Select the "Time Settings" by
rotating the controller on the cen-
ter console panel.
4. Select the "Time Format" to the 12
hour or 24 hour format.
For more information, please refer to
the manual that was separately sup-
plied with your vehicle.
Clothes Hanger (if equipped)
To hang items, pull the hanger down.
These hangers are not designed to
hold large or heavy items.
Do not hang other objects such
as hangers or hard objects
except clothes. Also, do not put
heavy, sharp or breakable
objects in the clothe pockets. In
an accident or when the curtain
air bag is inflated, it may cause
vehicle damage or personal
injury.
WARNING
OLF044271
■ Rear
■ Door post
OLF044482N
3-162
Convenient features of your vehicle
Floor Mat Anchor(s)
ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors
to attach the front floor mats to the
vehicle. The anchors on the front
floor carpet keep the floor mats from
sliding forward.
OVI043427
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat
to the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehi-
cle’s floor mat anchor(s)
before driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to
the vehicle’s floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top
of one another (e.g. all-weath-
er rubber mat on top of a car-
peted floor mat). Only a single
floor mat should be installed
in each position.
(Continued)
(Continued)
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver’s side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal opera-
tion, HYUNDAI recommends
that the HYUNDAI floor mat
designed for use in your vehicle
be installed.
WARNING
3-163
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Side Curtain (if equipped)
To use the side curtain:
1. Pull up the curtain by the hook (1).
2. Hang the curtain on both sides of
the hook.
• Always hang both sides of the cur-
tain on the hook.This could cause
damage to the side curtain if only
one side of the curtain is hooked.
• Do not let any foreign material
get in between the vehicle and
side curtain. The side curtain
may not be lifted up.
Luggage Net Holder
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the trunk,
you can use the 4 holders located in
the trunk to attach the luggage net.
Make sure the luggage net is securely
attached to the holders in the trunk.
NOTICE
OLF044273
OLF044274N
Avoid eye injury. DO NOT over-
stretch the luggage net. ALWAYS
keep your face and body out of
the luggage net’s recoil path. DO
NOT use the luggage net when
the strap has visible signs of
wear or damage.
WARNING
Multimedia System
Multimedia System.................................................4-2
AUX, USB and iPod
®
Port ...............................................4-2
Antenna ...............................................................................4-2
Steering Wheel Audio Control........................................4-3
Audio / Video / Navigation System (AVN)..................4-4
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Hands-Free...........4-4
How Vehicle Audio Works...............................................4-5
Features of Your Vehicle.................................................4-7
System Controllers and Functions
-3.8 Inch Mono TFT ............................................4-17
Audio Head Unit ..............................................................4-17
Setup ..................................................................................4-19
Radio : FM, AM, SiriusXM.............................................4-22
SiriusXM, XM
TM
RADIO ...................................................4-25
Basic Method of Use : Audio CD /
MP3 CD / USB / iPod
®
/ My Music...........................4-27
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio ....................4-33
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology ................................4-35
Voice Recognition ...........................................................4-46
Ending Voice Recognition .............................................4-47
Rear View Camera ..........................................................4-54
Blue Link
®
.........................................................................4-54
Declaration of conformity ............................................4-59
4
4-2
• If you install an aftermarket HID
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio
and electronic device may mal-
function.
• Prevent chemicals such as per-
fume, cosmetic oil, sun cream,
hand cleaner, and air freshener
from contacting the interior
parts because they may cause
damage or discoloration.
AUX, USB and iPod
®
Port
You can use an AUX port to connect
audio devices and an USB port to
plug in an USB and also in an iPod
®
port.
Information
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
❈ iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Antenna
Shark fin antenna (1)
The shark fin antenna will receive the
transmit data.
Glass antenna (2)
Your vehicle uses a glass antenna to
receive both AM and FM signals.
i
NOTICE
MMUULLTTIIMMEEDDIIAA SSYYSSTTEEMM
Multimedia System
OLF044275N
OLF044240
4-3
Multimedia System
• Do not clean the inside of the
rear window glass with a cleaner
or scraper to remove foreign
deposits as this may cause dam-
age to the antenna elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coatings
such as Ni, Cd, and so on.These
can degrade the receiving AM
and FM broadcast signals.
Steering Wheel Audio Control
Do not operate audio remote con-
trol buttons simultaneously.
VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1)
• Move the VOLUME lever up to
increase volume.
• Move the VOLUME lever down to
decrease volume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
If the SEEK/PRESET lever is moved
up or down and held for 0.8 second
or more, it will function in the follow-
ing modes;
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button. It will SEEK until you
release the button.
MEDIA mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET lever is moved
up or down, it will function in the fol-
lowing modes;
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STA-
TION UP/DOWN button.
MEDIA mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/
DOWN button.
NOTICE
NOTICE
4
OLF044241N
4-4
MODE (3)
Press the MODE button to select
Radio, XM, Disc, or AUX.
Information
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the following
pages in this chapter.
Audio (Display Audio) / Video /
Navigation System (AVN)
Detailed information for the AVN sys-
tem is described in a separately sup-
plied manual.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Hands-Free
You can use the phone wirelessly by
using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
(1) Call / Answer button
(2) Call end button
(3) Microphone
Detailed information for the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
hands-free is described in the follow-
ing pages in this chapter or in the
manual supplied separately.
i
Multimedia System
OLF044242N
OLF044276
4-5
Multimedia System
How vehicle audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broad-
cast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercept-
ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-
cle.This signal is then processed by
the radio and sent to your vehicle
speakers.
When a strong radio signal has
reached your vehicle, the precise
engineering of your audio system
ensures the best possible quality
reproduction. However, in some
cases the signal coming to your vehi-
cle may not be strong and clear.
This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
casts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low fre-
quencies. These long distance, low
frequency radio waves can follow the
curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight. In addition, they
curve around obstructions resulting
in better signal coverage.
4
JBM001
FM reception
JBM002
AM reception
4-6
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade within short distances
from the station.Also, FM signals are
easily affected by buildings, moun-
tains, and obstructions.This can lead
to undesirable or unpleasant listen-
ing conditions which might lead you
to believe a problem exists with your
radio. The following conditions are
normal and do not indicate radio
trouble:
• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can dis-
turb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur.Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As an FM signal
weakens, another more powerful
signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio sig-
nals being received from several
directions can cause distortion or
fluttering. This can be caused by a
direct and reflected signal from the
same station, or by signals from two
stations with close frequencies. If
this occurs, select another station
until the condition has passed.
Multimedia System
JBM003
FM radio station
JBM004 JBM005
4-7
Multimedia System
Features of your vehicle
Satellite radio reception
You may experience difficulties in
receiving XM
™
satellite radio signals
in the following situations.
• If you are driving in a tunnel or a
covered parking area.
• If you are driving beneath the top
level of a multi-level freeway.
• If you are driving under a bridge.
• If you are driving next to a tall vehicle
(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks
the signal.
• If you are driving in a valley where
the surrounding hills or peaks
block the signal from the satellite.
• If you are driving on a mountain
road where is the signal blocked by
mountains.
• If you are driving in an area with tall
trees that block the signal (30 ft.
/10m or more), for example on an
road that goes through a dense for-
est.
• The signal can become weak in
some areas that are not covered
by the XM™ repeater network.
Information
There may also be additional unfore-
seen circumstances leading to recep-
tion problems with the XM™ satellite
radio signal.
Advisory Messages, such as ‘CH
Unavailable’ may occur when starting
XM™ Radio.
i
4
SATELLITE2
SATELLITE1
4-8
Caring for disc
• If the temperature inside the car is too
high, open the car windows to venti-
late before using the system.
• It is illegal to copy and use
MP3/WMA files without permission.
Use CDs that are created only by
lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such
as benzene and thinner, normal
cleaners and magnetic sprays
made for analogue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from
getting damaged, hold CDs by the
edges or the center hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece
of soft cloth before playback (wipe
it from the center to the outside
edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or
paper.
• Make certain only CDs are insert-
ed into the CD player (Do not insert
more than one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
• Depending on the type of CD-
R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may
not operate normally according to
the manufacturing companies. In
such circumstances, continued
use may cause malfunctions to
your audio system.
Information
-
Playing an
Incompatible Copy Protected
Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do
not comply with international audio
CD standards (Red Book), may not
play on your car audio. Please note
that inabilities to properly play a copy
protected CD may indicate that the
CD is defective, not the CD player.
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
try to operate mobile devices as far
from the audio equipment as possible.
i
Multimedia System
When using a communication
system such as a cellular phone
or a radio set inside the vehicle, a
separate external antenna must
be fitted. When a cellular phone
or a radio set is used with an
internal antenna alone, it may
interfere with the vehicle's electri-
cal system and adversely affect
safe operation of the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone.
WARNING
4-9
Multimedia System
NOTE:
Order of playing files (folders) :
1. Song playing order : to
sequentially.
2. Folder playing order :
❋ If no song file is contained in the
folder,that folder is not displayed.
4
• Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Do not disassemble, assem-
ble, or modify the audio sys-
tem. Such acts could result in
accidents, fire, or electric
shock.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention of
traffic conditions and increase
the likelihood of accidents.
Use the phone feature after
parking the vehicle.
• Heed caution not to spill water
or introduce foreign objects
into the device. Such acts
could lead to smoke, fire, or
product malfunction.
WARNING
4-10
• Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. Spilling bever-
ages may lead to system mal-
function.
• In case of product malfunction,
please contact your place of pur-
chase or After Service center.
• Placing the audio system within
an electromagnetic environment
may result in noise interference.
• Prevent caustic solutions such
as perfume and cosmetic oil
from contacting the dashboard
because they may cause dam-
age or discoloration.
Information
- Using the discs
• This device has been manufactured
to be compatible with software
bearing the following logo marks.
• Do not clean discs with chemical
solutions, such as record sprays,
antistatic sprays, antistatic liquids,
benzene, or thinners.
• After using a disc, put the disc back
in its original case to prevent disc
scratches.
• Hold discs by their edges or within
the center hole to prevent damages
to disc surfaces.
• Do not introduce foreign substances
into the disc insert/eject slot.
Introducing foreign substances
could damage the device interior.
• Do not insert two discs simultane-
ously.
• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,
differences in disc reading and play-
ing times may occur depending on
the disc manufacturer, production
method and the recording method
as used by the user.
(Continued)
i
NOTICE
Multimedia System
• Operating the device while
driving could lead to accidents
due to a lack of attention to
external surroundings. First
park the vehicle before operat-
ing the device.
• Adjust the volume to levels that
allow the driver to hear sounds
from outside of the vehicle.
Driving in a state where exter-
nal sounds cannot be heard
may lead to accidents.
• Pay attention to the volume
setting when turning the
device on. A sudden output of
extreme volume upon turning
the device on could lead to
hearing impairment. (Adjust
the volume to a suitable level
before turning off the device.)
CAUTION
4-11
Multimedia System
(Continued)
• Clean fingerprints and dust off the
disc surface (coated side) with a soft
cloth.
• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs
attached with labels may result in
disc slot jams or difficulties in disc
removal. Such discs may also result
in noise while playing.
• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may not
properly operate depending on the
disc manufacturer, production
method and the record method as
used by the user. If problems persist,
trying using a different CD as con-
tinued use may result in malfunc-
tions.
• The performance of this product
may differ depending on the CD-
RW Drive Software.
• Copy-protected CDs such as S-type
CDs may not function in the device.
DATA discs cannot be played.
(However, such discs may still oper-
ate but will do so abnormally.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use abnormally shaped discs
(8cm, heart-shaped, octagon-
shaped) as such discs could lead to
malfunctions.
• If the disc is straddled on the disc
slot without removal for 10 seconds,
the disc will automatically be re-
inserted into the disc player.
• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
ported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-R,
CDs with labels)
Information -
Using the USB
device
• Connect the USB device after turn-
ing on the engine. The USB device
may become damaged if it is already
connected when the ignition is
turned on.The USB device may not
operate properly if the car ignition
is turned on or off with the USB
device connected.
• Heed caution to static electricity
when connecting/disconnecting USB
devices.
• Encoded MP3 Players will not be
recognized when connected as an
external device.
• When connecting an external USB
device, the device may not properly
recognize the USB is in some states.
• Only products formatted with
byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be
recognized.
• This device recognizes USB devices
formatted in FAT 12/16/32 file for-
mats. This device does not recognize
files in NTFS file format.
(Continued)
i
4
4-12
(Continued)
• Some USB devices may not be sup-
ported due to compatibility issues.
• Avoid contact between the USB con-
nector with bodily parts or foreign
objects.
• Repeated connecting/disconnecting
of USB devices within short periods
of time may result in product mal-
function.
• A strange noise may occur when dis-
connecting the USB.
• Make sure to connect/disconnect
external USB devices with the audio
power turned off.
• The amount of time required to rec-
ognize the USB device may differ
depending on the type, size or file
formats stored in the USB. Such dif-
ferences in time are not indications
of malfunctions.
• The device only supports USB
devices used to play music files.
• USB images and videos are not sup-
ported.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use the USB I/F to charge
batteries or USB accessories that
generate heat. Such acts may lead to
worsened performance or damage
to the device.
• The device may not recognize the
USB device if separately purchased
USB hubs and extension cables are
being used. Connect the USB direct-
ly with the multimedia terminal of
the vehicle.
• When using mass storage USB
devices with separate logical drives,
only files saved to the root drive can
be played.
• Files may not properly operate if
application programs are installed
to the USBs.
• The device may not operate normal-
ly if MP3 Players, cellular phones,
digital cameras, or other electronic
devices (USB devices not recognized
as portable disk drives) are connect-
ed with the device.
(Continued)
• Charging through the USB may not
work for some mobile devices.
• The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB memo-
ry type besides (Metal Cover Type)
USB Memory.
• The device may not support normal
operation when using formats such
as HDD Type, CF, or SD Memory.
• The device will not support files
locked by DRM (Digital Rights
Management.)
• USB memory sticks used by con-
necting an Adaptor (SD Type or CF
Type) may not be properly recog-
nized.
• The device may not operate proper-
ly when using USB HDDs or USBs
subject to connection failures
caused by vehicle vibrations. (e.g. i-
stick type)
(Continued)
Multimedia System
4-13
Multimedia System
(Continued)
• Avoid use of USB mem-
ory products that can
also be used as key
chains or mobile phone
accessories. Use of such products
may cause damage to the USB jack.
• Connecting an MP3 device or phone
through various channels, such as
AUX/BT or Audio/ USB mode may
result in pop noises or abnormal
operation.
Information
- Using the
iPod
®
device
• iPod
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
• In order to use the iPod
®
while oper-
ating the keys, you must use a dedi-
cated iPod
®
cable. (the cable that is
supplied when purchasing iPod
®
/iPhone
®
products)
• If the iPod
®
is connected to the vehi-
cle while it is playing, a high pitch
sound could occur for approximate-
ly 1-2 seconds immediately after
connecting. If possible, connect the
iPod to the vehicle with the iPod
®
stopped/ paused.
• During ACC ON state, connecting
the iPod
®
through the iPod
®
cable
will charge the iPod
®
through the
car audio system.
• When connecting with the iPod
®
cable, make sure to fully insert the
jack to prevent communication
interference.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the EQ features of an exter-
nal device, such as the iPod
®
, and
the audio system are both active, EQ
effects could overlap and cause
sound deterioration and distortion.
Whenever possible, turn off the EQ
feature within the external device
upon use by connecting with the
audio system.
• Noise may occur when an iPod
®
or
AUX device is connected. When
such devices are not being used, dis-
connect the device for storage.
• When the iPod
®
or AUX device
power is connected to the power
jack, playing the external device
may result in noise. In such cases,
disconnect the power connection
before use.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the charac-
teristics of your iPod
®
/Phone
®
device.
(Continued)
i
4
4-14
(Continued)
• If your iPhone
®
is connected to both
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
and USB, the sound may not be
properly played. In your iPhone
®
,
select the Dock connector or
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology to
change the sound output (source).
• iPod mode cannot be operated when
the iPod
®
cannot be recognized due
to versions that do not support com-
munication protocols.
• For fifth generation iPod
®
Nano
devices, the iPod
®
may not be recog-
nized when the battery level is low.
Please charge the iPod
®
for use.
• Search/play orders shown within
the iPod
®
device may differ with the
orders shown within the audio sys-
tem.
• If the iPod
®
malfunctions due to an
iPod
®
device defect, reset the iPod
®
and try again. (To learn more, refer to
your iPod
®
manual)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some iPod
®
s may not sync with the
System depending on its version. If
the Media is removed before the
Media is recognized, then the sys-
tem may not properly restore the
previously operated mode. (iPad
®
charging is not supported.)
Information
- Using the AUX
device
• If an external device connector is
connected with the AUX terminal,
then AUX mode will automatically
operate. Once the connector is dis-
connected, the previous mode will
be restored.
• AUX mode can be used only when
an external audio player (cam-
corder, car VCR, etc.) has been con-
nected.
• The AUX volume can be controlled
separately from other audio modes.
• Connecting a connector jack to the
AUX terminal without an external
device will convert the system to
AUX mode, but only output noise.
When an external device is not
being used, also remove the connec-
tor jack.
• When the external device power is
connected to the power jack, play-
ing the external device may output
noise. In such cases, disconnect the
power connection before use.
• Fully insert the AUX cable to the
AUX jack upon use.
i
Multimedia System
4-15
Multimedia System
Information
- Before using
the
Bluetooth
®
handsfree
What is Bluetooth
®
?
• Bluetooth
®
refers to a short-distance
wireless networking technology
which uses a 2.4GHz ~ 2.48GHz fre-
quency to connect various devices
within a certain distance.
• Supported within PCs, external
devices, Bluetooth
®
phones, PDAs,
various electronic devices, and auto-
motive environments, Bluetooth
®
allows data to be transmitted at high
speeds without having to use a con-
nector cable.
• Bluetooth
®
Handsfree refers to a
device which allows the user to con-
veniently make phone calls with
Bluetooth
®
mobile phones through
the audio system.
• Bluetooth
®
Handsfree may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones. To learn
more about mobile device compatibility,
visit www. hyundaiusa.com.
Information
- Precautions for
safe driving
• Bluetooth
®
Handsfree is a feature
that enables drivers to practice safe
driving. Connecting the head unit
with a Bluetooth
®
phone allows the
user to conveniently make and
receive calls and use contacts.
Before using Bluetooth
®
, carefully
read the contents of this user’s man-
ual.
• Excessive use or operations while
driving may lead to negligent driv-
ing practices and result in accidents.
Refrain from excessive operations
while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged
periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents. When driv-
ing, view the screen only for short
periods of time.
Information
- When connect-
ing a
Bluetooth
®
phone
• Before connecting the head unit
with the mobile phone, check to see
that the mobile phone supports
Bluetooth
®
features.
• Even if the phone supports
Bluetooth
®
, the phone will not be
found during device searches if the
phone has been set to hidden state
or the Bluetooth
®
power is turned
off. Disable the hidden state or turn
on the Bluetooth
®
power prior to
searching/connecting with the Head
unit.
• Bluetooth phone is automatically
connected when the ignition on.
• If you do not want automatic con-
nection with your Bluetooth
®
device,
turn off the Bluetooth
®
feature with-
in your mobile phone.
• The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on the
mobile phone.
(Continued)
iii
4
4-16
(Continued)
• Park the vehicle when connecting
the head unit with the mobile phone.
• Bluetooth
®
connection may become
intermittently disconnected in some
mobile phones. Follow these steps to
try again.
1.Within the mobile phone, turn the
Bluetooth
®
function off/on and try
again.
2.Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3.Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
again.
4.Reboot the Audio System and try
again.
5.Delete all paired devices, pair and
try again.
• Handsfree call quality and volume
may differ depending on the model
of your mobile phone.
Information
- Using the voice
recognition
• When using the voice recognition
feature, only commands listed with-
in the user's manual are supported.
• Be aware that during the operation
of the voice recognition system,
pressing any key other than the
key terminate voice recognition
mode.
• For superior voice recognition per-
formance, position the microphone
used for voice recognition above the
head of the driver’s seat and main-
tain a proper position when saying
commands.
• Within the following situations,
voice recognition may not function
properly due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the wind of the cooling /
heating device is strong
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
(Continued)
(Continued)
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
• Phone related voice commands can
be used only when a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device is con-
nected.
• When making calls by stating a
name, the corresponding contact
must be downloaded and stored
within the audio system.
• After downloading the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone book, it
takes some times to convert the
phone book data into voice informa-
tion. During this time, voice recogni-
tion may not properly operate.
• Pronounce the voice commands nat-
urally and clearly as if in a normal
conversation.
i
Multimedia System
4-17
Multimedia System
4
SSYYSSTTEEMM CCOONNTTRROOLLLLEERRSS AANNDD FFUUNNCCTTIIOONNSS
Audio Head Unit
Name Description
Ejects the disc.
• Each time the key is pressed, the mode is
changed in order of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟
XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3
❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop up screen will
be displayed when [Mode Pop up] is turned
.
When the pop up screen is displayed, use the
TUNE knob or keys ~ to
select the desired mode.
61
On
RADIO
Name Description
• Each time the key is pressed, the mode is
changed in order of CD, USB, iPod, AUX, My
Music, BT Audio modes.
❈ In Setup>Display, the media pop up screen
will be displayed when [Mode Pop up] is
turned .
When the pop up screen is displayed, use the
TUNE knob or keys ~ to
select the desired mode.
• Operates Phone Screen
• Radio Mode : Automatically searches for
broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod, My Music modes :
- Shortly press the key :Moves to next or previous
song(file)
- Press and hold the key : Rewinds or fast-for
wards the current song(file)
• Power Knob :Turns power On/Off by
pressing the knob
• Volume Knob : Sets volume by turning
the knob left/right
• Radio Mode : Saves frequencies (channels)
or receives saved frequencies (channels)
• CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode
- : Repeat
- : Random
2
1
51
On
POWER/
VOL knob
~
(Preset)
61
SEEK
TRACK
PHONE
MEDIA
4-18
Multimedia System
Name Description
• Each time the button is shortly pressed, it
sets the screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟ Screen
Off
❈ Audio operation is maintained and only the
screen will be turned Off. In the screen Off
state, press any key to turn the screen On
again.
DISP
Name Description
• Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key : Previews each broad
cast for 5 seconds each
- Press and hold the key :Previews the broadcasts
saved in Preset ~ for 5 seconds
each.
❈ Press the key again to continue
listening to the current frequency.
• Sirius
XM RADIO Mode
- Press and hold the key : Previews all
receivable broadcasts for 10 seconds each
• CD, USB, iPod mode
- Shortly press the key : Previews each song
(file) for 10 seconds each
❈ Press the key again to continue
listening to the current song (file).
• Shortly press the key : Moves to the Display,
Sound, Phone, System setting modes
• Displays menus for the current mode.
• Radio Mode
- Sirius
XM RADIO
: Category Search
• MP3 CD, USB mode : Folder Search
❈ May differ depending on the selected audio
• Radio mode : Changes frequency by turning
the knob left/right
• Sirius
XM RADIO
mode : Changes channel by
turning the knob left/right
• CD, USB, iPod mode: Searches songs
(files) by turning the knob left/right
❈ When the desired song is displayed, press
the knob to play the song.
SCAN
SCAN
61
TUNE
knob
CAT
FOLDER
MENU
SETUP
SCAN
4-19
Multimedia System
4
SSEETTUUPP
Display Settings
Press the key Select
[Display] through TUNE knob or
key
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes
/
selection mode
• During On state, press the
or key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
MEDIA
RADIO
OffOn
1
SETUP
4-20
Multimedia System
Sound Settings
Press the key Select
[Sound] through TUNE knob or
key
Tone
This menu allows you to set the
Bass, Middle, Treble.
Select [Tone] Select menu through
TUNE knob Turn TUNE knob
left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Return : While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Position
This menu allows you to set the
‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound
Fader and Balance.
Select [Position] Select menu
through TUNE knob Turn
TUNE knob left/right to set.
• Fader, Balance : Selects the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Return : While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [SDVC] Turn SDVC On/Off
by pressing the Tune knob.
Voice Recognition Volume
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set
volume of
TUNE
knob
2
SETUP
4-21
Multimedia System
4
System Settings
Press the key Select [System]
through tune knob or key
Memory Information
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is dis-
played on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.
Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal
and Expert modes.
Select [Prompt Feedback] Set
through
TUNE
knob
• Normal(On) : This mode is for
beginner users and provides
detailed instructions during voice
command operation.
• Expert(Off) :This mode is for expert
users and omits some information
during voice command operation.
(When using Expert mode, guid-
ance instructions can be heard
through the [Help] or [Menu] com-
mands.
Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language] Set through TUNE
knob
❈The system will reboot after the
language is changed.
❈Language support by region
-
4
SETUP
4-22
Multimedia System
RRAADDIIOO :: FFMM,, AAMM,, SSiirriiuussXXMM
SEEK
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key :Changes
the frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key :
Automatically searches for the next
frequency.
Preset SEEK
Press the ~ key
• Shortly pressing the key :Plays the
frequency saved in the correspon-
ding key.
• Pressing and holding the key :
Pressing and holding the desired
key from
~
will save the
currently playing broadcast to the
selected key and sound a BEEP.
SCAN
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key : The
broadcast frequency increases
and previews each broadcast for 5
seconds each. After scanning all
frequencies, returns and plays the
current broadcast frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key :
Previews the broadcasts saved in
Preset ~ for 5 seconds
each.
Selecting through manual
search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
Menu
Press the key Select [
Auto Store] through the TUNE knob
or key
A.Store
Saves broadcasts with superior
reception to ~ keys. If no
frequencies are received, then the
most recently received frequency will
be broadcast.
61
1
MENU
61
SCAN
61
61
SEEK
TRACK
4-23
Multimedia System
4
SSiirriiuussXXMM
®®
SSAATTEELLLLIITTEE RRAADDIIOO
IINNFFOORRMMAATTIIOONN
Satellite Radio channels:
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a
3-month trial subscription to the
Sirius Select package.You’ll get over
140 channels, including commercial-
free music, plus all your favorite
sports, exclusive talk, entertainment,
and a selection of premium program-
ming. For more information and a
complete list of SiriusXM channels,
visit siriusxm.com in the United
States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio reception fac-
tors:
To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof
provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a
requirement of a satellite radio sys-
tem. Like AM/FM, there are several
factors that can affect satellite radio
reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal
reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice
build-up and keep luggage and
other material as far away from the
antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall build-
ings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your
reception.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio serv-
ice:
SiriusXM is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broad-
casts music, sports, news and enter-
tainment programming to radio
receivers, which are available for
installation in motor vehicles or facto-
ry installed, as well as for the home,
portable and wireless devices, and
through an Internet connection on
personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a
factory installed SiriusXM Satellite
Radio system include:
• Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of the
vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SiriusXM music channels, and
other select channels over the
Internet using any computer con-
nected to the Internet (U.S. cus-
tomers only).
For information on extended sub-
scription terms, contact SiriusXM
at 1-888-539-7474.
4-24
Multimedia System
NOTE:
SiriusXM services require a sub-
scription sold separately, or as a
package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If
you decide to continue service
after your trial, the subscription
plan you choose will automatical-
ly renew thereafter and you will be
charged according to your chosen
payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To
cancel you must call SiriusXM at
1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for com-
plete terms at www.siriusxm.com.
SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
services are available only in the
48 contiguous USA, DC and PR
(with coverage limitations).
SiriusXM satellite service is also
available in Canada; see www.sir-
iusxm. ca. All fees and program-
ming subject to change. Sirius,
XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc.
4-25
Multimedia System
4
SSiirriiuussXXMM RRAADDIIOO
Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped
with a 3-month trial subscription to
SiriusXM so you have access to over
140 channels of music, information,
and entertainment programming.
Activation
In order to extend or reactivate your
Sirius Select subscription, you will
need to contact SiriusXM Customer
Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your
12-digit RID (Radio Identification
Number) / ESN (Electronic Serial
Number) ready. To retrieve the RID /
ESN, turn on the radio, press the
key, and tune to channel
zero.
Please note that the vehicle will need
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky
in order for the radio to receive the
activation signal.
SEEK
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key : select
previous or next channel.
• Pressing and holding the key :con-
tinuously move to previous or next
channel.
❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
SCAN
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key :Previews
each broadcast for 10 seconds
each
❈ Press the key again to con-
tinue listening to the current fre-
quency
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
SCAN
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
RADIO
4-26
Multimedia System
Category
Press the key Set through
the
TUNE
knob
• The display will indicate the cate-
gory menus, highlight the category
that the current channel belongs
to.
• In the Category List Mode, press
the key to navigate cate-
gory list.
• Press the tune knob to select the
lowest channel in the highlighted
category.
❈ If channel is selected by selecting
category, then the “CATEGORY”
icon is displayed at the top of the
screen.
Preset
Press the ~ key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds):Pressing and holding
the desired key from
~
will save the current broadcast to
the selected key and sound a
BEEP.
Information
- Trobleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the anten-
na or antenna cable is broken or
unplugged. Please consult with your
Hyundai dealership.
2. No Signal
If this message is displayed, it means
that the antenna is covered and that
the SiriusXM Satellite Radio signal is
not available. Ensure the antenna is
uncovered and has a clear view of the
sky.
Menu
Select category menu through the
TUNE knob Press the key
Select [ Info] through the TUNE
knob or key
Info (Information)
Displays the Artist/Song info of the
current song.
1
MENU
i
61
61
CAT
FOLDER
CAT
FOLDER
4-27
Multimedia System
4
BASIC METHOD OF USE : Audio CD / MP3 CD /
USB / iPod
®
/ My Music
Name Description
While song (file) is playing key
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode:
• Repeats the current song
MP3 CD, USB mode:
• Repeats songs within the current folder.
(Pressing the key twice).
❈Press the key again to turn off
repeat.
While song (file) is playing key
Audio CD, iPod
®
, My Music mode:
• Plays all songs randomly
MP3 CD, USB mode:
• Folder Random : Plays all files within the
current folder in random order.
• All Random : Plays all files in random
order(Pressing the key twice).
❈ Press the key again to turn off
repeat.
While song (file) is playing key
• Shortly pressing the key : plays the current
song from the beginning / plays the next
song.
• Pressing and holding the key : Rewinds the
song / fast forwards the song.
❈ If the key is pressed again with-
in 1 second, the previous song is played.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
2
RDM
2
RDM
1
RPT
1
RPT
Repeat
Random
Changing
Song/File
4-28
Multimedia System
Name Description
While song (file) is playing key
Scans all songs for 10 seconds starting
from the next song.
❈ Press the key again to turn off.
❈ The SCAN function is not supported
in iPod
®
mode.
While file is playing key
• Searches the previous / next folder
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing the
TUNE knob, the first file within the
selected folder will be played.
CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SCAN
Scan
Folder
Search :
MP3 CD,
USB Mode
4-29
Multimedia System
4
MENU : Audio CD
In Audio CD mode, press key.
Repeat
Set [ RPT] through the
TUNE
knob or key to repeat the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Random
Set [ RDM] through the
TUNE
knob or key to randomly play
songs within the current CD.
❈Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Set [ Info] through the
TUNE
knob or key to display informa-
tion of the current song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
MENU : MP3 CD / USB
In MP3 CD / USB mode, press
key.
Repeat
Set [ RPT] through the
TUNE
knob or key to repeat the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Folder Random
Set [ F.RDM] through the
TUNE
knob or key to randomly play
songs within the current folder.
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.
2
RDM
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
3
2
RDM
1
RPT
MENU
4-30
Multimedia System
Folder Repeat
Set [ F.RPT] through the
TUNE
knob or key to repeat songs
within the current folder.
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.
All Random
Set [ A.RDM] through the
TUNE
knob or key to randomly play all
songs within the CD/USB.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Set [ Info] through the
TUNE
knob or key to display informa-
tion of the current song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Copy
Set [ Copy] through the
TUNE
knob or key.
❈This is used to copy the current
song into My Music. You can play
the copied Music in My Music
mode.
❈ If another key is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up
asking you whether to cancel
copying is displayed.
❈ If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod
®
, AUX)
while copying is in progress, copy-
ing is canceled.
❈ Music will not be played while
copying is in progress.
MENU : iPod
®
In iPod mode, press key.
Repeat
Set [ RPT] through the
TUNE
knob or key to repeat the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Set [ RDM] through the TUNE
knob or key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
2
RDM
1
RPT
MENU
6
MENU
5
4
3
4-31
Multimedia System
4
Information
Set [ Info] through the
TUNE
knob or key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Search
Set [ Search] through the
TUNE
knob or key.
Displays iPod
®
category list.
❈ Searching iPod
®
category is
key pressed, move to par-
ent category.
MENU : My Music Mode
In My Music mode, press
key.
Repeat
Set [ RPT] through the TUNE knob
or key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Set [ RDM] through the TUNE knob
or key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing folder in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn random
off.
Information
Set [ Info] through the
TUNE
knob
or key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Delete
Set [ Delete] through the TUNE
knob or key.
• Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing song.
• Deletes file from list
➀Select the file you wish to delete by
using the TUNE knob.
➁Press the key and select
the delete menu to delete the
selected file.
MENU
4
MENU
3
2
RDM
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
4
MENU
3
4-32
Multimedia System
Delete All
Set [ Del.All] through the TUNE
knob or key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.
Delete Selection
Press the key Set [ Del.Sel]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Songs within My Music are selected
and deleted.
➀Select the songs you wish to
delete from the list.
➁After selecting, press the
key and select the delete menu.
AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connect-
ed to the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the key to
change to AUX mode.
❈ AUX mode cannot be started
unless there is an external device
connected to the AUX terminal.
MEDIA
MENU
6
MENU
5
4-33
Multimedia System
4
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology AUDIO
What is
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology?
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology allows
devices to be connected in a short dis-
tance, including hands-free devices,
stereo headsets, wireless remote con-
trollers, etc.For more information, visit
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
website
at www.Bluetooth.com
Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio features
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio may not be supported
depending on the compatibility of
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone.
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio can be used only when the
[Audio Streaming] of Phone is
turned .
Starting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio
• Press the key to change
the mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟
AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio will
start playing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.
Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio features
• Play / Stop
Press the TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
❈ The title / artist info may not be
supported in some mobile phone.
When it is not supported, no
title/no artist will be displayed.
• Previous / Next song
Press or to play
previous or next song.
❈ The previous song / next song /
play / pause functions may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
MEDIA
On
4-34
Multimedia System
Making a call using the Steering wheel remote
controller
The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illus-
tration.
Name
MODE
key
key
VOL-VOL+
Description
• Each time this key is pressed, the mode is changed in
order of FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3
➟ CD ➟ USB or iPod ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT
Audio
• If the media is not connected or a disc is not insert-
ed, corresponding modes will be disabled.
Raises or lowers speaker volume.
Places and transfers calls.
Ends calls or cancels functions.
• Check call history and making call
- Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds) the key on
the steering remote controller.
- The call history list will be displayed on the screen.
- Press the key again to connect a call to the
selected number.
• Redialing the most recently called number
- Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds) the key on
the steering remote controller.
- The most recently called number is redialed.
4-35
Multimedia System
4
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Pairing a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Device
What is Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of syn-
chronizing your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature.
PHONE (if equipped)
Before using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone
features
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guid-
ance screen will be displayed.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-
tion(IGN/ACC ON), the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected. Even if
you are outside, the first
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected once you
are in the vicinity of the vehicle.If you
do not want automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone connec-
tion, set the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology power to OFF.
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
WARNING
4-36
Multimedia System
Pairing key / key
on the Steering Remote
Controller
When No Devices have been
Paired
1.Press the key or the
key on the steering remote con-
troller.The following screen is dis-
played.
2. Select [OK] button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
1)Vehicle Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
2)Passkey :Passkey used to pair the
device
3.From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
4.After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Hear, check the passkey on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
During the pairing process, make sure
that all connection requests on the
phone are accepted for phonebook
download and to allow acceptance of
all future connection requests. Visit
http://www.hyundaiusa.com/Bluetooth
for additional information on pairing
your Bluetooth-enabled mobile
phone, and to view a phone compat-
ibility list.
If
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are
currently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the
steering wheel displays the fol-
lowing screen. Select [Pair] button
to pair a new device or select
[Connect] to connect a previously
paired device.
PHONE
NOTICE
PHONE
PHONE
4-37
Multimedia System
4
Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob
1.The following steps are the same
as those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.
Information
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology fea-
tures supported within the vehicle
are as follows. Some features may
not be supported depending on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls
(Continued)
(Continued)
- Operations during a call (Switch to
Private, Switch to call waiting, MIC
on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be paired to
the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be connected
at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired
while a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected.
• Only Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree and
Bluetooth audio related features are
supported.
• Bluetooth related operations are
possible only within devices that
support Handsfree or audio fea-
tures, such as a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone or a
Bluetooth audio device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If a connected Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device becomes discon-
nected due to being out of communi-
cation range, turning the device
OFF, or a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology communication error,
corresponding Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices are automatical-
ly searched and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable due
to communication errors between
the car Handsfree and the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device, reset the device by turning
off and back on again. Upon reset-
ting Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device, the system will be restored.
• After pairing is complete, a contacts
download request is sent once to the
mobile phone. Some mobile phones
may require confirmation upon
receiving a download request,
ensure your mobile phone accepts
the connection. Refer to your
phones user’s manual for additional
information regarding phone pair-
ing and connections.
i
SETUP
4-38
Multimedia System
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
1)Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2)Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
select [Connect].
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
SETUP
SETUP
4-39
Multimedia System
4
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then select [Change
Priority] button from the Menu. The
selected device will be changed to
the highest priority.
Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a pri-
ority phone.
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
select [Disconnect] button.
SETUP
NOTICE
4-40
Multimedia System
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and select
[Delete] button.
Information
• When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you must
pair the device again.
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
"Pairing through Phone Setup" sec-
tion within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
SETUP
i
SETUP
4-41
Multimedia System
4
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
"Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Connection" section with-
in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
1)Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
2)Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority
3)Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4)Return : Moves to the previous
screen
Information -
Before down
loading contacts
• Only contacts within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile phone
supports the download feature.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connected
phone can be downloaded.
i
SETUP
4-42
Multimedia System
Downloading Contacts
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
Information
• Upon downloading phone contacts,
the previous corresponding data is
deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being down-
loaded.
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use TUNE knob to adjust the out-
going volume level.
Information
While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the key.
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
is turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features will not be
supported within the audio system.
Information
To turn Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology back on, go to
[Phone] and select “Yes”.
SETUP
i
SETUP
SEEK
TRACK
i
SETUP
i
SETUP
4-43
Multimedia System
4
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device connected, press the
key to display the Phone menu screen.
1)Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used
contacts saved for easy access
2)Call History :Displays the call histo-
ry list screen
3)Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
4)Setup : Displays Phone related
settings.
Information
• If you select the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history data,
a prompt is displayed which asks to
download call history data.
• If you select the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data stored,
a prompt is displayed which asks to
download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
To accept the call, press key on
the steering wheel while the call is
incoming.
1)Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2)Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
i
PHONE
4-44
Multimedia System
Information
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
Favorites
Press the key Select
[Favorites]
1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded con-
tacts be saved as favorite.
Information
• To save Favorite, contacts should be
downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not
be automatically updated if the con-
tact has been updated in the phone.
To update Favorites, delete the
Favorite and create a new Favorite.
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
• Call history may not be saved in the
call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is not
possible when there is no call histo-
ry stored or a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone is not connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not saved.
PHONE
i
PHONE
i
4-45
Multimedia System
4
Contacts
Press the key Select
[Contacts]
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed.
NOTE:
Find a contact in an alphabetical
order, press the key.
Information
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have been
downloaded to the car cannot be edit-
ed or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are managed
separately for each paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device (max 5
devices x 1,000 contacts each).
Previously downloaded data is main-
tained even if the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device has been discon-
nected.
(However, the contacts and call histo-
ry saved to the phone will be deleted
if a paired phone is deleted.)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the icon
will be displayed within the status
bar.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• It is not possible to begin download-
ing a contact list when the contact
download feature has been turned off
within the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device. In addition, some
devices may require device authori-
zation upon attempting to download
contacts. If downloading does not
normally occur, check the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device settings
or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature may
not be supported in some mobile
phones. For more information of sup-
ported Bluetooth
®
devices and func-
tion support, refer to your phone’s
user manual.
i
MENU
PHONE
4-46
Multimedia System
VVOOIICCEE RREECCOOGGNNIITTIIOONN
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the
steering wheel. Say a command.
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say “Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)”
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF]
mode, then the system will only
say “(BEEP)”
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to [System]
[Prompt Feedback]
Information
For proper recognition, say the com-
mand after the voice instruction and
beep tone.
Contact List Best Practices
1) Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.).
Instead, always use full names
(including first and last names) for
all contacts (e.g., use “Jacob
Stevenson” instead of “Dad”).
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”).
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”).
4)Do not use special characters
(e.g., “@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk *”,
“ampersand &”).
5) If a name is not recognized from
the contact list, change it to a
more descriptive name (e.g., use
“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
Joe”).
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stat-
ed Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice com-
mand.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The command wait state is immedi-
ately ended and the beep tone will
sound.After the “beep”, say the voice
command.
i
SETUP
4-47
Multimedia System
4
EENNDDIINNGG VVOOIICCEE RREECCOOGGNNIITTIIOONN
While Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the key on the
steering remote controller
Information
• While using voice command, press-
ing any steering wheel control or a
different key will end voice com-
mand.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, say "cancel" or
"end" to end voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, press and hold the
key on the steering wheel to end
voice command.
Voice Recognition and Phone
Contact Tips:
The Hyundai Voice Recognition
System may have difficulty under-
standing some accents or uncom-
mon names.
When using Voice Recognition to
place a call, speak in a moderate
tone, with clear pronunciation To
maximize the use of Voice
Recognition, consider these guide-
lines when storing contacts:
• Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, etc.). Instead,
always use full names (including first
and last names) for these contacts
• Do not use special characters
(e.g., '@', '-', '*', '&', etc.)
• Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
"Lieutenant" instead of "Lt.") or
acronyms (i.e., use "County Finance
Department" instead of "C. F. D."; Be
sure to say the name exactly as it is
entered in the contacts list
i
4-48
Multimedia System
Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Ending voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
while guidance message is being stated
More Help
Contacts
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command after
the beep or say "help" for more
information.
Please say the contact name you want to call.
Please say a command
after the beep or say "help"
for more information.
Beep~
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
(BEEP)
Please say a...
4-49
Multimedia System
4
Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Mobile" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Office" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Home" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Other" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial
Number” execute corresponding functions.
Favorites Displays the Favorite screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Command Function
Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Displays the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Redial Connects the last dialed call number.
Tutorial Provides guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth
®
connections.
•
When listening to the radio, displays the
next radio screen. (FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
➟
XM1
➟
XM2
➟
XM3
➟
FM1)
Radio
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
(Call by Name)
on Mobile
in Office
at Home
on Other
4-50
Multimedia System
Command Function
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1701 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
XM (Satellite)
•
When currently listening to the SiriusXM
®
,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SiriusXM
®
screen.
XM (Satellite)
1~3
Displays the selected SiriusXM
®
screen.
XM Plays the selected SiriusXM
®
channel.
Channel
0~223
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod
®
Plays iPod music.
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
®
Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth
®
device.
Mute Mutes the sound
Command Function
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
4-51
Multimedia System
4
• Audio CD commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation
• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available
during USB and MP3 CD operation
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder
Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder
• FM/AM radio commands: Commands available dur-
ing FM, AM radio operation
• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the cur-
rent broadcast and plays for 10 seconds
each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.(This feature can be used when receiv-
ing RBDS broadcasts.)
Command Function
Channel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.
4-52
Multimedia System
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands available during
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technologyaudio streaming from mobile phone oper-
ation Command Operation
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
•iPod
®
Commands: Commands available during iPod
®
operation
• My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in
sequential order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
4-53
Multimedia System
4
Information
iPod
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc. iPod
®
mobile digital device
sold separately. The Bluetooth
®
word
mark and logos are registered trade-
marks owned by Bluetooth
®
SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by
Hyundai is under license. SiriusXM
services require a subscription sold
separately, or as a package, by Sirius
XM Radio Inc. If you decide to con-
tinue service after your trial, the sub-
scription plan you choose will auto-
matically renew thereafter and you
will be charged according to your cho-
sen payment method at thencurrent
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel
you must call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-
2349. See SiriusXM Customer
Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S.
satellite and data services are avail-
able only in the 48 contiguous USA,
DC and PR (with coverage limita-
tions). SiriusXM satellite service is
also available in Canada; see www.sir-
iusxm.ca. All fees and programming
subject to change.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Sirius, XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc. Android™ is a trademark
of Google, Inc. BlackBerry is a regis-
tered trademark of Research In
Motion Limited (RIM). All other
marks, channel names and logos are
the property of their respective own-
ers. All rights reserved.
i
4-54
Multimedia System
RREEAARR VVIIEEWW CCAAMMEERRAA
((iiff eeqquuiippppeedd))
• The system has been equipped
with a rear view camera for user
safety by allowing a wider rear
range of vision.
• The rear view camera will automat-
ically operate when the ignition key
is turned ON and the shift lever is
set to R (Reverse).
• The rear view camera will automat-
ically stop operating when shift
lever is set to different position.
BBLLUUEE LLIINNKK
®®
((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
Hyundai aims to offer differentiated
customer values through a
‘Connected Car Life’, which is to pro-
vide consumers with fast and reliable
IT technology.As consumers’lifestyles
become more and more mobile in
thanks to remarkable advances in
smart phones, tablet PCs and overall
wireless telecommunication, new
lifestyle patterns demand seamless
connection between one’s office,
home, outdoors and automobiles.
Automobile companies are now faced
with the task of shifting their paradigm
from vehicle-centered services to cus-
tomer value-centered services, with
the ultimate goal of securing global
leadership in the field of vehicle IT and
telematics.
Hyundai Motor plans to achieve this
by realizing a terminal platform flexi-
ble to changes in IT technology,
cooperating with global IT compa-
nies, creating an eco-system and
providing the latest contents & servic-
es based on an open environment.
The rear view camera has been
equipped with an optical lens to
provide a wider range of vision
and may appear different from
the actual distance. For safety,
directly check the rear and
left/right sides.
CAUTION
4-55
Multimedia System
4
Using the Room Mirror Key
Selecting the room mirror key will
allow you to make service required
inquiries, POI info searches, and
emergency rescues by connecting to
the Blue Link
®
Center.
Such features can be used only after
subscribing to the Blue Link
®
service.
➀ (Blue Link
®
Center)
Makes requests for Blue Link
®
serv-
ice related inquiries and consulta-
tions.
A call is connected to the Blue Link
®
service center employee.
Re-pressing the key will end the call.
This feature does not operate when
you are on a Bluetooth
®
phone call.
➁ (Blue Link
®
for POI)
• Blue Link
®
for Voice command
Starts Blue Link
®
voice command.
Voice receiving voice guidance,
shortly press the button to convert to
voice command mode. Press and
hold the button to end voice com-
mand.
• TBT VR Commands
1. Navigate to
“Navigate to”voice command is used
to request the download of route
data for a new destination, saved
destinations, daily routes and previ-
ous destinations.
2. Save Destination
“Save Destination” VR command is
used to assign a voice tag to the last
downloaded destination and store it
in a destination directory.
Information
The Turn by Turn (TBT) feature sup-
ports the store of ten (10) destinations
in the TBT destinations directory.
3. Route Preview
“Route Preview”VR command allows
the user to preview the route instruc-
tions (upcoming maneuver instruc-
tions) at any time during the route
guidance.
4. Destinations List
“Destinations List” VR command
allows the user to preview and delete
the stored destinations with their
associated voice tags in the Turn by
Turn destinations directory.
5.Voice Guidance
“Voice Guidance”VR command allows
the user to mute/unmute the Turn by
Turn(TBT) direction announcements.
i
4-56
Multimedia System
6. Suspend Route
"Suspend Route" VR command
allows the user to suspend and
pause Turn by Turn(TBT) route guid-
ance while in the guidance mode.
7. Resume Route
"Resume Route" VR command
allows the user to resume Turn by
Turn(TBT) route guidance.
➂ (Blue Link
®
for SOS)
In the case of an emergency,
requests for help to the Blue Link
®
center.
Call is connected to the Blue Link
®
emergency rescue center. Re-press-
ing the key will end the call.
If already on a Bluetooth
®
phone call,
the call will end to connect you to the
Blue Link
®
Emergency Rescue
Center.
Information
• You cannot talk simultaneously on
the Bluetooth
®
phone and Blue
Link
®
phone.
• While on a Bluetooth
®
call, pressing
the key or key will dis-
play a message indicating that you
are currently on a call.
• A message will be displayed if you
receive a Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology call while already
on a Blue Link
®
call. At this time,
press the key on the steering
wheel remote controller to accept the
call. The phone bell will not ring.
i
4-57
Multimedia System
4
Turn by Turn
The Turn by Turn feature can be used
through Blue Link
®
.
1.Direction Indicator Image
2.Remaining distance until next point
3.The Count bar is divided into a
total of 9 levels.
9 Level 0.5mi 8 Level 0.4mi
7 Level 0.3mi 6 Level 0.2mi
5 Level 0.1mi 4 Level 400ft
3 Level 300ft 2 Level 200ft
1 Level 100ft
4.Next Street name
5.Distance to destination
6.Expected Time Arrival
7. Current Street name
❈ For information on specific
Blue Link
®
operations, please refer
to a separate manual.
4-58
Multimedia System
Information
iPod
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc. iPod
®
mobile digital device
sold separately. The Bluetooth
®
word
mark and logos are registered trade-
marks owned by Bluetooth
®
SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by
Hyundai is under license. SiriusXM
services require a subscription sold
separately, or as a package, by Sirius
XM Radio Inc. If you decide to con-
tinue service after your trial, the sub-
scription plan you choose will auto-
matically renew thereafter and you
will be charged according to your cho-
sen payment method at thencurrent
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel
you must call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-
2349. See SiriusXM Customer
Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S.
satellite and data services are avail-
able only in the 48 contiguous USA,
DC and PR (with coverage limita-
tions). SiriusXM satellite service is
also available in Canada; see www.sir-
iusxm.ca. All fees and programming
subject to change.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Sirius, XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc. Android™ is a trademark
of Google, Inc. BlackBerry is a regis-
tered trademark of Research In
Motion Limited (RIM). All other
marks, channel names and logos are
the property of their respective own-
ers. All rights reserved.
i
4-59
Multimedia System
FCC
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15
of the FCC Rules.These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a resi-
dential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions,may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or tel-
evision reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to cor-
rect the interference by one ormore of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Caution: Any changes or modifications to this device not explicitly approved by manufacturer could void your authori-
ty to operate this equipment.
DDEECCLLAARRAATTIIOONN OOFF CCOONNFFOORRMMIITTYY
4
4-60
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions :
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operatedwith minmum 20cm between the and your body.This transmitter must
not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter unless authorized to do so by the
FCC.
Multimedia System
Driving your vehicle
5
Before Driving ........................................................5-4
Before Entering the Vehicle...........................................5-4
Before Starting ..................................................................5-4
Ignition Switch........................................................5-6
Key Ignition Switch ...........................................................5-6
Engine Start/Stop Button................................................5-9
Transmission .........................................................5-14
Automatic Transmission.................................................5-14
Ecoshift Dual Clutch Transmission..............................5-18
Paddle Shifter ..................................................................5-24
Shift-Lock System..........................................................5-25
Shift-Lock Release.........................................................5-25
Parking...............................................................................5-26
Good Driving Practices ..................................................5-26
Braking System ....................................................5-28
Power Brakes...................................................................5-28
Disc Brakes Wear Indicator..........................................5-29
Foot Parking Brake.........................................................5-29
Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)...................................5-31
AUTO HOLD ......................................................................5-37
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-40
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-43
Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)...................................5-46
Good Braking Practices.................................................5-47
Drive Mode Integrated Control System............5-48
Cruise Control.......................................................5-50
Cruise Control Operation...............................................5-50
Smart Cruise Control system..............................5-54
To Adjust the Sensitivity of Smart Cruise Control....5-55
To Convert to Cruise Control Mode............................5-55
Smart Cruise Control Speed .........................................5-56
Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance...5-60
Radar to Detect Distance to the Vehicle Ahead .....5-63
Limitations of the System.............................................5-64
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)........5-69
LDWS Operation..............................................................5-70
Warning Light and Message.........................................5-71
Blind Spot Detection System (BSD) ..................5-73
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist).............................................5-74
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ..................................5-77
Automatic emergency braking (AEB) ...............5-81
System setting and activation......................................5-81
AEB warning message and system control..............5-83
Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle
in front (front radar) .....................................................5-86
System malfunction........................................................5-87
Limitation of the system ...............................................5-89
5
Special Driving Conditions..................................5-93
Hazardous Driving Conditions......................................5-93
Rocking the Vehicle........................................................5-93
Smooth Cornering ...........................................................5-94
Driving at Night................................................................5-94
Driving in the Rain ..........................................................5-95
Driving in Flooded Areas...............................................5-95
Winter Driving ......................................................5-96
Snow or Icy Conditions..................................................5-96
Winter Precautions.........................................................5-98
Vehicle Load Limit..............................................5-100
Tire Loading Information Label.................................5-101
Trailer Towing.....................................................5-105
5-3
Driving your vehicle
5
Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause unconsciousness and death.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.
Do not inhale engine exhaust.
If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately. Exposure to CO can cause
unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If
you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the
vehicle, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Run the engine only
long enough to start the engine and to move the vehicle out of the garage.
Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle , be sure to do so only in an
open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
Keep the air intakes clear.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air intakes located in front of the windshield
clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other obstructions.
If you must drive with the trunk open:
Close all windows.
Open instrument panel air vents.
Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face", and the fan control set to high.
WARNING
5-4
Driving your vehicle
Before Entering the Vehicle
• Be sure all windows, outside mir-
ror(s), and outside lights are clean
and unobstructed.
• Remove frost, snow, or ice.
• Visually check the tires for uneven
wear and damage.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Before Starting
• Make sure the hood, the trunk, and
the doors are securely closed and
locked.
• Adjust the position of the seat and
steering wheel.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Verify all the lights work.
• Fasten your seatbelt.Check that all
passengers have fastened their
seatbelts.
• Check the gauges and indicators in
the instrument panel and the mes-
sages on the instrument display
when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• Check that any items you are car-
rying are stored properly or fas-
tened down securely.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide vari-
ety of automobile components
including components found in
the interior furnishings in a
vehicle, contain or emit harmful
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects and reproductive
harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and cer-
tain products of components
contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive
harm.
WARNING
BBEEFFOORREE DDRRIIVVIINNGG
5-5
Driving your vehicle
5
NEVER drink or take drugs and
drive.
Drinking or taking drugs and
driving is dangerous and may
result in an accident and SERI-
OUS INJURY or DEATH.
Drunk driving is the number
one contributor to the highway
death toll each year. Even a
small amount of alcohol will
affect your reflexes, percep-
tions and judgment. Just one
drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions
and emergencies and your reac-
tion time gets worse with each
additional drink.
Driving while under the influ-
ence of drugs is as dangerous
or more dangerous than driving
under the influence of alcohol.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
You are much more likely to have
a serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive. If you are
drinking or taking drugs, don’t
drive. Do not ride with a driver
who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated
driver or call a taxi.
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, take the fol-
lowing precautions:
• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.
All passengers must be prop-
erly belted whenever the vehi-
cle is moving. For more infor-
mation, refer to "Seat Belts" in
chapter 2.
• Always drive defensively.
Assume other drivers or
pedestrians may be careless
and make mistakes.
• Stay focused on the task of
driving. Driver distraction can
cause accidents.
• Leave plenty of space between
you and the vehicle in front of
you.
WARNING
5-6
Key Ignition Switch
IIGGNNIITTIIOONN SSWWIITTCCHH
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in P (Park) position, apply the
parking brake, and turn ignition
switch to the LOCK position.
Unexpected vehicle movement
may occur if these precautions
are not followed.
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, take the fol-
lowing precautions:
• NEVER allow children or any
person who is unfamiliar with
the vehicle to touch the igni-
tion switch or related parts.
Unexpected and sudden vehi-
cle movement can occur.
• NEVER reach through the
steering wheel for the ignition
switch, or any other control,
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area may cause a
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident.
WARNING
NEVER turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK or ACC position
while the vehicle is in motion
except in an emergency. This
will result in the engine turning
off and loss of power assist for
the steering and brake systems.
This may lead to loss of direc-
tional control and braking func-
tion, which could cause an acci-
dent.
(Continued)
WARNING
OLF054001N
5-7
Driving your vehicle
5
Key ignition switch positions
Switch
Position
Action Notice
LOCK
To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, turn the
key towards the LOCK position.
The ignition key can be removed in the LOCK position.
The steering wheel locks to protect the vehicle from theft.
(if equipped)
ACC
Electrical accessories are usable. The steering wheel unlocks.
If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition switch to
the ACC position, turn the key while turning the steering
wheel right and left to release tension.
ON
This is the normal key position when the engine has
started.
All features and accessories are usable.
The warning lights can be checked when you turn the
ignition switch from ACC to ON.
Do not leave the ignition switch in the ON position when
the engine is not running to prevent the battery from dis-
charging.
START
To start the engine, turn the ignition switch to the START
position.The switch returns to the ON position when you
let go of the key.
The engine will crank until you release the key.
5-8
Starting the engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the
START position. Hold the key
(maximum of 10 seconds) until the
engine starts and release it.
Information
• Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains station-
ary. Start driving at moderate
engine speeds. (Steep accelerating
and decelerating should be avoided.)
• Whether the engine is cold or warm,
always start the vehicle with your
foot on the brake pedal. Do not
depress the accelerator while start-
ing the vehicle. Do not race the
engine while warming it up.
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
• Do not hold the ignition key in
the START position for more
than 10 seconds. Wait 5 to 10
seconds before trying again.
• If traffic and road conditions
permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
while the vehicle is still moving
and turn the ignition switch to
the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle
to start the engine.
NOTICE
i
Driving your vehicle
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes, such as high
heels, ski boots, sandals, flip-
flops, etc., may interfere with
your ability to use the brake and
accelerator pedals.
WARNING
5-9
Driving your vehicle
5
Engine Start/Stop Button
Whenever the front door is opened,
the Engine Start/Stop button will illu-
minate and will go off 30 seconds
after the door is closed.
• NEVER press the Engine
Start/Stop button while the
vehicle is in motion except in
an emergency. This will result
in the engine turning off and
loss of power assist for the
steering and brake systems.
(Continued)
WARNING
To turn the engine off in an
emergency:
Press and hold the Engine
Start/Stop button for more than
two seconds OR Rapidly press
and release the Engine
Start/Stop button three times
(within three seconds).
If the vehicle is still moving, you
can restart the engine without
depressing the brake pedal by
pressing the Engine Start/Stop
button with the shift lever in the
N (Neutral) position.
(Continued)
This may lead to loss of direc-
tional control and braking
function, which could cause
an accident.
• Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, set the parking
brake, press the Engine
Start/Stop button to the OFF
position, and take the Smart
Key with you. Unexpected
vehicle movement may occur
if these precautions are not
followed.
• NEVER reach through the
steering wheel for the Engine
Start/Stop button or any other
control while the vehicle is in
motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in this area may
cause a loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
WARNING
To reduce risk of serious injury
or death, NEVER allow children
or any person who is unfamiliar
with the vehicle to touch the
Engine Start/Stop button or
related parts. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement can
occur.
WARNING
OLF054007
5-10
Driving your vehicle
Engine Stop/Start button positions
Button Position Action Notice
OFF
To turn off the engine, press the Engine
Start/Stop button with shift lever in P (Park).
When you press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton without the shift lever in P (Park), the
Engine Start/Stop button does not turn to the
OFF position, but turns to the ACC position.
ACC
Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the
button is in the OFF position without depress-
ing the brake pedal.
Electrical accessories are usable.
If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the
ACC position for more than one hour, the bat-
tery power will turn off automatically to prevent
the battery from discharging.
5-11
Driving your vehicle
5
Button Position Action Notice
ON
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it is
in the ACC position without depressing the
brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked before
the engine is started.
Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
the ON position when the engine is not run-
ning to prevent the battery from discharging.
START
To start the engine, depress the brake pedal
and press the Engine Start/Stop button with
the shift lever in the P (Park) or in the N
(Neutral) position.
For your safety, start the engine with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position.
If you press the Engine Start/Stop button with-
out depressing the brake pedal, the engine
does not start and the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton changes as follows:
OFF
→→
ACC
→→
ON
→→
OFF
However, the engine may start if you depress
the brake pedal within 0.5 second after press-
ing the Engine Start/Stop button when it is in
the OFF position.
5-12
Driving your vehicle
• Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes, such as
high heels, ski boots, sandals,
flip-flops, etc., may interfere
with your ability to use the
brake and accelerator pedals.
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle can move and lead
to an accident.
• Wait until the engine rpm is
normal. The vehicle may sud-
denly move if the brake pedal
is released when the rpm is
high.
WARNING
Starting the engine
Information
• The engine will start by pressing the
Engine Start/Stop button, only when
the smart key is in the vehicle.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-
cle, if it is far away from the driver,
the engine may not start.
• When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ACC or ON position, if any
door is open, the system checks for
the smart key. If the smart key is not
in the vehicle, the warning, "Key
not in vehicle" will come on and if
all doors are closed, the chime will
also sound for about 5 seconds. The
indicator will turn off while the
vehicle is moving. Keep the smart
key in the vehicle when using the
ACC position or if the vehicle
engine is ON.
1. Always carry the smart key with
you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton.
Information
• Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains station-
ary. Start driving at moderate
engine speeds. (Steep accelerating
and decelerating should be avoided.)
• Always start the vehicle with your
foot on the brake pedal. Do not
depress the accelerator while start-
ing the vehicle. Do not race the
engine while warming it up.
i
i
5-13
Driving your vehicle
5
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
• If the engine stalls while you are
in motion, do not attempt to
move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position.
If traffic and road conditions
permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
while the vehicle is still moving
and press the Engine Start/Stop
button in an attempt to restart
the engine.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle
to start the engine.
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you can’t start the engine normal-
ly. Replace the fuse with a new
one. If you are not able to replace
the fuse, you can start the engine
by pressing and holding the
Engine Start/Stop button for 10 sec-
onds with the Engine Start/Stop
button in the ACC position.
Do not press the Engine Start/Stop
button for more than 10 seconds
except when the stop lamp fuse is
blown.
For your safety always depress
the brake pedal before starting the
engine.
Information
If the smart key battery is weak or the
smart key does not work correctly,
you can start the engine by pressing
the Engine Start/Stop button with the
smart key in the direction of the pic-
ture above.
i
NOTICENOTICE
OLF054009
5-14
Driving your vehicle
Automatic Transmission
Automatic transmission opera-
tion
The automatic transmission has six
forward speeds and one reverse
speed.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically in the D (Drive) posi-
tion.
TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN
Move shift lever.
Press the shift button, then move shift lever.
Depress the brake pedal, press ths shift button, and then move shift lever.
OLF054012
5-15
Driving your vehicle
5
The indicator in the instrument clus-
ter displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park).
To shift from P (Park), you must
depress firmly on the brake pedal
and make sure your foot is off the
accelerator pedal.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot shift the lever out of P
(Park), see "Shift-Lock Release" on
page 5-25.
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
before turning the engine off.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death:
• ALWAYS check the surround-
ing areas near your vehicle for
people, especially children,
before shifting a vehicle into
D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, then set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF posi-
tion. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur
if these precautions are not
followed.
• When using Manual shift
mode, do not use engine brak-
ing (shifting from a high gear
to lower gear) rapidly on slip-
pery roads. The vehicle may
slip causing an accident.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion may
cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
• After the vehicle has stopped,
always make sure the shift
lever is in P (Park), apply the
parking brake, and turn the
engine off.
• Do not use the P (Park) posi-
tion in place of the parking
brake.
WARNING
5-16
Driving your vehicle
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged.
Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart
a stalled engine, or if it is necessary
to stop with the engine ON. Shift into
P (Park) if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason.
Always depress the brake pedal
when you are shifting from N
(Neutral) to another gear.
D (Drive)
This is the normal driving position.
The transmission will automatically
shift through a six-gear sequence,
providing the best fuel economy and
power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or driving uphill depress
the accelerator pedal further until
you feel the transmission downshift
to a lower gear.
The DRIVE MODE switch, located
on the shift lever console, allows the
driver to switch from NORMAL mode
to SPORT or ECO mode.
For more information, refer to
"Drive Mode Integrated Control
System" later in this chapter.
Always come to a complete
stop before shifting into or out
of R (Reverse); you may dam-
age the transmission if you shift
into R (Reverse) while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
CAUTION
Do not shift into gear unless
your foot is firmly on the brake
pedal. Shifting into gear when
the engine is running at high
speed can cause the vehicle to
move very rapidly. You could
lose control of the vehicle and
hit people or objects.
WARNING
5-17
Driving your vehicle
5
Manual shift mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, Manual shift mode is
selected by pushing the shift lever
from the D (Drive) position into the
manual gate. To return to D (Drive)
range operation, push the shift lever
back into the main gate.
In Manual shift mode, moving the
shift lever backwards and forwards
will allow you to select the desired
range of gears for the current driving
conditions.
+ (Up) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
- (Down) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
Information
• Only the six forward gears can be
selected. To reverse or park the
vehicle, move the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) or P (Park) position as
required.
• Downshifts are made automatically
when the vehicle slows down. When
the vehicle stops, 1st gear is auto-
matically selected.
• When the engine rpm approaches
the red zone the transmission will
upshift automatically.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the driver presses the lever to +
(Up) or - (Down) position, the trans-
mission may not make the requested
gear change if the next gear is out-
side of the allowable engine rpm
range. The driver must execute
upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine rpms below the red zone.
i
OLF054013
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
5-18
Ecoshift dual clutch transmis-
sion
Ecoshift dual clutch transmis-
sion operation
The Ecoshift dual clutch transmis-
sion has seven forward speeds and
one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically in the D (Drive) posi-
tion.
Driving your vehicle
Move shift lever.
Press the shift button, then move shift lever.
Depress the brake pedal, press the shift button, and then move shift lever.
OLF054012
5-19
Driving your vehicle
• The Ecoshift dual clutch transmis-
sion gives the driving feel of a man-
ual transmission, yet provides the
ease of a fully automatic transmis-
sion. Unlike a traditional automatic
transmission, the gear shifting can
be felt (and heard) on the Ecoshift
dual clutch transmission.
- Think of it as an automatically
shifting manual transmission.
- Shift into Drive range and get fully
automatic shifting, similar to a
conventional automatic transmis-
sion.
• Ecoshift dual clutch transmission
adopts dry-type dual clutch, which
is different from torque converter of
automatic transmission, and shows
better acceleration performance
during driving. But, initial launch
might be little bit slower than
Automatic Transmission.
• The dry-type clutch transfers
torque and provides a direct drive
feeling which may feel different
from a conventional automatic
transmission with a torque convert-
er. This may be more noticeable
when starting from a stop or low
vehicle speed.
• When rapidly accelerating at lower
vehicle speeds, the engine could
rev up to higher engine RPM
depending on the driving condition.
• For smooth uphill launches, press
down the accelerator pedal
smoothly depending on the current
conditions.
• If you release your foot from the
accelerator pedal at low vehicle
speed, you may feel strong engine
brake, which is similar to manual
transmission.
• When driving downhill, you may
use Manual shift mode and press
the paddle shifters to downshift to
a lower gear in order to control
your speed without using the brake
pedal excessively.
• When you turn the engine on and
off, you may hear clicking sounds
as the system goes through a self
test.This is a normal sound for the
Ecoshift dual clutch transmission.
5
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death:
• ALWAYS check the surround-
ing areas near your vehicle for
people, especially children,
before shifting a vehicle into
D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, then set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF posi-
tion. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur
if these precautions are not
followed.
• Do not use engine braking
(shifting from a high gear to
lower gear) rapidly on slip-
pery roads. The vehicle may
slip causing an accident.
WARNING
5-20
• To hold the vehicle on a hill use
the foot brake or the parking
brake. If the vehicle is held by
applying the accelerator pedal
on a hill the clutch and trans-
mission will be overheated
resulting in damage.
At this time, a warning message
will appear on the LCD display
and you may feel a vibration.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the clutch becomes overheat-
ed by excessive use of the
clutch to hold on a hill, you may
notice a shudder feeling and a
blinking display on the instru-
ment cluster. When this occurs,
the clutch is disabled until the
clutch cools to normal tempera-
tures. If this occurs, pull over to
a safe location, shift into P
(Park) and apply the foot brake
for a few minutes.
• If the LCD warning is active, the
foot brake must be applied.
• Ignoring the warnings can lead
to damage to the transmission.
• If the display continues to blink,
for your safety, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Under certain conditions such
as repeated launch on steep
grades, the clutch in the trans-
mission could overheat. When
the clutch is overheated, the
safe protection mode engages. If
the safe protection mode
engages, the gear position indi-
cator on the cluster blinks with a
chime sound. At this time, a
warning message will appear on
the LCD display and driving may
not be smooth.
(Continued)
NOTICE
Driving your vehicle
OLF054455N
OLF054456N/OLF054457N
5-21
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
If you ignore this warning, the
driving condition may become
worse.To return the normal driv-
ing condition, stop the vehicle
and apply the foot brake for a
few minutes before driving off.
• Gear shifts may be more notice-
able than a conventional auto-
matic transmission. This is a
normal characteristic of this
type of Ecoshift dual clutch
transmission.
• During the first 1000 miles, you
may feel that the vehicle may not
be smooth when accelerating at
low speed. During this break-in
period, the shift quality and per-
formance of your new vehicle is
continuously optimized.
• Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive) or
R (Reverse).
• Do not put the shift lever in N
(Neutral) while driving.
The indicator in the instrument clus-
ter displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park).
To shift from P (Park), you must
depress firmly on the brake pedal
and make sure your foot is off the
accelerator pedal.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot shift the lever out of P
(Park), see "Shift-Lock Release" on
page 5-25.
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
before turning the engine off.
5
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion may
cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
• After the vehicle has stopped,
always make sure the shift
lever is in P (Park), apply the
parking brake, and turn the
engine off.
• Do not use the P (Park) posi-
tion in place of the parking
brake.
WARNING
5-22
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged.
Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart
a stalled engine, or if it is necessary
to stop with the engine ON. Shift into
P (Park) if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason.
Always depress the brake pedal
when you are shifting from N
(Neutral) to another gear.
D (Drive)
This is the normal driving position.
The transmission will automatically
shift through a seven-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or driving uphill depress
the accelerator pedal further until
you feel the transmission downshift
to a lower gear.
The DRIVE MODE switch, located
on the shift lever console, allows the
driver to switch from NORMAL mode
to SPORT or ECO mode.
For more information, refer to
"Drive Mode Integrated Control
System" later in this chapter.
Driving your vehicle
Always come to a complete
stop before shifting into or out
of R (Reverse); you may dam-
age the transmission if you shift
into R (Reverse) while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
CAUTION
Do not shift into gear unless
your foot is firmly on the brake
pedal. Shifting into gear when
the engine is running at high
speed can cause the vehicle to
move very rapidly. You could
lose control of the vehicle and
hit people or objects.
WARNING
5-23
Driving your vehicle
Manual shift mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, Manual shift mode is
selected by pushing the shift lever
from the D (Drive) position into the
manual gate. To return to D (Drive)
range operation, push the shift lever
back into the main gate.
In Manual shift mode, moving the
shift lever backwards and forwards
will allow you to select the desired
range of gears for the current driving
conditions.
+ (Up) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
- (Down) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
Information
• Only the seven forward gears can be
selected. To reverse or park the
vehicle, move the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) or P (Park) position as
required.
• Downshifts are made automatically
when the vehicle slows down. When
the vehicle stops, 1st gear is auto-
matically selected.
• When the engine rpm approaches
the red zone the transmission will
upshift automatically.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the driver presses the lever to
+ (Up) or - (Down) position, the
transmission may not make the
requested gear change if the next
gear is outside of the allowable
engine rpm range. The driver must
execute upshifts in accordance with
road conditions, taking care to keep
the engine rpms below the red zone.
i
5
OLF054013
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
5-24
Driving your vehicle
Paddle Shifter (if equipped)
The paddle shifter is available when
the shift lever is in the D (Drive) posi-
tion or Manual shift mode.
With the shift lever in the D posi-
tion
The paddle shifter will operate when
the vehicle speed is more than
6 mph (10 km/h).
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear and the
system changes from automatic
mode to manual mode.
The system changes from manual
mode to automatic mode:
• When the vehicle speed is lower
than 6 mph (10 km/h)
• If you depress the accelerator
pedal for more than 5 seconds
• If you move the shift lever from
Manual shift mode to D (Drive)
With the shift lever in the manual
shift mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear.
Information
If the [+] and [-] paddle shifters are
pulled at the same time, gear change
may not occur.
i
OLF054014N
5-25
Driving your vehicle
5
Shift-Lock System
For your safety, the automatic trans-
mission has a shift-lock system
which prevents shifting the transmis-
sion from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transmission from P
(Park) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or place the igni-
tion switch in the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
Shift-Lock Release
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position into R (Reverse)
position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, and then do the following:
1. Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Carefully remove the cap (1) cov-
ering the shift-lock release access
hole.
4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screw-
driver) into the access hole and
press down on the tool.
5. Move the shift lever.
6. Remove the tool from the shift-
lock override access hole then
install the cap.
If you need to use the shift-lock
release, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
immediately.
OLF054015N
5-26
Driving your vehicle
Parking
Always come to a complete stop and
continue to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, apply the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position. Take the Key
with you when exiting the vehicle.
Good Driving Practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Do not move the shift lever to N
(Neutral) when driving. Doing so
may result in an accident because
of a loss of engine braking and the
transmission could be damaged.
• Do not drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
consistent pedal pressure can
result in the brakes overheating,
brake wear and possibly even
brake failure.
• Depressing both accelerator and
brake pedals at the same time can
trigger logic for engine power
reduction to assure vehicle decel-
eration. Vehicle acceleration will
resume after the brake pedal is
released.
• When driving in Manual shift mode,
slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged if the
engine rpms are outside of the
allowable range.
• Always apply the parking brake
when leaving the vehicle. Do not
depend on placing the transmis-
sion in P (Park) to keep the vehicle
from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears.On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
may cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator.
When you stay in the vehicle
with the engine running, be
careful not to depress the accel-
erator pedal for a long period of
time. The engine or exhaust
system may overheat and start
a fire.
The exhaust gas and the
exhaust system are very hot.
Keep away from the exhaust
system components.
Do not stop or park over flam-
mable materials, such as dry
grass, paper or leaves. They
may ignite and cause a fire.
WARNING
5-27
Driving your vehicle
5
Information -
Kickdown
Mechanism
Use the kickdown mechanism for
maximum acceleration. Depress the
accelerator pedal beyond the pressure
point. The automatic transmission will
shift to a lower gear depending on the
engine speed.
i
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.
In a collision, an unbelted
occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belt-
ed occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cor-
nering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• HYUNDAI recommends you
follow all posted speed limits.
WARNING
5-28
Driving your vehicle
Power Brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power
assist for the brakes will not work.
You can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than typical. The stopping dis-
tance, however, will be longer than
with power brakes.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering con-
trol on slippery surfaces.
BBRRAAKKIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM
Take the following precautions:
• Do not drive with your foot
resting on the brake pedal.
This will create abnormal high
brake temperatures, exces-
sive brake lining and pad
wear, and increased stopping
distances.
• When descending a long or
steep hill, shift to a lower gear
and avoid continuous applica-
tion of the brakes. Applying
the brakes continuously will
cause the brakes to overheat
and could result in a tempo-
rary loss of braking perform-
ance.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Wet brakes may impair the
vehicle's ability to safely slow
down; the vehicle may also
pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Applying
the brakes lightly will indicate
whether they have been
affected in this way. Always
test your brakes in this fash-
ion after driving through deep
water.To dry the brakes, light-
ly tap the brake pedal to heat
up the brakes while maintain-
ing a safe forward speed until
brake performance returns to
normal. Avoid driving at high
speeds until the brakes func-
tion correctly.
WARNING
5-29
Driving your vehicle
5
Disc Brakes Wear Indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high pitched warning sound from
your front or rear brakes. You may
hear this sound come and go or it
may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Please remember some driving con-
ditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-
mal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
Information
Always replace brake pads as com-
plete front or rear axle sets.
Foot Parking Brake
(if equipped)
Always set the parking brake before
leaving the vehicle, to apply:
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Depress the parking brake pedal
down as far as possible.
i
NOTICE
ODH053142
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, do not oper-
ate the parking brake while the
vehicle is moving except in an
emergency situation. It could
damage the brake system and
lead to an accident.
WARNING
5-30
Driving your vehicle
To release:
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Depress the parking brake pedal
down and it will release automatical-
ly.
If the parking brake does not release
or does not release all the way, have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not apply the accelerator
pedal while the parking brake is
engaged. If you depress the
accelerator pedal with the park-
ing brake engaged, warning will
sound. Damage to the parking
brake may occur.
• Driving with the parking brake
on can overheat the braking sys-
tem and cause premature wear
or damage to brake parts. Make
sure the parking brake is
released and the Brake Warning
Light is off before driving.
NOTICE
ODH053143
• Whenever leaving the vehicle
or parking, always come to a
complete stop and continue to
depress the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever into P (Park)
position, then apply the park-
ing brake, and place the igni-
tion switch in the LOCK/OFF
position.
Vehicles with the parking
brake not fully engaged are at
risk for moving inadvertently
and causing injury to yourself
or others.
• NEVER allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
• Only release the parking
brake when you are seated
inside the vehicle with your
foot firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING
5-31
Driving your vehicle
5
Check the Parking
Brake Warning Light
by placing the ignition
switch to the ON posi-
tion (do not start the
engine).
This light will be illuminated when the
parking brake is applied with the igni-
tion switch in the START or ON posi-
tion.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is released and the Brake
Warning Light is OFF.
If the Parking Brake Warning Light
remains on after the parking brake is
released while engine is running,
there may be a malfunction in the
brake system. Immediate attention is
necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately.If that is not pos-
sible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only con-
tinue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location.
Electronic Parking Brake
(EPB) (if equipped)
Applying the parking brake
To apply the EPB (Electronic
Parking Brake):
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Pull the EPB switch upwards.
Make sure the Parking Brake
Warning Light comes on.
Also, the EPB is applied automatical-
ly if the [AUTO HOLD] switch is on
when the engine is turned off.
However, if you press the EPB switch
within one second after the engine is
turned off, the EPB will not be
applied.
OLF054016N
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, do not oper-
ate the EPB while the vehicle is
moving except in an emergency
situation. It could damage the
brake system and lead to an
accident.
WARNING
5-32
Driving your vehicle
Releasing the parking brake
To release the EPB (Electronic
Parking Brake), press the EPB
switch in the following condition:
• Place the Engine Start/Stop button
in the ON position.
• Depress the brake pedal.
Make sure the Parking Brake
Warning Light goes off.
To release EPB (Electronic Parking
Brake) automatically:
• Shift lever in P (Park)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of P
(Park) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Shift lever in N (Neutral)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of N
(Neutral) to R (Reverse) or D
(Drive).
• Satisfy the following conditions
1. Start the engine.
2. Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
3. Close the driver’s door, engine
hood and trunk.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal
while the shift lever is in D
(Drive) or Manual shift mode.
The Parking Brake Warning Light
should be turned off when the EPB is
released.
If the Parking Brake Warning Light is
still on even though the EPB has
been released, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
• For your safety, you can engage the
EPB even though the Engine Stop/
Start button is in the OFF position,
but you cannot release it.
• For your safety, depress the brake
pedal and release the parking brake
manually with the EPB switch when
you drive downhill or when backing
up the vehicle.
i
OLF054017N
5-33
Driving your vehicle
5
• If the Parking Brake Warning
Light is still on even though the
EPB has been released, have
your vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not drive your vehicle with
the EPB applied. It may cause
excessive brake pad and brake
rotor wear.
When the EPB (Electronic Parking
Brake) does not release:
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer by loading the vehicle on a
flatbed tow truck and have the sys-
tem checked.
EPB (Electronic Parking Brake)
may be automatically applied
when:
• The EPB is overheated
• Requested by other systems
• The engine is turned off with the
EPB applied
Information
If the driver turns the engine off while
Auto Hold is operating, EPB will be
automatically applied. However, if
you press the EPB switch within one
second after the engine is turned off,
the EPB will not be applied.
i
NOTICE
OLF044411N
5-34
Driving your vehicle
Warning messages
• Do not apply the accelerator
pedal while the parking brake is
engaged. If you depress the
accelerator pedal with the EPB
engaged, a warning will sound
and a message will appear.
Damage to the parking brake
may occur.
• Driving with the parking brake
on can overheat the braking sys-
tem and cause premature wear
or damage to brake parts. Make
sure the EPB is released and the
Parking Brake Warning Light is
off before driving.
Information
• A clicking/whine sound may be
heard while operating or releasing
the EPB. These conditions are nor-
mal and indicate that the EPB is
functioning properly.
• When leaving your keys with a
parking lot attendant or valet, make
sure to inform him/her how to oper-
ate the EPB.
i
NOTICE
• Whenever leaving the vehicle
or parking, always come to a
complete stop and continue
to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the P
(Park) position, press the EPB
switch, and press the Engine
Start/Stop button to the OFF
position. Take the Smart Key
with you when exiting the
vehicle.
Vehicles not fully engaged in
P (Park) with the parking
brake set are at risk for mov-
ing inadvertently and causing
injury to yourself or others.
• NEVER allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the EPB switch. If the
EPB is released unintentional-
ly, serious injury may occur.
• Only release the EPB when
you are seated inside the
vehicle with your foot firmly
on the brake pedal.
WARNING
5-35
Driving your vehicle
5
AUTO HOLD deactivating.
Press brake pedal
When the conversion from Auto Hold
to EPB is not working properly a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
Parking brake automatically locked
If the EPB is applied while Auto Hold
is activated, a warning will sound and
a message will appear.
EPB malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
If the EPB Malfunction Indicator
remains on, comes on while driving,
or does not come on when the
Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON
position, this indicates the EPB may
have malfunctioned. Have your vehi-
cle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
The EPB Malfunction Indicator may
illuminate when the ESC indicator
comes on to indicate that the ESC is
not working properly, but it does not
indicate a malfunction of the EPB.
OLF046408N OLF044411N
OLF054022
5-36
Driving your vehicle
• If the EPB Malfunction Indicator
is still on, have the system
checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the Parking Brake Warning
Light does not illuminate or
blinks even though the EPB
switch was pulled up, the EPB
may not be applied.
• If the Parking Brake Warning
Light blinks when the EPB
Malfunction Indicator is on,
press the EPB switch, then pull
it up. Once more, press the
switch back to its original posi-
tion and pull it back up. If the
EPB Malfunction Indicator does
not go off, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Emergency braking
If there is a problem with the brake
pedal while driving, emergency brak-
ing is possible by pulling up and
holding the EPB switch. Braking is
possible only while you are holding
the EPB switch. However, braking
distance will be longer than normal.
During emergency braking the
Parking Brake Warning Light will
illuminate to indicate that the sys-
tem is operating.
If there is a noise or burning smell
after using the emergency brake,
have your vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
NOTICE
NOTICENOTICE
Do not operate the parking
brake while the vehicle is mov-
ing except in an emergency sit-
uation. It could damage the
brake system and lead to a
severe accident.
WARNING
5-37
Driving your vehicle
5
AUTO HOLD (if equipped)
This feature keeps the brake applied
when the shift lever is in D (Drive), N
(Neutral) or Manual shift mode with
the feature enabled and when the
brake pedal has been depressed to
stop the vehicle.
To apply:
1. Press the [AUTO HOLD] switch.
The AUTO HOLD indicator will illu-
minate white and the system will
be in the standby position.
2. When you stop the vehicle com-
pletely by depressing the brake
pedal, the Auto Hold maintains the
brake pressure to hold the vehicle
stationary. The indicator changes
from white to green.
3. The vehicle will remain stationary
even if you release the brake
pedal.
4. If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be
released.
OLF054018N
WW
WW
hh
hh
ii
ii
tt
tt
ee
ee
OLF054019
WW
WW
hh
hh
ii
ii
tt
tt
ee
ee
GG
GG
rr
rr
ee
ee
ee
ee
nn
nn
5-38
Driving your vehicle
To release:
Press the accelerator pedal with the
shift lever in D (Drive) or Manual shift
mode, the Auto Hold will be released
automatically and the vehicle will
start to move.The indicator changes
from green to white.
To cancel:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the [AUTO HOLD] switch.
The AUTO HOLD indicator will
turn off.
Information
• The Auto Hold does not operate
when:
- The driver's seat belt is unbuckled
and the driver's door is opened
- The engine hood is opened
- The shift lever is in P (Park)
- The EPB is applied
• For your safety, the Auto Hold auto-
matically switches to EPB when:
- The driver's seat belt is unbuckled
and the driver's door is opened
- The engine hood is opened with the
shift lever in D (Drive), N (Neutral)
- The vehicle is in a standstill for
more than 10 minutes
- The vehicle is standing on a steep
slope
- The vehicle moved several times
(Continued)
i
To prevent, unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement,
ALWAYS press your foot on the
brake pedal to cancel the Auto
Hold before you:
- Drive downhill.
- Park the vehicle.
WARNING
OLF054020N
LL
LL
ii
ii
gg
gg
hh
hh
tt
tt
oo
oo
ff
ff
ff
ff
5-39
Driving your vehicle
5
(Continued)
In these cases, the Parking Brake
Warning Light comes on, the AUTO
HOLD indicator changes from
green to white, and warning sounds
and a message will appear to inform
you that EPB has been automatical-
ly engaged. Before driving again,
depress the brake pedal, check the
surrounding area near your vehicle
and release the parking brake man-
ually with the EPB switch.
• If AUTO HOLD indicator changes
to yellow, the Auto Hold is not work
properly. Take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked.
• If there is a malfunction with the
driver's door or hood detection sys-
tem, the Auto Hold may not work
properly. Take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked.
Warning messages
Parking brake automatically locked
When the EPB is applied from Auto
Hold, a warning will sound and a
message will appear.
AUTO HOLD deactivating.
Press brake pedal
When the conversion from Auto Hold
to EPB is not working properly a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
Information
Depress the brake pedal when the
above message appears for the Auto
Hold and EPB may not activate.
i
OLF044411N
OLF044408N
5-40
Driving your vehicle
Press brake pedal to deactivate
AUTO HOLD
If you did not apply the brake pedal
when you release the Auto Hold by
pressing the [AUTO HOLD] switch, a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
AUTO HOLD conditions not met.
Close door, hood and fasten seatbelt
When you press the [AUTO HOLD]
switch, if the driver's door and engine
hood are not closed or the driver's
seat belt is not fastened, a warning
will sound and a message will
appear on the LCD display. In that
time, press the [AUTO HOLD] button
after closing the driver's door, engine
hood and fastening the seat belt.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
OLF044407N OLF046409N
An Anti-Lock Braking System
(ABS) or an Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system will not
prevent accidents due to
improper or dangerous driving
maneuvers. Even though vehi-
cle control is improved during
emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance
between you and objects ahead
of you. Vehicle speeds should
always be reduced during
extreme road conditions. The
braking distance for cars
equipped with ABS or ESC may
be longer than for those without
these systems in the following
road conditions.
(Continued)
WARNING
5-41
Driving your vehicle
5
ABS is an electronic braking system
that helps prevent a braking skid.
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time.
Using ABS
To obtain the maximum benefit from
your ABS in an emergency situation,
do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Depress your
brake pedal as hard as possible.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear sounds from
the brakes, or feel a corresponding
sensation in the brake pedal. This is
normal and it means your ABS is
active.
ABS does not reduce the time or dis-
tance it takes to stop the vehicle.
Always maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front of you.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from sudden changes in
direction, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather con-
ditions.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of stabili-
ty. Always steer moderately when
braking hard. Severe or sharp steer-
ing wheel movement can still cause
your vehicle to veer into oncoming
traffic or off the road.
On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake sys-
tem may result in a longer stopping
distance than for vehicles equipped
with a conventional brake system.
The ABS warning light ( ) will stay
on for several seconds after the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
During that time, the ABS will go
through self-diagnosis and the light
will go off if everything is normal. If
the light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS. Contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible
(Continued)
• Drive your vehicle at reduced
speeds during the following
conditions:
• Rough, gravel or snow-cov-
ered roads.
• On roads where the road sur-
face is pitted or has different
surface height.
• Tire chains are installed on
your vehicle.
The safety features of an ABS
or ESC equipped vehicle should
not be tested by high speed
driving or cornering.This could
endanger the safety of yourself
or others.
5-42
Driving your vehicle
Information
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the ABS
warning light ( ) may turn on at the
same time. This happens because of
the low battery voltage. It does not
mean your ABS is malfunctioning.
Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
i
If the ABS warning light ( ) is
on and stays on, you may have
a problem with the ABS. Your
power brakes will work normal-
ly. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death, contact your
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
When you drive on a road hav-
ing poor traction, such as an icy
road, and apply your brakes
continuously, the ABS will be
active continuously and the
ABS warning light ( ) may
illuminate. Pull your car over to
a safe place and turn the engine
off.
Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a
problem with your ABS system.
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION
WARNING
5-43
Driving your vehicle
5
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system helps to stabilize the
vehicle during cornering maneuvers.
ESC checks where you are steering
and where the vehicle is actually
going. ESC applies braking pressure
to any one of the vehicle's brakes
and intervenes in the engine man-
agement system to assist the driver
with keeping the vehicle on the
intended path. It is not a substitute
for safe driving practices. Always
adjust your speed and driving to the
road conditions.
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the ESC and the ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate for approxi-
mately three seconds and goes off,
then the ESC is turned on.
When operating
When the ESC is in opera-
tion, the ESC indicator light
blinks:
• When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear sounds from
the brakes, or feel a corresponding
sensation in the brake pedal. This
is normal and it means your ESC is
active.
• When the ESC activates, the
engine may not respond to the
accelerator as it does under rou-
tine conditions.
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when
cornering. The ESC system will
not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
maneuvers, and hydroplaning
on wet surfaces can result in
severe accidents.
WARNING
OLF054448
5-44
Driving your vehicle
• If the Cruise Control was in use
when the ESC activates, the
Cruise Control automatically disen-
gages. The Cruise Control can be
reengaged when the road condi-
tions allow. See "Cruise Control
System" later in this chapter. (if
equipped)
• When moving out of the mud or
driving on a slippery road, the
engine rpm (revolutions per
minute) may not increase even if
you press the accelerator pedal
deeply. This is to maintain the sta-
bility and traction of the vehicle and
does not indicate a problem.
ESC OFF condition
To cancel ESC operation :
• State 1
Press the ESC OFF button shortly
(ESC OFF indicator light and mes-
sage illuminates). At this state, the
engine control function does not
operate. In other words, the traction
control function does not operate but
only the brake control function oper-
ates.
• State 2
Press the ESC OFF button for more
than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indicator
light and message illuminates with
an ESC OFF warning chime. At this
state, the engine control function and
brake control function does not oper-
ate. In other words, the vehicle sta-
bility control function does not oper-
ate any more.
If the ignition switch is placed to the
LOCK/OFF position when ESC is off,
ESC remains off.Upon restarting the
engine, the ESC will automatically
turn on again.
■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B
OLF054439N/OLF054101N OLF054438N/OLF054100N
5-45
Driving your vehicle
5
Indicator lights
When the ignition switch is placed to
the ON position, the ESC indicator
light illuminates, then goes off if the
ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever the ESC is operating.
If ESC indicator light stays on, your
vehicle may have a malfunction with
the ESC system. When this warning
light illuminates have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off.
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the ESC system
to malfunction. When replacing
tires, make sure they are the same
size as your original tires for this
vehicle.
ESC OFF usage
When Driving
The ESC OFF mode should only be
used briefly to help free the vehicle if
stuck in snow or mud by temporarily
stopping operation of the ESC to
maintain wheel torque.
To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving on
a flat road surface.
NOTICE
When the ESC is blinking, this
indicates the ESC is active:
Drive slowly and NEVER
attempt to accelerate. NEVER
turn the ESC off while the ESC
indicator light is blinking or you
may lose control of the vehicle
resulting in an accident.
WARNING
■ ESC indicator light (blinks)
■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)
5-46
Driving your vehicle
To prevent damage to the trans-
mission:
• Do not allow wheel(s) of one
axle to spin excessively while
the ESC, ABS, and brake warn-
ing lights are displayed. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Reduce
engine power and do not spin
the wheel(s) excessively while
these lights are displayed.
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure the ESC is
turned off (ESC OFF light illumi-
nated).
Information
Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or standard brake system opera-
tion.
Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)
The Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)
prevents the vehicle from rolling
backwards when starting a vehicle
from a stop on a hill. The system
operates the brakes automatically for
approximately 2 seconds and releas-
es the brake when the accelerator
pedal is depressed or after 2 sec-
onds.
• The HAC does not operate when
the shift lever is in P (Park) or N
(Neutral)
• The HAC activates even though
the ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is off but does not acti-
vate when the ESC has malfunc-
tioned.
NOTICE
i
NOTICE
Always be ready to depress the
accelerator pedal when starting
off on a incline. The HAC acti-
vates only for approximately 2
seconds.
WARNING
5-47
Driving your vehicle
5
Good Braking Practices
Wet brakes can be dangerous! The
brakes may get wet if the vehicle is
driven through standing water or if it
is washed.Your vehicle will not stop
as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet
brakes may cause the vehicle to pull
to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns
to normal, taking care to keep the
vehicle under control at all times. If
the braking action does not return to
normal, stop as soon as it is safe to
do so and call an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
DO NOT drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
constant pedal pressure can result in
the brakes overheating, brake wear,
and possibly even brake failure.
If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe location.
Keep your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when the vehicle is stopped to
prevent the vehicle from rolling for-
ward.
Whenever leaving the vehicle or
parking, always come to a com-
plete stop and continue to
depress the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, then apply the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the OFF position.
Vehicles with the parking brake
not fully engaged are at risk for
moving inadvertently and caus-
ing injury to yourself or others.
WARNING
5-48
Driving your vehicle
DDRRIIVVEE MMOODDEE IINNTTEEGGRRAATTEEDD CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM
The drive mode may be selected
according to the driver's preference
or road condition.
The system resets to be in the NOR-
MAL mode (except for ECO mode),
when the engine is restarted.
Information
If there is a problem with the instru-
ment cluster system, the drive mode
will be in NORMAL mode and may
not change to ECO mode or SPORT
mode.
The mode changes whenever the
DRIVE MODE switch is pressed.
When NORMAL mode is selected, it
is not displayed on the instrument
cluster.
The selected mode is displayed on
the instrument cluster.
ECO mode (Active ECO)
Active ECO helps improve
fuel efficiency by control-
ling certain engine and
transmission system
operating parameters.
Fuel efficiency depends on the dri-
ver’s driving habit and road condi-
tion.
• When the DRIVE MODE switch is
pressed and the ECO mode is
selected, the ECO indicator
(green) will illuminate to show that
the Active ECO is operating.
• When the Active ECO is activated,
and the engine is turned off and on
it will maintain ECO mode.
i
OLF054021N
NORMAL ECO SPORT
ECO
5-49
Driving your vehicle
5
When Active ECO is activated:
• The acceleration response may be
slightly reduced as the accelerator
pedal is depressed moderately.
• The air conditioner performance
may be limited.
• The shift pattern of the automatic
transmission may change.
The above situations are normal
conditions when the Active ECO sys-
tem is activated to improve fuel effi-
ciency.
Limitation of Active ECO opera-
tion:
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though
there is no change in the ECO indi-
cator.
• When the coolant temperature is
low:
The system will be limited until
engine performance becomes nor-
mal.
• When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because
engine torque is restricted.
• When using the automatic trans-
mission Manual shift mode:
The system will be limited accord-
ing to the shift location.
SPORT mode
SPORT mode focuses on
dynamic driving by auto-
matically controlling the
steering wheel, engine
and transmission system.
• When the DRIVE MODE switch is
pressed and the SPORT mode is
selected, the SPORT indicator
(yellow) will illuminate.
• When the SPORT mode is activat-
ed, and the engine is turned off
and on it will change to NORMAL
mode. To turn on the SPORT
mode, press the DRIVE MODE
switch again.
• If the system is activated:
- After accelerating and releasing
the accelerator pedal, the gear
and engine speed RPM may not
drop as soon as in NORMAL
mode.
- Up-shifting is delayed.
Information
In SPORT mode, the fuel efficiency
may decrease.
i
SPORT
5-50
Driving your vehicle
Cruise Control Operation
1. CRUISE indicator
2. SET indicator
The Cruise Control system allows
you to drive at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h) without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
To set Cruise Control speed
1. Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator will illu-
minate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OLF054040
Take the following precautions:
• If the Cruise Control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminat-
ed) the Cruise Control can be
activated unintentionally.
Keep the Cruise Control sys-
tem off (CRUISE indicator
light OFF) when the Cruise
Control is not in use, to avoid
inadvertently setting a speed.
• Use the Cruise Control system
only when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
• Do not use the Cruise Control
when it may not be safe to
keep the vehicle at a constant
speed:
- Driving in heavy or varying
speed traffic.
- On slippery (rainy, icy or
snow covered) roads.
- Hilly or winding roads.
- Very windy areas.
WARNING
OLF054041
5-51
Driving your vehicle
5
3. Push the toggle switch (1) down
(SET-), and release it. The SET
indicator light will illuminate.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
Information
The vehicle may slow down or speed
up slightly while going uphill or down-
hill.
To increase Cruise Control
speed
• Push the toggle switch (1) up
(RES+) and hold it, while monitor-
ing the SET speed on the instru-
ment cluster. Release the toggle
switch when the desired speed is
shown and the vehicle will acceler-
ate to that speed.
• Push the toggle switch (1) up
(RES+) and release it immediately.
The cruising speed will increase
1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the
toggle switch is operated in this
manner.
• Depress the accelerator pedal.
When the vehicle attains the
desired speed, push the toggle
switch (1) down (SET-).
i
OLF054042/Q
OLF054043/Q
5-52
Driving your vehicle
To decrease Cruise Control
speed
• Push the toggle switch (1) down
(SET-) and hold it.Your vehicle will
gradually slow down. Release the
toggle switch at the speed you
want to maintain.
• Push the toggle switch (1) down
(SET-) and release it immediately.
The cruising speed will decrease
1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the
toggle switch is operated in this
manner.
• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired
speed, push the toggle switch (1)
down (SET-).
To temporarily accelerate with
the Cruise Control ON
Depress the accelerator pedal.When
you take your foot off the accelerator,
the vehicle will return to the previ-
ously set speed.
If you push the toggle switch down
(SET-) at the increased speed, the
Cruise Control will maintain the
increased speed.
Cruise Control will be canceled
when:
• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Pressing the CANCEL switch
located on the steering wheel.
• Pushing the CRUISE button. Both
the CRUISE indicator and the SET
indicator will turn OFF.
• Moving the shift toggle switch into
N (Neutral).
OLF054042/Q OLF054044
5-53
Driving your vehicle
5
• Decreasing the vehicle speed
lower than the memory speed by
5 mph (10 km/h).
• Decreasing the vehicle speed to
less than approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h).
• The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is operating.
• Downshifting to the 2nd gear in
Manual shift mode.
Information
Each of the above actions will cancel
Cruise Control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter will go off), but only pressing the
CRUISE button will turn the system
off. If you wish to resume Cruise
Control operation, push the toggle
switch up (RES+) located on your
steering wheel. You will return to your
previously preset speed, unless the
system was turned off using the
CRUISE button.
To resume preset Cruising
speed
Push the toggle switch (1) up
(RES+). If the vehicle speed is over
20 mph (30 km/h), the vehicle will
resume the preset speed.
To turn Cruise Control off
• Push the CRUISE button (the
CRUISE indicator light will go off).
• Turn the engine OFF.
i
OLF054043/Q
OLF054041
5-54
Driving your vehicle
➀ Cruise Indicator
➁ Set Speed
➂ Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance
The Smart Cruise Control System
allows you to program the vehicle to
maintain constant speed and dis-
tance detecting the vehicle ahead
without depressing the accelerator/
brake pedal.
SSMMAARRTT CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OLF054430N
For your safety, please read the
owner's manual before using the
Smart Cruise Control system.
WARNING
The Smart Cruise Control
System is not a substitute for
safe driving practices, but a
convenience function only. It is
the responsibility of the driver
to always check the speed and
distance to the vehicle ahead.
WARNING
Take the following precautions:
• If the Smart Cruise Control is
left on, (CRUISE indicator
light in the instrument cluster
is illuminated) the Smart
Cruise Control can be activat-
ed unintentionally. Keep the
Smart Cruise Control System
off (CRUISE indicator light
OFF) when the Smart Cruise
Control is not in use, to avoid
inadvertently setting a speed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Use the Smart Cruise Control
System when traveling on
open highways in good
weather.
• Do not use the Smart Cruise
Control when it may not be
safe to keep the vehicle at a
constant speed:
- Driving in heavy or varying
speed traffic.
- On slippery (rainy, icy or
snow covered) roads.
- Construction areas
- Parking areas
- Hilly or winding roads.
- Very windy areas.
WARNING
5-55
Driving your vehicle
5
To Adjust the Sensitivity of
Smart Cruise Control
The sensitivity of vehicle speed
when following the front vehicle to
maintain the set distance can be
adjusted. Go to the User Settings
Mode (Driving Assist) and select
SCC (Smart Cruise Control). You
may select one of the three stages
you prefer.
• Slow:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is slower than normal speed.
• Normal:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is normal
• Fast:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is faster than normal speed.
To Convert to Cruise Control
Mode
The driver may choose to only use
the Cruise Control Mode (speed con-
trol function) by doing as follows:
OLF056441N
OLF054205N
OLF054431N
5-56
Driving your vehicle
1.Turn the Smart Cruise Control
System on (the cruise indicator
light will be on but the system will
not be activated).
2.Push and hold the Vehicle-to-
Vehicle Distance button for more
than 2 seconds.
3.Choose between "Smart Cruise
Control (SCC) Mode" and "Cruise
Control (CC) Mode".
When the system is canceled using
the CRUISE button or the CRUISE
button is used after the engine is
turned on, the SCC Mode will turn
on.
Smart Cruise Control Speed
To set Smart Cruise Control
speed
1. Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator will illu-
minate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
The Smart Cruise Control speed
can be set as follows:
• 20 mph (30 km/h)~110 mph (180
km/h): when there is no vehicle
in front
• 0 mph (0 km/h)~110 mph (180
km/h): when there is a vehicle in
front
3. Push the toggle switch down
(SET-), and release it at the
desired speed. The Set Speed
and Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance
on the LCD display will illuminate.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
The desired speed will automati-
cally be maintained.
If there is a vehicle in front of you, the
speed may decrease to maintain the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
OLF054042
OLF054041
When using the Cruise Control
Mode, you must manually
adjust the distance to other
vehicles by depressing the
accelerator or brake pedal. The
system does not automatically
adjust the distance to vehicles
in front of you.
WARNING
5-57
Driving your vehicle
To increase Smart Cruise
Control set speed
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the toggle switch up (RES+),
and hold it.Your vehicle set speed
will increase by 5 mph (10 km/h).
Release the toggle switch at the
speed you want.
• Push the toggle switch up (RES+),
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will increase by 1.0
mph (1.0 km/h) each time you
move the toggle switch up in this
manner.
• You can set the speed to 110 mph
(180 km/h).
To decrease the Smart Cruise
Control set speed
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the toggle switch down (SET-),
and hold it.Your vehicle set speed
will decrease by 5 mph (10 km/h).
Release the toggle switch at the
speed you want.
• Push the toggle switch down (SET-),
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will decrease by 1.0
mph (1.0 km/h) each time you move
the toggle switch down in this man-
ner.
• You can set the speed to 20 mph
(30 km/h).
To temporarily accelerate with
the Smart Cruise Control on
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the Smart Cruise Control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with Smart Cruise Control operation
or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
If you push the toggle switch down
(SET-) at increased speed, the cruis-
ing speed will be set again.
5
Be careful when accelerating
temporarily, because the speed
is not controlled automatically
at this time even if there is a
vehicle in front of you.
CAUTION
OLF054042OLF054043
5-58
Driving your vehicle
Smart Cruise Control will be
temporarily canceled when:
Canceled manually
• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Pressing the CANCEL button
located on the steering wheel.
The Smart Cruise Control turns off
temporarily when the indicator on the
LCD display turns off.
The CRUISE indicator is illuminated
continuously.
Canceled automatically
• The driver's door is opened.
• The shift toggle switch is shifted to N
(Neutral), R (Reverse) or P (Park).
• The EPB (Electronic Parking
Brake) is applied.
• The vehicle speed is over 120 mph
(190 km/h)
• The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), TCS (Traction Control
System) or ABS is operating.
• The ESC is turned off.
• The AEB (Automatic Emergency
Btaking) system is operating.
• The radar or the cover is dirty or
blocked with foreign matter.
• The engine speed is over 7000 rpm.
• The SCC system has malfunctioned.
• When the vehicle is stopped for
more than 5 minutes.
• The driver starts driving by pushing
the toggle switch up (RES +) or
down (SET -) or depressing the
accelerator pedal, approximately 3
seconds after the vehicle is
stopped by the Smart Cruise
Control System with no other vehi-
cle ahead.
• The driver starts driving by pushing
the toggle switch up (RES +) or
down (SET -) or depressing the
accelerator pedal, after stopping
the vehicle with a vehicle stopped
far away in front.
• The accelerator pedal is continu-
ously depressed for more than 5
minutes.
Each of these actions will cancel
the Smart Cruise Control opera-
tion. (The Set Speed and Vehicle-
to-Vehicle Distance on the LCD
display will go off.)
In a condition the Smart Cruise
Control is canceled automatically,
the Smart Cruise Control will not
resume even though the RES+ or
SET- toggle switch is pushed. Also,
the EPB will be applied when the
vehicle is stopped.
If the Smart Cruise Control is can-
celed by other than the reasons
mentioned, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
NOTICE
OLF054044
5-59
Driving your vehicle
5
If the system is canceled, the warn-
ing chime will sound and a message
will appear for a few seconds.
You must adjust the vehicle speed by
depressing the accelerator or brake
pedal according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition.
Always check the road conditions.
Do not rely on the warning chime.
To resume Smart Cruise Control
set speed
If any method other than the
CRUISE toggle switch was used to
cancel cruising speed and the sys-
tem is still activated, the cruising
speed will automatically resume
when you push the toggle switch up
(RES+) or down (SET-).
If you push the toggle switch up
(RES+), the speed will resume to the
recently set speed. However, if vehi-
cle speed has dropped below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h), it
will resume when there is a vehicle in
front of your vehicle.
OLF054201N
OLF054043
Always check the road condi-
tions when you push the toggle
switch up (RES+) to resume
speed.
CAUTION
5-60
Driving your vehicle
To turn Cruise Control off
Push the CRUISE button (the
CRUISE indicator light will go off).
Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-
to-Vehicle Distance
To set Vehicle-to-Vehicle
Distance
When the Smart Cruise Control
System is ON, you can set and main-
tain the distance from the vehicle
ahead of you without pressing the
accelerator or brake pedal.
Each time the button is pressed, the
vehicle to vehicle distance changes
as follows:
For example, if you drive at 56 mph
(90 km/h), the distance maintain as
follows:
Distance 4 - approximately 172 feet
(52.5 m)
Distance 3 - approximately 130 feet
(40 m)
Distance 2 - approximately 106 feet
(32.5 m)
Distance 1 - approximately 82 feet
(25 m)
Information
Distance 4 is always set when the sys-
tem is used for the first time after
starting the engine.
i
OLF054041
OLF054045
Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2
Distance 1
5-61
Driving your vehicle
5
When the lane ahead is clear:
The vehicle speed will maintain the
set speed.
When there is a vehicle ahead
of you in your lane:
• Your vehicle speed will slow down
or speed up to maintain the select-
ed distance.
• If the vehicle ahead speeds up,
your vehicle will travel at a steady
cruising speed after accelerating to
the set speed.
OLF056474N
Distance 4
Distance 3
Distance 2
Distance 1
OLF054213N/OLF054214N/
OLF054215N/OLF054216N
When using the Smart Cruise
Control System:
• The warning chime sounds
and the Vehicle-to Vehicle
Distance indicator blinks if
the vehicle is unable to main-
tain the selected distance
from the vehicle ahead.
(Continued)
WARNING
OLF054031N
5-62
Driving your vehicle
In traffic situation
In traffic, your vehicle will stop if the
vehicle ahead of you stops. Also, if
the vehicle ahead of you starts mov-
ing, your vehicle will start as well.
However, if the vehicle stops for
more than 3 seconds, you must
depress the accelerator pedal or
push up the toggle switch (RES+ or
SET-) to start driving.
(Continued)
• If the warning chime sounds,
depress the accelerator or
brake pedal to actively adjust
the vehicle speed,and the dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead.
• Even if the warning chime is
not activated, always pay
attention to the driving condi-
tions to prevent dangerous
situations from occurring.
OLF054203N
OLF054204N
If the vehicle ahead (vehicle
speed: less than 20 mph
(30km/h)) disappears to the next
lane, the warning chime will
sound and a message will
appear. Adjust your vehicle
speed for vehicles or objects
that can suddenly appear in
front of you by depressing the
brake pedal.
Always pay attention to the road
condition ahead.
CAUTION
5-63
Driving your vehicle
5
Radar to Detect Distance to
the Vehicle Ahead
The Smart Cruise Control uses a
radar to detect distance to the vehi-
cle ahead.
Radar check message
If the radar or cover is dirty or
obscured with foreign matter such as
snow, this message will appear. In
this case, the system may not func-
tion temporarily, but it does not indi-
cate a malfunction of the Smart
Cruise Control System. Clean the
radar or cover by using a soft cloth.
SCC (Smart Cruise Control)
malfunction message
The message will appear when the
vehicle to vehicle distance control
system is not functioning normally.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-
tem checked.
OLF054032N OLF054440N
OLF054444N/OLF056475N
■ Type A ■ Type B
5-64
Driving your vehicle
Limitations of the System
The Smart Cruise Control System
may have limits to its ability to detect
distance to the vehicle ahead due to
road and traffic conditions.
On curves
• The Smart Cruise Control System
may not detect a moving vehicle in
your lane, and then your vehicle
could accelerate to the set speed.
Also, the vehicle speed will
decrease when the vehicle ahead
is recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on curves and apply the brakes or
accelerator pedal if necessary.
• Do not install accessories
around the radar and do not
replace the bumper by your-
self. It may interfere with the
radar performance.
• Always keep the radar and
bumper clean.
• To prevent radar cover dam-
age from occurring, wash the
car with a soft cloth.
• Do not paint the radar cover.
• Do not damage the radar or
radar area by a strong impact.
If the radar moves slightly off
position, the Smart Cruise
Control System will not oper-
ate correctly. If this occurs,
have your vehicle checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er.
• Use only a genuine HYUNDAI
radar cover for your vehicle.
CAUTION
ODH053092
5-65
Driving your vehicle
5
Your vehicle speed can be reduced
due to a vehicle in the adjacent lane.
Apply the accelerator pedal and
select the appropriate set speed.
Check to be sure that the road con-
ditions permit safe operation of the
Smart Cruise Control.
On inclines
• During uphill or downhill driving,
the Smart Cruise Control System
may not detect a moving vehicle in
your lane, and cause your vehicle
to accelerate to the set speed.
Also, the vehicle speed will rapidly
decrease when the vehicle ahead
is recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on inclines and apply the brake or
accelerator pedal if necessary.
Lane changing
• A vehicle which moves into your
lane from an adjacent lane cannot
be recognized by the radar until it
is in the radar's detection range.
• The radar may not detect immedi-
ately when a vehicle cuts in sud-
denly. Always pay attention to the
traffic, road and driving conditions.
• If a slower vehicle moves into your
lane, your speed may decrease to
maintain the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
• If a faster vehicle moves into your
lane, your vehicle will accelerate to
the set speed.
ODH053093
ODH053094 ODH053095
5-66
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle recognition
Some vehicles in your lane cannot
be recognized by the radar:
- Narrow vehicles such as motorcy-
cles or bicycles
- Vehicles offset to one side
- Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-
decelerating vehicles
- Stopped vehicles
- Vehicles with small rear profile such
as trailers with no loads
A vehicle ahead cannot be recog-
nized correctly by the radar if any of
following occurs:
- When the vehicle is pointing
upwards due to overloading in the
trunk
- While the steering wheel is operat-
ing
- When driving to one side of the lane
- When driving on narrow lanes or on
curves
Apply the brake or accelerator pedal
if necessary.
• Your vehicle may accelerate when
a vehicle ahead of you disappears.
• When you are warned that the
vehicle ahead of you is not detect-
ed, drive with caution.
ODH053096
ODH053097
5-67
Driving your vehicle
5
• When vehicles are at a standstill
and the vehicle in front of you
changes to the next lane, be care-
ful when your vehicle starts to
move because it may not recog-
nize the stopped vehicle in front of
you.
• Always look out for pedestrians
when your vehicle is maintaining a
distance with the vehicle ahead.
• Always be cautious for vehicles
with higher height or vehicles car-
rying loads that sticks out from the
back of the vehicle.
ODH053098 ODH053099 ODH053100
5-68
Driving your vehicle
The Smart Cruise Control System
may not operate temporarily due to:
• Electrical interference
• Modifying the suspension
• Differences of tire abrasion or
tire pressure
• Installing different type of tires
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the device.
Information
Radio frequency radiation exposure
information:
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for
an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed
and operated with minimum distance
of 20 cm between the radiator (anten-
na) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-locat-
ed or operating in conjunction with
any other antenna or transmitter.
i
i
NOTICE
When using the Smart Cruise
Control take the following pre-
cautions:
• If an emergency stop is nec-
essary, you must apply the
brakes.The vehicle cannot be
stopped by using the Smart
Cruise Control System.
• Keep a safe distance accord-
ing to road conditions and
vehicle speed. If the vehicle to
vehicle distance is too close
during a high-speed driving, a
serious collision may result.
• Always maintain sufficient
braking distance and deceler-
ate your vehicle by applying
the brakes if necessary.
• The Smart Cruise Control
System cannot recognize a
stopped vehicle, pedestrians
or an oncoming vehicle.
Always look ahead cautiously
to prevent unexpected and
sudden situations from occur-
ring.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Vehicles moving in front of you
with a frequent lane change
may cause a delay in the sys-
tem's reaction or may cause
the system to react to a vehicle
actually in an adjacent lane.
Always drive cautiously to pre-
vent unexpected and sudden
situations from occurring.
• Always be aware of the select-
ed speed and vehicle to vehi-
cle distance.
• The Smart Cruise Control
System may not recognize
complex driving situations so
always pay attention to driv-
ing conditions and control
your vehicle speed.
5-69
Driving your vehicle
5
Lane Departure Warning System
detects the lane with the camera at
the front windshield and warns you
when your vehicle departs from the
lane.
LLAANNEE DDEEPPAARRTTUURREE WWAARRNNIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM ((LLDDWWSS)) ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OLF054034N
OLF054035
Take the following precautions
when using the Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS):
• ALWAYS check the road con-
ditions. The LDWS does not
make the vehicle change
lanes or stay in the lanes.
• Do not turn the steering wheel
suddenly if the LDWS warns
that your vehicle is leaving the
lane.
• If the camera cannot detect
the lane or if the vehicle speed
does not exceed 44 mph
(70 km/h), the LDWS will not
be able to notify you if the
vehicle leaves the lane.
• If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of coating and
accessory on the front wind-
shield, the LDWS may not
work properly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not allow any water or liq-
uid to contact the LDWS cam-
era or the camera may be
damaged.
• Do not remove the LDWS
parts and do not damage the
camera by a strong impact.
• Do not put objects that reflect
light on the dash board.
• The operation of the LDWS
can be affected by several fac-
tors (including environmental
conditions). It is the responsi-
bility of the driver to pay
attention to the roadway and
to maintain the vehicle in its
lane at all times.
WARNING
5-70
Driving your vehicle
LDWS Operation
To operate:
Press the LDWS button with the
Engine Start/Stop button in the ON
position. The indicator (white) illumi-
nates on the cluster.
To cancel:
Press the LDWS button again. The
indicator on the cluster will go off.
If the vehicle leaves the lane when
the LDWS is operating and vehicle
speed exceeds 44mph (70km/h), the
warning operates as follows:
1. Visual warning
If you leave the lane, the lane line
you leave on the LCD display blinks
yellow.
2. Audible warning
If you leave the lane, the warning
sound operates.
OLF054206N
OLF054207N
■ Lane line detected
■ Lane line undetected
OLF056036
OLF054208N/OLF054209N
OLF054210N/OLF054211N
■ Lane Departure Warning
• Right • Left
• Right • Left
■ Lane Departure Warning + Smart Cruise Control
5-71
Driving your vehicle
5
Warning Light and Message
When the LDWS is not working prop-
erly, the warning light will illuminate
and the warning message will come
on for a few second. After the mes-
sage disappears, the master warning
light will illuminate.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-
tem checked.
The LDWS does not operate when:
• The driver turns on the turn signal
to change lanes or operates the
hazard warning flasher.
• Driving on the lane line.
Information
Always operate the turn signal before
changing lanes.
DRIVER'S ATTENTION
The LDWS may not warn you even
if the vehicle leaves the lane, or
may warn you even if the vehicle
does not leave the lane when:
• The lane is not visible due to
snow, rain, stain, a puddle or
other factors.
• The brightness outside changes
suddenly such as when entering
or exiting a tunnel.
• The headlamps are not on at
night or in a tunnel, or light level
is low.
• It is difficult to distinguish the
color of the lane marking from
the road or the lane line is dam-
aged or indistinct.
• Driving on a steep grade or a
curve.
• Light such as street light, sun-
light or oncoming vehicle light
reflects from the water on the
road.
• The lens or windshield is cov-
ered with foreign matter.
(Continued)
i
OLF054433N/OLF054030
■ Master warning light■ Warning message
5-72
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
• The camera cannot detect the
lane because of fog, heavy rain,
or heavy snow.
• The surrounding of the inside
rear view mirror temperature is
high due to direct sun light.
• The lane is very wide or narrow.
• The windshield is fogged by
humid air in the vehicle.
• A shadow is on the lane line.
• There is a mark that looks like a
lane line.
• There is a boundary structure,
such as a concrete barrier.
• The distance from the vehicle
ahead is very short or the vehi-
cle ahead drives covering the
lane line.
• The vehicle vibrates heavily due
to road conditions.
• The number of lanes increases
or decreases or the lane lines
are crossing.
• Putting something on the dash-
board.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Driving with the sun in front of
you.
• Driving in areas under construc-
tion.
• There are more than two lane
lines.
5-73
Driving your vehicle
5
The Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) uses a radar sensor to alert
the driver.
It senses the rear side territory of the
vehicle and provides an indication to
the driver if it detects an object
approaching from these areas.
(1)BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
The warning range depends on
your vehicle speed. However, if
your vehicle is much faster than
the other vehicle, the system will
not warn you.
(2)LCA (Lane Change Assist)
If the system detects a vehicle
approaching you at high speed,
the system will warn you.
(3)RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
If the radar detects an approach-
ing vehicle from the left and right
side as your vehicle moves rear-
ward, the system will warn you.
BBLLIINNDD SSPPOOTT DDEETTEECCTTIIOONN SSYYSSTTEEMM ((BBSSDD)) ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OLF054067L
Blind spot area
Closing at high speed
• Always check the road condi-
tion while driving for unex-
pected situations even
though the Blind Spot
Detection System (BSD) is
operating.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is a supplemen-
tal system to assist you. Do
not solely rely on the system
and always pay attention and
drive safely.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is not a substi-
tute for proper and safe driv-
ing. Always drive safely and
use caution when changing
lanes or backing the vehicle
up. The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) may not detect
every object alongside the
vehicle.
WARNING
5-74
Driving your vehicle
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist)
Operating conditions
To operate:
Press the BSD switch with the
Engine Start/Stop button in the ON
position. The indicator illuminates on
the switch. If vehicle speed exceeds
20 mph (30km/h) the system will acti-
vate.
To cancel:
Press the BSD switch again. The
indicator on the switch will go off.
When the system is not used, turn
the system off by turning off the
switch.
• If the engine is turned off and
on, the system returns to the
previous state.
• When the system is turned on,
the warning light will illuminate
for 3 seconds on the outside
rearview mirror.
Warning type
The system will activate when:
1.The system is on.
2.Vehicle speed is above about 20
mph (30 km/h).
3.Other vehicles are detected in the
rear side.
NOTICE
OLF054037
As the Blind Spot Detection
(BSD) system is a supplemental
device for your safe driving, it
may be dangerous to rely on
only the BSD information of the
head up display image when
changing the lane. Always pay
attention to drive safely.
WARNING
5-75
Driving your vehicle
5
First stage alert
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a warning
light will illuminate on the outside
rearview mirror.
If the detected vehicle is not in warn-
ing range, the warning will turn off
according to driving conditions.
OLF054051N
■ Left side
■ Right side
OLF054052N
■ Left side
OLF054053N
■ Right side
Second stage alert
The second stage alarm will activate when:
1.The first stage alert is on.
2.The turn signal light is on to change a lane.
When the second stage alert is activated, a warning light will blink on the
outside rearview mirror and an alarm will sound.
If you turn off the turn signal light, the second stage alert will be deacti-
vated.
5-76
Driving your vehicle
Detecting radar
The radars are located inside of the
rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for the system to work properly.
Warning message
• This warning message may appear
when :
- One or both of the sensors on the
rear bumper is blocked by dirt or
snow or a foreign object
- Driving in rural areas where the
BSD sensor does not detect
another vehicle for an extended
period of time
- When there is inclement weather
such as heavy snow or rain
If any of these conditions occur, the
light on the BSD switch and the sys-
tem will turn off automatically.
When the BSD cancelled warning
message is displayed in the cluster,
check to make sure that the rear
bumper is free from any dirt or snow
in the areas where the sensor is
located. Remove any dirt, snow, or
foreign material that could interfere
with the radar sensors.
After any dirt or debris is removed,
the BSD system should operate nor-
mally after about 10 minutes of driv-
ing the vehicle.
If the system still does not operate
normally have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OLF054054
OLF054217N
5-77
Driving your vehicle
5
If the system does not work properly,
a warning message will appear and
the light on the switch will turn off.
The system will turn off automatical-
ly. Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
Operating conditions
To operate:
Go to the User Settings Mode
(Driving Assist) and select RCTA
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert) on the LCD
display (For more details, refer to
"LCD Display" in chapter 3.). The
system will turn on and standby to
activate. The system will activate
when vehicle speed is below 6 mph
(10 km/h) with the shift lever in R
(Reverse).
The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) detecting range is about 1
feet (0.5 m) ~ 65 feet (20 m). A
vehicle will be detected if the vehi-
cle speed is 2.5 mph (4 km/h) ~ 22
mph (36 km/h) within the detecting
range. However, the detecting
range may change under different
conditions. Always pay attention
to the surroundings.
NOTICE
OLF056479N
OLF054434N
5-78
Driving your vehicle
Warning type
If the vehicle detected by the radars
approaches your vehicle, the warn-
ing chime will sound, the warning
light on the outside rearview mirror
will blink and a message will appear
on the LCD display.
Information
• If the detected vehicle is out of the
sensing range of your vehicle, move
the vehicle away from the detected
object slowly; the warning will be
canceled.
• The system may not operate proper-
ly due to other factors or circum-
stances. Always pay attention to
your surrounding.
• If your vehicle’s left or right side
bumper is blinded by barrier or
vehicles, the system sensing ability
may be reduced.
i
• The warning light on the out-
side rearview mirror will illu-
minate whenever a vehicle is
detected at the rear side by
the system.
To avoid accidents, do not
focus only on the warning
light and neglect to see the
surrounding of the vehicle.
• Drive safely even though the
vehicle is equipped with a
Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA). Do not solely
rely on the system but check
your surrounding before
changing lanes or backing the
vehicle up.
The system may not alert the
driver in some conditions so
always check the surround-
ings while driving.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) are not a
substitute for proper and safe
driving practices. Always
drive safely and use caution
when changing lanes or back-
ing the vehicles up.The Blind
Spot Detection System (BSD)
may not detect every object
alongside the vehicle.
WARNING
■ Left
• Type A
• Type A • Type B
• Type B
■ Right
OLF054221N/OLF054219N
OLF054222N/OLF054218N
5-79
Driving your vehicle
5
• The system may not work prop-
erly if the bumper has been
replaced or if repair work has
been done near the radar.
• The detection area differs
according to the roads width. If
the road is narrow the system
may detect other vehicles in the
next lane. In addition, if the road
is very wide the system may not
detect other vehicles.
• The system may turn off due to
strong electromagnetic waves.
Non-operating condition
Outside rearview mirror may not
alert the driver when:
- The outside rearview mirror hous-
ing is damaged or covered with
debris.
- The window is covered with debris.
- The windows are severely tinted.
DRIVER'S ATTENTION
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations for the system
may not detect other vehicles or
objects in certain circumstances.
- Curved roads, tollgates, etc.
- The surrounding of the radar is
polluted with rain, snow, mud,
etc
- The rear bumper near the radar
is covered or hidden with a for-
eign matter such as a sticker,
bumper guard, bicycle stand etc.
- The rear bumper is damaged or
the radar is out of place.
- The height of the vehicle is
altered such as when the trunk is
loaded with heavy objects, or
there is low tire pressure etc.
- Bad weather such as heavy rain
or snow.
- A fixed object is near such as a
guardrail, tunnel, human and ani-
mal etc.
(Continued)
NOTICE
5-80
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
- Metal substances are near the
vehicles such as in a construc-
tion area.
- A big vehicle is near such as a
bus or truck.
- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
- A flat trailer is near.
- If the vehicle has started at the
same time as the vehicle next to
you and has accelerated.
- When the other vehicle passes
by at a higher rate of speed.
- When changing lanes.
- When going down or up a steep
road where the height of the lane
is different.
- When the other vehicle drives
very close.
- When a trailer or carrier is
installed.
- When the temperature near the
rear bumper area is high or low.
- When the radars are covered by
a wall or a pillar of a parking lot.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- When your vehicle is backing up,
if the detected vehicle also backs
up.
- Small objects like shopping
carts and strollers.
- If there is a vehicle with
decreased ride height (lowered).
- When the vehicle is close to
another vehicle.
- When the vehicle in the next lane
moves two lanes away from you
OR when the vehicle two lanes
away moves to the next lane
from you.
- When driving through a narrow
road with many trees or bushes.
- When driving on wet surface.
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
i
5-81
Driving your vehicle
5
The Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) system is designed to detect
and monitor the vehicle ahead or
detect a pedestrian in the roadway
through radar signals and camera
recognition to warn the driver that a
collision is imminent, and if neces-
sary, apply emergency braking.
System setting and activation
System setting
The driver can activate the AEB by
placing the ignition switch to the ON
position and by selecting 'User
Settings', 'Driving Assist', and 'AEB
(Automatic Braking System)'. The
AEB deactivates, when the driver
cancels the system setting.
AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY BBRRAAKKIINNGG ((AAEEBB)) ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OLF056454N
Take the following precautions
when using the Automatic
Emergency Braking (AEB):
• This system is only a supple-
mental system and it is not
intended to,nor does it replace
the need for extreme care and
attention of the driver. The
sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors are
limited. Pay attention to the
road conditions at all times.
• NEVER drive too fast in accor-
dance with the road condi-
tions or while cornering.
• Always drive cautiously to
prevent unexpected and sud-
den situations from occur-
ring. AEB does not stop the
vehicle completely and is not
a collision avoidance system.
WARNING
5-82
Driving your vehicle
The warning light illumi-
nates on the LCD display,
when you cancel the AEB
system. The driver can
monitor the AEB ON/OFF status on
the LCD display. If the warning light
remains ON when the AEB is acti-
vated, have the system checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
The driver can select the initial warn-
ing activation time in the User
Settings in the Driver LCD display.
The options for the initial Forward
Collision Warning include the follow-
ing:
• FAST - When this condition is
selected, the initial
Forward Collision Warning
is activated earlier than
normal. This setting maxi-
mizes the amount of dis-
tance between the vehicle
or pedestrian ahead before
the initial warning occurs.
• NORMAL - When this condition is
selected, the initial
Forward Collision
Warning is activated
normally. This setting
allows for a nominal
amount of distance
between the vehicle or
pedestrian ahead
before the initial warn-
ing occurs.
• SLOW - When this condition is
selected, the initial
Forward Collision Warning
is activated later than nor-
mal. This setting reduces
the amount of distance
between the vehicle or
pedestrian ahead before
the initial warning occurs.
OLF056455N/OLF056456N
5-83
Driving your vehicle
5
Prerequisite for activation
The AEB gets ready to be activated,
when the AEB is selected on the
LCD display, and when the following
prerequisites are satisfied.
- The ESC is activated.
- To enable the system to detect
pedestrians ahead, the vehicle
driving speed must be between 5 -
40 mph (8 - 65 km/h).
- To enable the system to detect a
vehicle ahead, the vehicle driving
speed must be between 5 - 110
mph (8 - 180 km/h).
When traveling above 50 mph (80
km/h), the AEB system only initiates
partial braking. This is to prevent
unintended full braking to stop in the
middle of the highway.
AEB warning message and
system control
The AEB produces warning mes-
sages and warning alarms in accor-
dance with the collision risk levels.
Also, it controls the brakes in accor-
dance with the collision risk levels.
• The AEB automatically acti-
vates upon placing the igni-
tion switch to the ON position.
The driver can deactivate the
AEB by canceling the system
setting on the LCD display.
• The AEB automatically deacti-
vates upon canceling the
ESC. When the ESC is can-
celed, the AEB cannot be acti-
vated on the LCD display.
WARNING
5-84
Driving your vehicle
Forward Warning (1
st
warning)
This initial warning message appears
on the LCD display with a warning
chime.
The driver can select the initial warn-
ing activation time in the User
Settings in the Driver LCD display.
The options for the initial Forward
Collision Warning include FAST,
NORMAL, or SLOW initial warning
time.
Collision Warning (2
nd
warning)
• This warning message appears on
the LCD display with a warning
chime.
• Additionally, some vehicle system
intervention occurs by the engine
management system to help decel-
erate the vehicle.
- If the detected vehicle in front is
driving slower than 50 mph (80
km/h), your vehicle speed may
decelerate sharply to avoid a col-
lision. If the detected vehicle in
front is driving faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h), your vehicle speed
may decelerate moderately.
- If your vehicle is traveling less
than 40 mph (65 km/h) and a
pedestrian is detected within the
Collision Warning (2
nd
warning)
stage, your vehicle speed may
decelerate sharply to avoid a col-
lision.
OLF056452N OLF056450N
5-85
Driving your vehicle
5
Emergency braking
(3
rd
warning)
• This warning message appears on
the LCD display with a warning
alarm.
• Additionally, automatic emergency
braking of the vehicle is applied in
order to avoid a collision.
- If your vehicle is traveling less
than 40 mph (65 km/h) and a
pedestrian is detected within the
Emergency Braking stage, auto-
matic emergency braking of the
vehicle is applied. In this condi-
tion, your vehicle speed will
decelerate sharply to avoid a col-
lision.
- When your vehicle drives slower
than 40 mph (65 km/h) with a
passer-by in front, the driving
speed may abruptly decrease.
When your vehicle drives faster
than 40 mph (65 km/h) with a
pedestrian in front, the AEB does
not operate.
Brake operation
• In an urgent situation, the braking
system enters into the ready status
for prompt reaction against the dri-
ver’s depressing the brake pedal.
• The AEB provides additional brak-
ing power for optimum braking per-
formance, when the driver depress-
es the brake pedal.
• The braking control is automatical-
ly deactivated, when the driver
sharply depresses the brake pedal,
or when the driver abruptly oper-
ates the steering wheel.
• The braking control is automatical-
ly canceled, when risk factors dis-
appear.
OLF056451N
The driver should always use
extreme caution while operating
the vehicle,whether or not there
is a warning message or alarm
from the AEB system.
CAUTION
5-86
Driving your vehicle
AEB front radar sensor
In order for the AEB system to oper-
ate properly, always make sure the
radar sensor lens cover is clean and
free of dirt, snow, and debris. Dirt,
snow, or foreign substances on the
lens may adversely affect the sens-
ing performance of the radar.
Warning message and warning
light
When the sensor lens cover is
blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the
AEB system operation may stop
temporarily. If this occurs, a warning
message will appear on the LCD dis-
play. Remove any dirt, snow, or
debris and clean the radar sensor
lens cover before operating the AEB
system.
OLF054032N
OLF056453N
The AEB system logic operates
within certain parameters, such
as the distance from the vehicle
or pedestrian ahead, the speed
of the vehicle ahead, and the
driver's vehicle speed. Certain
conditions such as inclement
weather and road conditions
may affect the operation of the
AEB system.
WARNING
The braking control cannot
completely stop the vehicle nor
avoid all collisions. The driver
should hold the responsibility
to safely drive and control the
vehicle.
WARNING
5-87
Driving your vehicle
5
• Do not apply foreign objects
such as a bumper sticker or a
bumper guard near the radar
sensor. Doing so may adversely
affect the sensing performance
of the radar.
• Always keep the radar sensor
and lens cover clean and free of
dirt and debris.
• Use only a soft cloth to wash the
vehicle. Do not spray pressur-
ized water directly on the sensor
or sensor cover.
• Be careful not to apply unneces-
sary force on the radar sensor or
sensor cover. If the sensor is
forcibly moved out of proper
alignment, the AEB system may
not operate correctly. In this
case, a warning message may
not be displayed. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the front bumper becomes
damaged in the area around the
radar sensor, the AEB system
may not operate properly. Have
the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Use only genuine HYUNDAI
parts to repair or replace a dam-
aged sensor or sensor cover. Do
not apply paint to the sensor
cover.
System malfunction
• When the AEB is not working prop-
erly, the AEB warning light ( )
will illuminate and the warning
message will appear for a few sec-
onds. After the message disap-
pears, the master warning light
( ) will illuminate. In this case,
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• The AEB warning message may
appear along with the illumination
of the ESC warning light.
NOTICE
OLF056473N
5-88
Driving your vehicle
• The AEB is only a supplemen-
tal system for the driver’s con-
venience. The driver should
hold the responsibility to con-
trol the vehicle operation. Do
not solely depend on the AEB
system. Rather, maintain a
safe braking distance, and, if
necessary, depress the brake
pedal to reduce the driving
speed.
• In certain instances and
under certain driving condi-
tions, the AEB system may
activate prematurely. This ini-
tial warning message appears
on the LCD display with a
warning chime.
Also, in certain instances the
front radar sensor or camera
recognition system may not
detect the vehicle or pedestri-
an ahead. The AEB system
may not activate and the
warning message will not be
displayed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If there is a malfunction with
the AEB system, the automat-
ic emergency braking is not
applied even though the brak-
ing system is operating nor-
mally.
• The AEB system operates
only to detect vehicles or
pedestrians in front of the
vehicle.
The AEB system does not
operate when the vehicle is in
reverse.
The AEB system is not
designed to detect other
objects on the road such as
animals.
The AEB system does not
detect cross traffic vehicles
that are approaching.
The AEB system cannot
detect the driver approaching
the side view of a parked vehi-
cle (for example on a dead
end street.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
In these cases, you must
maintain a safe braking dis-
tance, and if necessary,
depress the brake pedal to
reduce the driving speed in
order to maintain a safe dis-
tance.
WARNING
5-89
Driving your vehicle
5
Limitations of the system
The Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) system is designed to monitor
the vehicle ahead or a pedestrian in
the roadway through radar signals
and camera recognition to warn the
driver that a collision is imminent,
and if necessary, apply emergency
braking.
In certain situations, the radar sen-
sor or the camera may not be able to
detect the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead. In these cases, the AEB sys-
tem may not operate normally. The
driver must pay careful attention in
the following situations where the
AEB operation may be limited.
Detecting vehicles
The sensor may be limited when:
- The radar sensor or camera is
blocked with a foreign object or
debris
- Inclement weather such as heavy
rain or snow obscures the field of
view of the radar sensor or camera
- There is interference by electro-
magnetic waves
- There is severe irregular reflection
from the radar sensor
- The vehicle in front is too small to
be detected by the camera recog-
nition system (for example a motor-
cycle or a bicycle, etc.)
- The vehicle in front is an oversize
vehicle or trailer that is too big to
be detected by the camera recog-
nition system (for example a tractor
trailer, etc.)
- The driver's field of view is not well
illuminated (either too dark or too
much reflection or too much back-
light that obscures the field of view)
- The vehicle in front does not have
their rear lights properly turned ON
- The outside brightness changes
suddenly, for example when enter-
ing or exiting a tunnel
- The vehicle in front is driving errat-
ically
5-90
Driving your vehicle
- Driving on a curve
The performance of the AEB system
may be limited when driving on a
curved road.
In certain instances on a curved
road, the AEB system may activate
prematurely.
Also, in certain instances the front
radar sensor or camera recognition
system may not detect the vehicle
traveling on a curved road.
In these cases, the driver must main-
tain a safe braking distance, and if
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
- Driving on a slope
The performance of the AEB
decreases while driving upward or
downward on a slope, not recogniz-
ing the vehicle in front in the same
lane. It may unnecessarily produce
the warning message and the warn-
ing alarm, or it may not produce the
warning message and the warning
alarm at all.
When the AEB suddenly recognizes
the vehicle in front while passing
over a slope, you may experience
sharp deceleration.
Always keep your eyes forward while
driving upward or downward on a
slope, and, if necessary, depress the
brake pedal to reduce your driving
speed in order to maintain distance.
OLF056448NOTL055132
5-91
Driving your vehicle
5
- Changing lanes
When a vehicle changes lanes in
front of you, the AEB system may not
immediately detect the vehicle, espe-
cially if the vehicle changes lanes
abruptly.In this case, you must main-
tain a safe braking distance, and if
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
When driving in stop-and-go traffic,
and a stopped vehicle in front of you
merges out of the lane, the AEB sys-
tem may not immediately detect the
new vehicle that is now in front of
you. In this case, you must maintain
a safe braking distance, and if nec-
essary, depress the brake pedal to
reduce your driving speed in order to
maintain a safe distance.
- Detecting the vehicle in front of you
If the vehicle in front of you has cargo
that extends rearward from the cab,
or when the vehicle in front of you
has higher ground clearance, addi-
tional special attention is required.
The AEB system may not be able to
detect the cargo extending from the
vehicle. In these instances, you must
maintain a safe braking distance
from the rearmost object, and if nec-
essary, depress the brake pedal to
reduce your driving speed in order to
maintain distance.
OLF056449NOTL055135 OTL055136
5-92
Driving your vehicle
Detecting pedestrians
The sensor may be limited when:
- The pedestrian is not fully detected
by the camera recognition system,
for example, if the pedestrian is
leaning over or is not fully walking
upright
- The pedestrian is moving very
quickly or appears abruptly in the
camera detection area
The pedestrian is wearing clothing
that easily blends into the back-
ground, making it difficult to be
detected by the camera recogni-
tion system
- The outside lighting is too bright
(e.g.when driving in bright sunlight
or in sun glare) or too dark (e.g.
when driving on a dark rural road
at night)
- It is difficult to detect and distin-
guish the pedestrian from other
objects in the surroundings, for
example, when there is a group of
pedestrians or a large crowd
Information
In some instances, the AEB system
may be cancelled when subjected to
electromagnetic interference.
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
i
i
• Do not use the Automatic
Emergency Braking system
when towing a vehicle.
Application of the AEB system
while towing may adversely
affect the safety of your vehi-
cle or the towing vehicle
• Use extreme caution when the
vehicle in front of you has
cargo that extends rearward
from the cab, or when the
vehicle in front of you has
higher ground clearance.
• The AEB system is designed
to detect and monitor the vehi-
cle ahead or detect a pedestri-
an in the roadway through
radar signals and camera
recognition. It is not designed
to detect bicycles, motorcy-
cles, or smaller wheeled
objects such as luggage bags,
shopping carts, or strollers.
• Never try to test the operation
of the AEB system. Doing so
may cause severe injury or
death.
WARNING
5-93
Driving your vehicle
5
Hazardous Driving Conditions
When hazardous driving conditions
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud or sand:
Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-
tance for braking.
Avoid sudden movements in braking
or steering.
If stuck in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
Use sand, rock salt, or other non-slip
material under the drive wheels to
provide traction when stuck in ice,
snow, or mud.
Rocking the Vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between R (Reverse) and a for-
ward gear.
Try to avoid spinning the wheels, and
do not race the engine.
To prevent transmission wear, wait
until the wheels stop spinning before
shifting gears. Release the accelera-
tor pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal while
the transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in forward and
reverse directions causes a rocking
motion that may free the vehicle.
If the tires spin at high speed the
tires can explode, and you or oth-
ers may be injured. Do not attempt
this procedure if people or objects
are anywhere near the vehicle.
The vehicle can overheat causing
an engine compartment fire or
other damage. Spin the wheels as
little as possible and avoid spin-
ning the wheels at speeds over 35
mph (56 km/h) as indicated on the
speedometer.
NOTICE
SSPPEECCIIAALL DDRRIIVVIINNGG CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNSS
Downshifting with an automatic
transmission while driving on
slippery surfaces can cause an
accident.The sudden change in
tire speed could cause the tires
to skid. Be careful when down-
shifting on slippery surfaces.
WARNING
5-94
Driving your vehicle
If you are still stuck after rocking
the vehicle a few times, have the
vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle
to avoid engine overheating, pos-
sible damage to the transmission,
and tire damage. See "Towing" in
chapter 6.
To prevent damage to the trans-
mission, turn OFF the ESC prior to
rocking the vehicle.
Smooth Cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration.
Driving at Night
Night driving presents more hazards
than driving in the daylight. Here are
some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi-
cles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver’s head-
lamps.
• Keep your headlamps clean and
properly aimed. Dirty or improperly
aimed headlamps will make it
much more difficult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-
lamps of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
NOTICE
5-95
Driving your vehicle
5
Driving in the Rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous. Here are a few things to
consider when driving in the rain or
on slick pavement:
• Slow down and allow extra follow-
ing distance. A heavy rainfall
makes it harder to see and increas-
es the distance needed to stop
your vehicle.
• Turn OFF your Cruise Control. (if
equipped)
• Replace your windshield wiper
blades when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the
windshield.
• Be sure your tires have enough
tread. If your tires do not have
enough tread, making a quick stop
on wet pavement can cause a skid
and possibly lead to an accident.
Refer to "Tire Tread" in chapter 7.
• Turn on your headlamps to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe your brakes may be
wet, apply them lightly while driv-
ing until normal braking operation
returns.
Hydroplaning
If the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough, your vehicle may
have little or no contact with the road
surface and actually ride on the
water. The best advice is SLOW
DOWN when the road is wet. The
risk of hydroplaning increases as the
depth of tire tread decreases. (Refer
to "Tire Tread" in chapter 7.)
Driving in Flooded Areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
reduced.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them sev-
eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
5-96
Driving your vehicle
WWIINNTTEERR DDRRIIVVIINNGG
Snow or Icy Conditions
You need to keep sufficient distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you.
Apply the brakes gently. Speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake
applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause skids to occur.
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
or to install tire chains on your tires.
Always carry emergency equipment.
Some of the items you may want to
carry include tire chains, tow straps
or chains, a flashlight, emergency
flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables,
a window scraper, gloves, ground
cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
cle, make sure to use radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
The traction provided by snow tires
on dry roads may not be as high as
your vehicle's original equipment
tires. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Information
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and munici-
pal regulations for possible restric-
tions against their use.
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner than other types of tires, they
may be damaged by mounting some
types of tire chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is
recommended instead of tire chains.
Do not mount tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; if
unavoidable use a wire type chain. If
tire chains must be used, use gen-
uine HYUNDAI parts and install the
tire chain after reviewing the instruc-
tions provided with the tire chains.
Damage to your vehicle caused by
improper tire chain use is not cov-
ered by your vehicle manufacturer’s
warranty.
i
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle’s
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your
vehicle may be adversely affect-
ed.
WARNING
OLMB053046
5-97
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
• Install tire chains on the front tires.
It should be noted that installing tire
chains on the tires will provide a
greater driving force, but will not
prevent side skids.
• Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and
municipal regulations for possible
restrictions against their use.
Chain installation
When installing tire chains, follow the
manufacturer's instructions and
mount them as tightly possible. Drive
slowly (less than 20 mph (30 km/h))
with chains installed. If you hear the
chains contacting the body or chas-
sis, stop and tighten them.If they still
make contact, slow down until the
noise stops. Remove the tire chains
as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning Flasher and place a
triangular emergency warning device
behind the vehicle (if available).
Always place the vehicle in P (Park),
apply the parking brake and turn off
the engine before installing snow
chains.
i
The use of tire chains may
adversely affect vehicle han-
dling:
• Drive less than 20 mph
(30 km/h) or the chain manu-
facturer's recommended speed
limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid
bumps, holes, sharp turns,
and other road hazards, which
may cause the vehicle to
bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked
wheel braking.
WARNING
5-98
Driving your vehicle
- When using tire chains:
• Wrong size chains or improperly
installed chains can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, sus-
pension, body and wheels.
• Use SAE "S" class or wire
chains.
• If you hear noise caused by
chains contacting the body,
retighten the chain to prevent
contact with the vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage,
retighten the chains after driving
0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).
• Do not use tire chains on vehi-
cles equipped with aluminum
wheels. If unavoidable, use a
wire type chain.
• Use wire chains less than 0.47
inch (12 mm) wide to prevent
damage to the chain's connec-
tion.
Winter Precautions
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-
ing system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in chapter 7. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
chapter 8 for recommendations. If
you aren’t sure what weight oil you
should use, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on
the battery system. Visually inspect
the battery and cables as described
in chapter 7. The level of charge in
your battery can be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
service station.
NOTICE
5-99
Driving your vehicle
5
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as
described in chapter 7 and replace
them if necessary. Also check all
ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or
damaged in any way.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instruc-
tions on the container.Window wash-
er anti-freeze is available from an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
most auto parts outlets. Do not use
engine coolant or other types of anti-
freeze as these may damage the
paint finish.
Do not let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position.This is most likely to happen
when there is an accumulation of
snow or ice around or near the rear
brakes or if the brakes are wet. If
there is a risk the parking brake may
freeze, apply it only temporarily while
you put the gear selector lever in P
and block the rear wheels so the car
cannot roll.Then release the parking
brake.
Do not let ice and snow accu-
mulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering.When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
car to be sure the movement of the
front wheels and the steering com-
ponents is not obstructed.
Don't place foreign objects or
materials in the engine com-
partment
Placement of foreign object or mate-
rials which prevent cooling of the
engine, in the engine compartment,
may cause a failure or combustion.
The manufacturer is not responsible
for the damage caused by such
placement.
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice.If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heat-
ed key with care to avoid injury.
5-100
Driving your vehicle
Two labels on your driver’s door sill
show how much weight your vehicle
was designed to carry: the Tire and
Loading Information Label and the
Certification Label.
Before loading your vehicle, familiar-
ize yourself with the following terms
for determining your vehicle's weight
ratings, from the vehicle's specifica-
tions and the Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or option-
al equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your deal-
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo Weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the Certification Label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
gers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the Certification Label
located on the driver's door sill.
VVEEHHIICCLLEE LLOOAADD LLIIMMIITT
5-101
Driving your vehicle
5
Tire Loading Information Label
OLF054233N/OLF054234N/OLF054235N
OLF054236N/OLF054237N/OLF054451N
OLF054452N/OLF054453N
■ Type A ■ Type D
■ Type E
■ Type G
■ Type H
■ Type F
■ Type B
■ Type C
The label located on the driver's
door sill gives the original tire size,
cold tire pressures recommended
for your vehicle, the number of peo-
ple that can be in your vehicle and
vehicle capacity weight.
5-102
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle capacity weight
904 lbs. (410 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo.If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
Seating capacity
Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
Towing capacity
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
Cargo capacity
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.
Steps for determining correct
load limit
1. Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity.For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
er, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
Do not overload the vehicle as
there is a limit to the total
weight, or load limit, including
occupants and cargo, the vehi-
cle can carry. Overloading can
shorten the life of the vehicle. If
the GVWR or the GAWR is
exceeded, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change the
handling of your vehicle. These
could cause you to lose control
and result in an accident.
WARNING
5-103
Driving your vehicle
5
Example 1
Maximum Load
(1400 lbs.)
(635 kg)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs. × 2 = 300 lbs.)
(68 kg × 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
(1100 lbs.)
(499 kg)
Example 2
Maximum Load
(1400 lbs.)
(635 kg)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs. × 5 = 750 lbs.)
(68 kg × 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
(650 lbs.)
(295 kg)
Example 3
Maximum Load
(1400 lbs.)
(635 kg)
Passenger Weight
(172 lbs. × 5 = 860 lbs.)
(78 kg × 5 = 390 kg)
Cargo Weight
(540 lbs.)
(245 kg)
+
≥≥
≥≥
≥≥
+
+
5-104
Driving your vehicle
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver’s door sill at the center pil-
lar and shows the maximum allow-
able weight of the fully loaded vehi-
cle. This is called the GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel and cargo.
This label also tells you the maxi-
mum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
The total weight of the vehicle,
including all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out
the actual loads on your front and
rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Be
sure to spread out your load equally
on both sides of the centerline.
OBH059070
Overloading
• Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle
and vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
affect your vehicle's handling
and braking ability, and cause
an accident.
• Do not overload your vehicle.
Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your
vehicle's tires and possible
tire failure, increased stop-
ping distances and poor vehi-
cle handling-all of which may
result in a crash.
WARNING
5-105
Driving your vehicle
5
If you carry items inside your
vehicle (e.g., suitcases, tools,
packages, or anything else),
they are moving as fast as the
vehicle. If you have to stop or
turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, the items will keep going
and can cause an injury if they
strike the driver or a passenger.
• Put items in the cargo area of
your vehicle.Try to spread the
weight evenly.
• Do not stack items, like suit-
cases, inside the vehicle
above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured
child restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure it.
WARNING
TTRRAAIILLEERR TTOOWWIINNGG
Overloading your vehicle may
cause damage. Repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do
not overload your vehicle.
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
NOTICE
What to do in an emergency
6
Hazard Warning Flasher .......................................6-2
In Case of an Emergency While Driving.............6-2
If the Engine Stalls While Driving .................................6-2
If the Engine Stalls at a Crossroad or Crossing........6-2
If you Have a Flat Tire While Driving ..........................6-3
If the Engine Will Not Start..................................6-3
If the Engine Doesn’t Turn Over or
Turns Over Slowly.............................................................6-3
If the Engine Turns Over Normally but
Doesn’t Start.......................................................................6-3
Jump Starting..........................................................6-4
If the Engine Overheats........................................6-7
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).........6-9
Check Tire Pressure .........................................................6-9
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...............................6-10
Low Tire Pressure Telltale............................................6-11
Low Tire Pressure Position and
Tire Pressure Telltale .....................................................6-11
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Malfunction Indicator.....................................................6-12
Changing a Tire with TPMS..........................................6-13
If you Have a Flat Tire........................................6-15
With Spare Tire................................................................6-15
With Tire Mobility Kit (TMK)........................................6-23
Towing ...................................................................6-30
Towing Service.................................................................6-30
Emergency Towing..........................................................6-31
6-2
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exer-
cise extreme caution when approach-
ing, overtaking, or passing your vehi-
cle.
It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
To turn the hazard warning flasher
on or off, press the hazard warning
flasher button with the ignition switch
in any position.The button is located
in the center fascia panel. All turn
signal lights will flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
If the Engine Stalls While
Driving
• Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau-
tiously off the road to a safe place.
• Turn on your hazard warning flash-
er.
• Try to start the engine again.If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or
seek other qualified assistance.
If the Engine Stalls at a
Crossroad or Crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, if safe to do so, move the
shift lever to the N (Neutral) position
and then push the vehicle to a safe
location.
HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG FFLLAASSHHEERR
What to do in an emergency
IINN CCAASSEE OOFF AANN EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY
WWHHIILLEE DDRRIIVVIINNGG
OLF064001
OLF064002
■ Type A
■ Type B
6-3
What to do in an emergency
If you Have a Flat Tire While
Driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
• Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow down
while driving straight ahead. Do not
apply the brakes immediately or
attempt to pull off the road as this
may cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident. When the
vehicle has slowed to such a speed
that it is safe to do so, brake care-
fully and pull off the road. Drive off
the road as far as possible and park
on firm, level ground. If you are on
a divided highway, do not park in
the median area between the two
traffic lanes.
• When the vehicle is stopped, press
the hazard warning flasher button,
move the shift lever into P(Park),
and apply the parking brake, and
place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
• Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
• When changing a flat tire, follow
the instructions provided later in
this chapter.
If the Engine Doesn’t Turn
Over or Turns Over Slowly
• Be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park). The engine
starts only when the shift lever is in
N (Neutral) or P (Park).
• Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
• Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is drained.
Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. This could cause damage to
your vehicle. See instructions for
"Jump Starting" provided in this
chapter.
If the Engine Turns Over
Normally but Doesn’t Start
Check the fuel level and add fuel if
necessary.
If the engine still does not start, have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
6
IIFF TTHHEE EENNGGIINNEE WWIILLLL NNOOTT SSTTAARRTT
Push or pull starting the vehicle
may cause the catalytic con-
verter to overload which can
lead to damage to the emission
control system.
CAUTION
6-4
What to do in an emergency
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Follow the jump
starting procedure in this section to
avoid serious injury or damage to
your vehicle. If in doubt about how to
properly jump start your vehicle, we
strongly recommend that you have a
service technician or towing service
do it for you.
JJUUMMPP SSTTAARRTTIINNGG
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH to you or bystanders,
always follow these precautions
when working near or handling
the battery:
Always read and follow
instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Wear eye protection
designed to protect the
eyes from acid splashes.
Keep all flames, sparks,
or smoking materials
away from the battery.
Hydrogen is always
present in battery cells,
is highly combustible,
and may explode if ignit-
ed.
Keep batteries out of
reach of children.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
Batteries contain sulfu-
ric acid which is highly
corrosive. Do not allow
acid to contact your
eyes, skin or clothing.
If acid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get imme-
diate medical attention. If acid
gets on your skin, thoroughly
wash the area. If you feel pain or
a burning sensation, get med-
ical attention immediately.
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle if your battery is
frozen.
(Continued)
6-5
What to do in an emergency
6
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulations.
To prevent damage to your vehi-
cle:
• Only use a 12-volt power supply
(battery or jumper system) to
jump start your vehicle.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle by push-starting.
Jump starting procedure
1. Position the vehicles close enough
that the jumper cables will reach,
but do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in
the engine compartment at all
times, even when the vehicles are
turned off.
3. Turn off all electrical devices such
as radios, lights, air conditioning,
etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park)
and set the parking brakes. Turn
both vehicles OFF.
NOTICE
i
Pb
(Continued)
• NEVER attempt to recharge
the battery when the vehicle’s
battery cables are connected
to the battery.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
NEVER touch these compo-
nents with the engine running
or when the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
6-6
What to do in an emergency
4. Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illus-
tration. First connect one jumper
cable to the red, positive (+)
jumper terminal of your vehicle
(1).
5. Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the red, positive
(+) battery/jumper terminal of the
assisting vehicle (2).
6. Connect the second jumper cable
to the black, negative (-) battery/
chassis ground of the assisting
vehicle (3).
7. Connect the other end of the sec-
ond jumper cable to the black,
negative (-) chassis ground of
your vehicle (4).
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the cor-
rect battery or jumper terminals or
the correct ground. Do not lean
over the battery when making
connections.
8. Start the engine of the assisting
vehicle and let it run at approxi-
mately 2,000 rpm for a few min-
utes.Then start your vehicle.
If your vehicle will not start after a
few attempts, it probably requires
servicing. In this event please seek
qualified assistance. If the cause of
your battery discharging is not
apparent, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Disconnect the jumper cables in the
exact reverse order you connected
them:
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from
the black, negative (-) chassis
ground of your vehicle (4).
2. Disconnect the other end of the
jumper cable from the black, neg-
ative (-) battery/chassis ground of
the assisting vehicle (3).
3. Disconnect the second jumper
cable from the red, positive (+)
battery/jumper terminal of the
assisting vehicle (2).
4. Disconnect the other end of the
jumper cable from the red, positive
(+) jumper terminal of your vehicle
(1).
1VQA4001
6-7
What to do in an emergency
6
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine may be over-
heating. If this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (Park)
and set the parking brake.If the air
conditioning is ON, turn it OFF.
3. If engine coolant is running out
under the vehicle or steam is com-
ing out from the hood, stop the
engine.Do not open the hood until
the coolant has stopped running
or the steaming has stopped. If
there is no visible loss of engine
coolant and no steam, leave the
engine running and check to be
sure the engine cooling fan is
operating.If the fan is not running,
turn the engine off.
4. Check for coolant leaking from the
radiator, hoses or under the vehi-
cle. (If the air conditioning had
been in use, it is normal for cold
water to be draining from it when
you stop.)
5. If engine coolant is leaking out,
stop the engine immediately and
call the nearest authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
IIFF TTHHEE EENNGGIINNEE OOVVEERRHHEEAATTSS
While the engine is
running, keep hands,
clothing and tools
away from the mov-
ing parts such as the
cooling fan and drive
belt to prevent seri-
ous injury.
WARNING
6-8
What to do in an emergency
6. If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to nor-
mal. Then, if coolant has been
lost, carefully add coolant to the
reservoir to bring the fluid level in
the reservoir up to the halfway
mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheat-
ing. If overheating happens again,
call an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er for assistance.
Serious loss of coolant indi-
cates a leak in the cooling sys-
tem and should be checked as
soon as possible by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
NEVER remove the
radiator cap or the
drain plug while the
engine and radiator
are hot. Hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure, causing serious
injury.
Turn the engine off and wait
until the engine cools down.
Use extreme care when remov-
ing the radiator cap. Wrap a
thick towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to the
first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the
cap, using a thick towel, and
continue turning counterclock-
wise to remove it.
WARNING
6-9
What to do in an emergency
6
TTIIRREE PPRREESSSSUURREE MMOONNIITTOORRIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM ((TTPPMMSS))
(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale/TPMS
Malfunction Indicator
(2) Low Tire Pressure Position
Telltale and Tire Pressure Telltale
(Shown on the LCD display)
Check Tire Pressure
• You can check the tire pressure in
the Information Mode on the clus-
ter.
Refer to the "User Settings
Mode" section in chapter 3.
• Tire pressure is displayed after a
few minutes of driving after initial
engine start up.
• If tire pressure is not displayed
when the vehicle is stopped, “Drive
to display” message will appear.
After driving, check the tire pres-
sure.
• The displayed tire pressure values
may differ from those measured
with a tire pressure gauge.
• You can change the tire pressure
unit in the User Settings Mode on
the cluster.
- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to the "User
Settings Mode" section in
chapter 3).
OLF064003
OLF044147N
OLF066028N
6-10
What to do in an emergency
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximate-
ly one minute and then remain con-
tinuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehi-
cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pres-
sure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
tions may occur for a variety of rea-
sons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function proper-
ly.
6-11
What to do in an emergency
6
If any of the below happens, have
the system checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
1. The Low Tire Pressure Telltale/
TPMS Malfunction Indicator
does not illuminate for 3 sec-
onds when the ignition switch
is placed to the ON position or
engine is running.
2. The TPMS Malfunction Indicator
remains illuminated after blink-
ing for approximately 1 minute.
3. The Low Tire Pressure Position
Telltale remains illuminated.
Low Tire Pressure
Telltale
Low Tire Pressure
Position and Tire
Pressure Telltale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated and warning message dis-
played on the cluster LCD display,
one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly under-inflated. The Low Tire
Pressure Position Telltale will indi-
cate which tire is significantly under-
inflated by illuminating the corre-
sponding position light.
If either telltale illuminates, immedi-
ately reduce your speed, avoid hard
cornering and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible. Inflate the tires to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehi-
cle’s placard or tire inflation pressure
label located on the driver’s side cen-
ter pillar outer panel.
If you cannot reach a service station
or if the tire cannot hold the newly
added air, replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire.
The Low Tire Pressure Telltale will
remain on and the TPMS Malfunction
Indicator may blink for one minute
and then remain illuminated (when
the vehicle is driven approximately
20 minutes at speed above 15.5 mph
(25 km/h)) until you have the low
pressure tire repaired and replaced
on the vehicle.
Information
The spare tire is not equipped with a
tire pressure sensor.
i
NOTICE
OLF044147N
6-12
What to do in an emergency
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
Malfunction Indicator
The TPMS Malfunction Indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.
Have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible.
If there is a malfunction with the
TPMS, the Low Tire Pressure
Position Telltale will not be dis-
played even though the vehicle
has an under-inflated tire.
NOTICE
In winter or cold weather, the
Low Tire Pressure Telltale may
be illuminated if the tire pres-
sure was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunc-
tioning because the decreased
temperature leads to a propor-
tional lowering of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tire inflation
pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
CAUTION
Low pressure damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
WARNING
6-13
What to do in an emergency
6
The TPMS Malfunction Indicator
may illuminate after blinking for
one minute if the vehicle is near
electric power supply cables or
radio transmitters such as police
stations, government and public
offices, broadcasting stations,
military installations, airports,
transmitting towers, etc.
Additionally, the TPMS Malfunction
Indicator may illuminate if snow
chains are used or electronic
devices such as computers,charg-
ers, remote starters, navigation,
etc.This may interfere with normal
operation of the TPMS.
Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure and Position telltales will
come on. Have the flat tire repaired
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible or replace the
flat tire with the spare tire.
The spare tire (if equipped) does not
come with a tire pressure monitoring
sensor.When the low pressure tire or
the flat tire is replaced with the spare
tire, the Low Tire Pressure Telltale
will remain on. Also, the TPMS
Malfunction Indicator will illuminate
after blinking for one minute if the
vehicle is driven at speed above 15.5
mph (25 km/h) for approximately 20
minutes.
Once the original tire equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring sensor is
reinflated to the recommended pres-
sure and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the Low Tire Pressure Telltale and
TPMS Malfunction Indicator will go
off within a few minutes of driving.
If the indicators do not extinguish
after a few minutes, please visit an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem (except for
the spare tire). You must use TPMS
specific wheels. It is recommended
that you always have your tires serv-
iced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
You may not be able to identify a tire
with low pressure by simply looking
at it. Always use a good quality tire
pressure gauge to measure. Please
note that a tire that is hot (from being
driven) will have a higher pressure
measurement than a tire that is cold.
NOTICE
Never use a puncture-repairing
agent not approved by HYUNDAI
dealer to repair and/or inflate a
low pressure tire. Tire sealant
not approved by HYUNDAI deal-
er may damage the tire pressure
sensor.
CAUTION
6-14
What to do in an emergency
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
i
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually with light
force, and slowly move to a
safe position off the road.
WARNING
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system’s ability to warn the
driver of low tire pressure con-
ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modify-
ing, or disabling the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.
WARNING
6-15
What to do in an emergency
6
With Spare Tire (if equipped)
Jack and tools
➀ Jack handle
② Jack
③ Wheel nut wrench
The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug
nut wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment under the luggage box
cover.
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
Turn the winged hold down bolt
counterclockwise to remove the
spare tire.
Store the spare tire in the same com-
partment by turning the winged hold
down bolt clockwise.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling,” store them in their
proper location.
IIFF YYOOUU HHAAVVEE AA FFLLAATT TTIIRREE
Changing a tire can be danger-
ous. Follow the instructions in
this section when changing a
tire to reduce the risk of serious
injury or death.
WARNING
OLF064004N
OLF064031N
Be careful as you use the jack
handle to stay clear of the flat
end. The flat end has sharp
edges that could cause cuts.
CAUTION
6-16
What to do in an emergency
If it is hard to loosen the tire hold-
down wing bolt by hand, you can
loosen it easily using the jack handle.
1. Put the jack handle (1) inside of
the tire hold-down wing bolt.
2. Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise with the jack
handle.
Changing tires
A vehicle can slip or roll off of a
jack causing serious injury or
death to you or those nearby.
Take the following safety pre-
cautions:
• Never place any portion of
your body under a vehicle that
is supported by a jack.
• NEVER attempt to change a
tire in the lane of traffic.
ALWAYS move the vehicle
completely off the road on
level, firm ground away from
traffic before trying to change
a tire. If you cannot find a
level, firm place off the road,
call a towing service for assis-
tance.
• Be sure to use the jack pro-
vided with the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• ALWAYS place the jack on the
designated jacking positions
on the vehicle and NEVER on
the bumpers or any other part
of the vehicle for jacking sup-
port.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Keep children away from the
road and the vehicle.
WARNING
OLF064005
6-17
What to do in an emergency
Follow these steps to change your
vehicle’s tire:
1. Park on a level, firm surface.
2. Move the shift lever into P(Park),
apply the parking brake, and place
the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
3. Press the hazard warning flasher
button.
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
tire diagonally opposite of the tire
you are changing.
6. Insert the flat tip on the jack han-
dle (or screwdriver) into the
groove of the wheel cap and pry
gently to remove the wheel cap (If
equipped).
6
OLF064007
Block
OLF064009
6-18
What to do in an emergency
7. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each in the
order shown above, but do not
remove any lug nuts until the tire
has been raised off of the ground.
8. Place the jack at the designated
jacking position under the frame
closest to the tire you are chang-
ing. The jacking positions are
plates welded to the frame with
two notches and two dimples.
Never jack any other position or
part of the vehicle. It may damage
to the side seal molding.
9. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire clears the
ground. Make sure the vehicle is
stable on the jack.
OLF064010 OLF064011N OLF064012
■ Front ■ Rear
6-19
What to do in an emergency
6
10. Loosen the lug nuts with the
wheel lug nut wrench and
remove them with your fingers.
Remove the wheel from the
studs and lay it flat on the ground
out of the way. Remove any dirt
or debris from the studs, mount-
ing surfaces, and wheel.
11. Install the spare tire onto the
studs of the hub.
12.Tighten the lug nuts with your fin-
gers onto the studs with the
smaller end of the lug nuts clos-
est to the wheel.
13. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the jack handle coun-
terclockwise.
14. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. Double-check each lug
nut until they are tight. After
changing tires, have an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer tighten the
lug nuts to their proper torque as
soon as possible. The wheel lug
nut should be tightened to
65~79 lbf
•ft (9~11 kgf•m).
If you have a tire gauge, check the
tire pressure (see “Tires and Wheels”
in chapter 8 for tire pressure instruc-
tions.). If the pressure is lower or
higher than recommended, drive
slowly to the nearest service station
and adjust it to the recommended
pressure. Always reinstall the valve
cap after checking or adjusting tire
pressure. If the cap is not replaced,
air may leak from the tire. If you lose
a valve cap, buy another and install it
as soon as possible. After changing
tires, secure the flat tire and return
the jack and tools to their proper stor-
age locations.
Check the tire pressure as soon
as possible after installing a spare
tire. Adjust it to the recommended
pressure.
NOTICE
OLF064013
■ Rear
6-20
What to do in an emergency
If any of the equipment such as the
jack, lug nuts, studs, or other equip-
ment is damaged or in poor condi-
tion, do not attempt to change the
tire and call for assistance.
Use of compact spare tires
(if equipped)
Compact spare tires are designed for
emergency use only. Drive carefully
on the compact spare tire and
always follow the safety precautions.
To prevent compact spare tire
failure and loss of control pos-
sibly resulting in an accident:
• Use the compact spare tire
only in an emergency.
• NEVER operate your vehicle
over 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s
maximum load rating or the
load carrying capacity shown
on the sidewall of the com-
pact spare tire.
• Do not use the compact spare
tire continuously. Repair or
replace the original tire as
soon as possible to avoid fail-
ure of the compact spare tire.
WARNING
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the studs and lug nuts. Make
certain during tire changing
that the same nuts that were
removed are reinstalled. If you
have to replace your lug nuts
make sure they have metric
threads to avoid damaging the
studs and ensure the wheel is
properly secured to the hub.
Consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
CAUTION
6-21
What to do in an emergency
6
When driving with the compact spare
tire mounted to your vehicle:
• Check the tire pressure after
installing the compact spare tire.
The compact spare tire should be
inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
When the original tire and wheel
are repaired and reinstalled on the
vehicle,the lug nut torque must be
set correctly. The correct lug nut
tightening torque is 65-79 lbf
•ft (9-
11 kgf•m).
NOTICE
To prevent damaging the com-
pact spare tire and your vehicle:
• Drive slowly enough for the
road conditions to avoid all
hazards, such as a potholes
or debris.
• Avoid driving over obstacles.
The compact spare tire diame-
ter is smaller than the diame-
ter of a conventional tire and
reduces the ground clearance
approximately 1 inch (25 mm).
• Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare tire. Because
of the smaller size, a tire chain
will not fit properly.
• Do not use the compact spare
tire on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow
tires, wheel covers or trim
rings be used with the com-
pact spare wheel.
CAUTION
6-22
What to do in an emergency
Jack label
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3.When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4.When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6.The designated locations under
the frame
7.When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transmission or move
the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion on vehicles with automatic
transmission.
9.The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacture
11. Production date
12.Representative company and
address
The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
OHYK065010
OHYK065011
OHYK064002
• Type A
■ Example
• Type B
• Type C
6-23
What to do in an emergency
With Tire Mobility Kit
(TMK, if equipped)
For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary fix
to the tire and the tire should be
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
Introduction
With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tire
puncture.
The compressor and sealing com-
pound system effectively and com-
fortably seals most punctures in a
passenger car tire caused by nails
or similar objects and reinflates the
tire.
After you ensure that the tire is prop-
erly sealed you can drive cautiously
on the tire (distance up to 120 miles
(200 km)) at a max.speed of (50mph
(80 km/h)) in order to reach a service
station or tire dealer for the tire
replacement.
6
OLF064014
OLF064015
One sealant bottle for one tire
When two or more tires are flat,
do not use the tire mobility kit
because the supported one
sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is
only used for one flat tire.
CAUTION
Tire wall
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit
to repair punctures in the tire
walls.This can result in an acci-
dent due to tire failure.
WARNING
Temporary fix
Have your tire repaired as soon
as possible. The tire may lose
air pressure at any time after
inflating with the Tire Mobility
Kit.
WARNING
6-24
It is possible that some tires, espe-
cially with larger punctures or dam-
age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed
completely.
Air pressure loss in the tire may
adversely affect tire performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in
use.
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed
or intended as a permanent tire
repair method and is to be used for
one tire only.
This instruction shows you step by
step how to temporarily seal the
puncture simply and reliably.
Read the section "Notes on the safe
use of the Tire Mobility Kit".
Notes on the safe use of the
Tire Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the
Tire Mobility Kit away from moving
traffic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your park-
ing brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for
sealing/inflation passenger car
tires.Only punctured areas located
within the tread region of the tire
can be sealed using the tire mobil-
ity kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicy-
cles or any other type of tires.
• When the tire and wheel are dam-
aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit
for your safety.
• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not
be effective for tire damage larger
than approximately 0.24 inch (6
mm).
Please contact the nearest
HYUNDAI dealership if the tire
cannot be made roadworthy with
the Tire Mobility Kit.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a
tire is severely damaged by driving
run flat or with insufficient air pres-
sure.
• Do not remove any foreign objects
such as nails or screws that have
penetrated the tire.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit
unattended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor run-
ning for more than 10 minutes at a
time or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if
the ambient temperature is below
-22°F (-30°C).
What to do in an emergency
6-25
What to do in an emergency
0. Speed restriction label
1.Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
3. Connectors and cable for power
outlet direct connection
4. Holder for the sealant bottle
5. Compressor
6. ON/OFF switch
7. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure
8. Screw cap for reducing tire infla-
tion pressure
9. Hose to connect compressor and
sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
Strictly follow the specified
sequence, otherwise the sealant
may escape under high pressure.
6
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit
OEL069020
Do not use the tire sealant after
the sealant has expired (i.e.
pasted the expiration date on
the sealant container). This can
increase the risk of tire failure.
WARNING
• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.
WARNING
6-26
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
1. Detach the speed restriction label
(0) from the sealant bottle (1), and
place it in a highly visible place
inside the vehicle such as on the
steering wheel to remind the driv-
er not to drive too fast.
2. Screw the connection hose (9)
onto the connector of the sealant
bottle.
3. Ensure that the screw cap (8) is
closed.
4. Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the flat tire and screw the
filling hose (2) of the sealant bottle
onto the valve.
What to do in an emergency
OLMF064104 OLF064017
6-27
What to do in an emergency
5. Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing (4) of the compressor so
that the bottle is upright.
6. Ensure that the compressor is
switched off, position 0.
7. Plug the compressor power cord
(3) into the vehicle power outlet.
8. With the ignition switch in the ON
position, switch on the compres-
sor and let it run for approximately
5~7 minutes to fill the sealant up
to proper pressure. (refer to the
Tire and Wheels, chapter 8). The
inflation pressure of the tire after
filling is unimportant and will be
checked/corrected later.
Be careful not to overinflate the
tire and stay away from the tire
when filling it.
6
OLMF064105 OLF064019N
Securely install the sealant fill-
ing hose to the valve. If not,
sealant may flow backward,
possibly clogging the filling
hose.
CAUTION
OHY015012
6-28
9. Switch off the compressor.
10.Detach the hoses from the
sealant bottle connector and
from the tire valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-
age location in the vehicle.
Distributing the sealant
11. Immediately drive approximately
4~6miles (7~10km or about 10
minutes) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). If possible, do not fall
below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
While driving, if you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise, reduce your speed and drive
with caution until you can safely pull
off of the side of the road.
Call for road side service or towing.
When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,
the tire pressure sensors and wheel
may be damaged by sealant, have it
inspected at an authorized dealer.
Checking the tire inflation pres-
sure
1. After driving approximately
4~6miles (7~10km or about
10 minutes), stop at a safe loca-
tion.
2. Connect hose (9) of the compres-
sor directly to the tire valve.
3. Plug the compressor power cord
into the vehicle power outlet.
What to do in an emergency
OLF064020
Do not attempt to drive your
vehicle if the tire pressure is
below 29 psi (200kpa). This
could result in an accident due
to sudden tire failure.
CAUTION
Do not leave your vehicle run-
ning in a poorly ventilated area
for extended periods of time.
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation can occur.
WARNING
6-29
What to do in an emergency
4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the recommended tire inflation.
With the ignition switched on, pro-
ceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pres-
sure:
Switch on the compressor, posi-
tion to [I]. To check the current
inflation pressure setting, briefly
switch off the compressor.
- To reduce the inflation pres-
sure:
Loosen the screw cap (8) on the
compressor hose.
Information
The pressure gauge may show higher
than actual reading when the com-
pressor is running. To get an accurate
tire pressure, the compressor needs to
be turned off.
i
6
When you use the Tire Mobility
Kit including sealant not
approved by HYUNDAI, the tire
pressure sensors may be dam-
aged by sealant.The sealant on
the tire pressure sensor and
wheel should be removed when
you replace the tire with a new
one and inspect the tire pres-
sure sensors at an authorized
dealer.
CAUTION
6-30
What to do in an emergency
Towing Service
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow-truck service.
Proper lifting and towing procedures
are necessary to prevent damage to
the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies
or flatbed is recommended.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground
(without dollies) and the front wheels
off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
pension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
front wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
TTOOWWIINNGG
OLF064021N
A
B
C
Dolly
OLF064023
OLF064022
• Do not tow the vehicle with
the front wheels on the
ground as this may cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
CAUTION
6-31
What to do in an emergency
6
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Place the ignition switch in the
ACC position.
2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Emergency Towing
(if equipped)
If towing is necessary, we recom-
mend you to have it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency tow-
ing hook at the rear of the vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle with a cable or chain. A
driver must be in the vehicle to steer
it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
Failure to place the transmis-
sion shift lever in N (Neutral)
may cause internal damage to
the transmission.
CAUTION
OLF064027
■ Rear
6-32
What to do in an emergency
Always follow these emergency tow-
ing precautions:
• Place the ignition switch in the
ACC position so the steering
wheel is not locked.
• Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Depress the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will
have reduced braking perform-
ance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steer-
ing system will be disabled.
• Use a vehicle heavier than your
own to tow your vehicle.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or dam-
aged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady
and even force.
• Use a towing cable or chain less
than 16 feet (5 m) long. Attach a
white or red cloth (about 12 inches
(30 cm) wide) in the middle of the
cable or chain for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so the towing cable
or chain remains tight during tow-
ing.
• Before towing, check the automat-
ic transmission for fluid leaks under
your vehicle.If the automatic trans-
mission fluid is leaking, flatbed
equipment or a towing dolly must
be used.
ODH063025
To avoid damage to your vehicle
and vehicle components when
towing:
• Always pull straight ahead
when using the towing hooks.
Do not pull from the side or at
a vertical angle.
• Do not use the towing hooks
to pull a vehicle out of mud,
sand or other conditions from
which the vehicle cannot be
driven out under its own
power.
• Limit the vehicle speed to 10
mph (15 km/h) and drive less
than 1 mile (1.5 km) when tow-
ing to avoid serious damage
to the automatic transmis-
sion.
CAUTION
7
Maintenance
7
Maintenance
Engine Compartment ............................................7-3
Maintenance Services ...........................................7-6
Owner’s Responsibility.....................................................7-6
Owner Maintenance Precautions..................................7-6
Owner Maintenance ..............................................7-7
Owner Maintenance Schedule.......................................7-8
Scheduled Maintenance Services........................7-9
Normal Maintenance Schedule....................................7-10
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions........7-20
Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items..7-21
Engine Oil and Filter.......................................................7-21
Drive Belts.........................................................................7-21
Fuel Filter..........................................................................7-21
Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and Connections ..................7-21
Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap...................................7-21
Air Cleaner Filter.............................................................7-21
Spark Plugs.......................................................................7-21
Valve Clearance ...............................................................7-22
Cooling System ................................................................7-22
Engine Coolant.................................................................7-22
Automatic Transmission Fluid ......................................7-22
Ecoshift Dual Clutch Transmission Fluid ...................7-22
Brake hoses and Lines ..................................................7-23
Brake Fluid........................................................................7-23
Parking Brake...................................................................7-23
Brake Discs, Pads, Calipers and Rotors.....................7-23
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler.............................................7-23
Suspension Mounting Bolts..........................................7-23
Steering Gear Box, Linkage &
Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint .........................................7-23
Drive Shafts and Boots .................................................7-23
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ........................................7-23
Engine Oil..............................................................7-24
Checking the Engine Oil Level.....................................7-24
Checking the Engine Oil and Filter.............................7-26
Engine Coolant .....................................................7-27
Checking the Engine Coolant Level............................7-27
Changing Engine Coolant ..............................................7-29
Brake Fluid............................................................7-30
Checking the Brake Fluid Level...................................7-30
Washer Fluid.........................................................7-31
Checking the Washer Fluid Level................................7-31
Parking Brake.......................................................7-31
Checking the Parking Brake.........................................7-31
Air Cleaner ............................................................7-32
Filter Replacement..........................................................7-32
Climate Control Air Filter....................................7-34
Filter Inspection...............................................................7-34
7
7
Wiper Blades.........................................................7-36
Blade Inspection ..............................................................7-36
Blade Replacement .........................................................7-36
Battery...................................................................7-38
For Best Battery Service ..............................................7-39
Battery Recharging ........................................................7-39
Reset features .................................................................7-40
Tires and Wheels .................................................7-41
Tire Care............................................................................7-41
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures...........7-42
Check Tire Inflation Pressure ......................................7-43
Tire Rotation.....................................................................7-44
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............................7-45
Tire Replacement ............................................................7-45
Wheel Replacement ........................................................7-46
Tire Traction.....................................................................7-46
Tire Maintenance............................................................7-47
Tire Sidewall Labeling ....................................................7-47
Tire Terminology and Definitions................................7-51
All Season Tires...............................................................7-54
Summer Tires ...................................................................7-54
Snow Tires ........................................................................7-54
Radial-Ply Tires...............................................................7-55
Low Aspect Ratio Tires..................................................7-55
Fuses......................................................................7-57
Instrument Panel Fuse Replacement..........................7-58
Engine Compartment Panel Fuse Replacement.......7-59
Fuse/Relay Panel Description......................................7-61
Light Bulbs ............................................................7-69
Headlamp, Position Lamp, Turn Signal Lamp and
Side Marker Light Bulb Replacement ........................7-70
Side Repeater Lamp Replacement..............................7-75
Rear Combination Light Bulb Replacement ..............7-76
High Mounted Stop Lamp .............................................7-79
License Plate Light Bulb Replacement ......................7-80
Interior Light Bulb Replacement .................................7-80
Appearance Care..................................................7-82
Exterior Care....................................................................7-82
Interior Care .....................................................................7-87
Emission Control System ....................................7-89
Crankcase Emission Control System ..........................7-89
Evaporative Emission Control System Including
Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)............7-89
Exhaust Emission Control System ..............................7-90
California Perchlorate Notice.............................7-93
7-3
7
Maintenance
EENNGGIINNEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Positive battery terminal
5. Negative battery terminal
6. Fuse box
7. Air cleaner
8. Radiator cap
9. Engine coolant reservoir
10.Windshield washer fluid reservoir
The actual engine compartment in the vehi-
cle may differ from the illustration.
■■
1.6 T-GDI
OLF014009N
7-4
Maintenance
■■
2.0 T-GDI
1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Positive battery terminal
5. Negative battery terminal
6. Fuse box
7. Air cleaner
8. Radiator cap
9. Engine coolant reservoir
10.Windshield washer fluid reservoir
The actual engine compartment in the vehi-
cle may differ from the illustration.
OLF014008N
7
Maintenance
7-5
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Radiator cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Engine oil filler cap
7.Windshield washer fluid reservoir
8. Fuse box
9. Battery
The actual engine compartment in the
vehicle may differ from the illustration.
■■
2.4 GDI
OLF014006
7-6
Maintenance
MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE SSEERRVVIICCEESS
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever per-
forming any maintenance or inspec-
tion procedures.
We recommend you have your vehi-
cle maintained and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An
authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets
HYUNDAI's high service quality
standards and receives technical
support from HYUNDAI in order to
provide you with a high level of serv-
ice satisfaction.
Owner’s Responsibility
Maintenance service and record reten-
tion are the owner’s responsibility.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accor-
dance with the scheduled mainte-
nance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this infor-
mation to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle war-
ranties.
Detailed warranty information is pro-
vided in your Owner's Handbook &
Warranty Information booklet.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
Owner Maintenance
Precautions
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-
cient servicing may result in opera-
tional problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury. This
chapter provides instructions only for
the maintenance items that are easy
to perform. Several procedures can
be done only by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer with special tools.
Your vehicle should not be modified
in any way. Such modifications may
adversely affect the performance,
safety or durability of your vehicle
and may, in addition, violate condi-
tions of the limited warranties cover-
ing the vehicle.
Certain modifications may also be in
violation of regulations established by
the U.S.Department of Transportation
and other federal or state agencies.
Improper owner maintenance dur-
ing the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details,
read the separate Owner's
Handbook & Warranty Information
booklet provided with the vehicle.
If you're unsure about any service
or maintenance procedure, have it
done by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
NOTICE
7-7
7
Maintenance
OOWWNNEERR MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per-
formed by the owner or an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer at the frequen-
cies indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehi-
cle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your deal-
er as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance vehicle
checks are generally not covered by
warranties and you may be charged
for labor, parts and lubricants used.
Performing maintenance work
on a vehicle can be dangerous.
If you lack sufficient knowledge
and experience or the proper
tools and equipment to do the
work, have it done by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer. ALWAYS
follow these precautions for
performing maintenance work:
• Park your vehicle on level
ground, move the shift lever
into the P (Park, for automatic
transmission vehicle) posi-
tion, apply the parking brake,
place the ignition switch in
the LOCK/OFF position.
• Block the tires (front and back)
to prevent the vehicle from
moving.
Remove loose clothing or jew-
elry that can become entan-
gled in moving parts.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• If you must run the engine
during maintenance, do so
out doors or in an area with
plenty of ventilation.
• Keep flames, sparks, or smok-
ing materials away from the
battery and fuel-related parts.
7-8
Maintenance
Owner Maintenance Schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Check for low or under-inflated
tires.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice if there is any
increased steering effort or loose-
ness in the steering wheel, or
change in its straight-ahead posi-
tion.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or "pulls" to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or "hard-to-push" brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transmission
occurs, check the transmission
fluid level.
• Check the automatic transmission
/ecoshift dual clutch transmission
P (Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare for tires
that are worn, show uneven wear,
or are damaged.
• Check for loose wheel lug nuts.
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot.This may result in
coolant being blown out of the
opening and cause serious
burns and other injuries.
WARNING
7-9
7
Maintenance
At least twice a year:
(i.e., every Spring and Fall)
• Check radiator, heater and air condi-
tioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened
with washer fluid.
• Check headlamp alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the seat belts for wear and
function.
At least once a year:
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and hood
hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weather
strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transmission linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule
if the vehicle is usually operated where
none of the following conditions apply.
If any of the following conditions apply,
you must follow the Maintenance
Under Severe Usage Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extreme-
ly humid climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy
city traffic during hot weather
above 90°F (32°C).
For additional information or assis-
tance see your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
SSCCHHEEDDUULLEEDD MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE
SSEERRVVIICCEESS
Maintenance
7-10
22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 18 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)
Normal Maintenance Schedule
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.
Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty.Where both mileage and time are shown, the
frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
(Continued)
*
3
Engine oil (1.6 TGDI/2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
*
4
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
(Continued)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
7
Maintenance
7-11
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 30 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Inspect ecoshift dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)
*
1
Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but peri-
odic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on
fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restric-
tion, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter
immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*
3
Engine oil (1.6 TGDI/2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
*
4
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
1
❑ Inspect fuel cap, fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
1
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)
Maintenance
7-12
45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 36 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated), (1.6TGDI/2.0TGDI)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 42 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)
*
3
Engine oil (1.6 TGDI/2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
*
4
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
7
Maintenance
7-13
60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
1
❑ Inspect fuel cap, fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
1
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect valve clearance (if equipped) *
2
(Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months)
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
(Continued)
67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 54 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
*
1
Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but peri-
odic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on
fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restric-
tion, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter
immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*
2
Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if nec-
essary.
*
3
Engine oil (16.TGDI/2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
*
4
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)
Maintenance
7-14
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Inspect ecoshift dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)
82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 66 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)
*
3
Engine oil (1.6 TGDI/2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
*
4
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
7
Maintenance
7-15
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 78 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)
90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 72 months
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
1
❑ Inspect fuel cap, fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
1
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect drive belts (First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated), (1.6TGDI/2.0TGDI)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)
*
1
Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but peri-
odic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on
fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restric-
tion, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter
immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*
3
Engine oil (1.6 TGDI/2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
*
4
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
Maintenance
7-16
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) (2.4 GDI)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months
112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 90 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Inspect ecoshift dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months
*
3
Engine oil (1.6 TGDI/2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
*
4
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
7
Maintenance
7-17
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 96 months
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
1
❑ Inspect fuel cap, fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
1
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect valve clearance (if equipped) *
2
(Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months)
❑ Inspect drive belts (First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)
(Continued)
*
1
Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but period-
ic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel
quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surg-
ing, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately
regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er for details.
*
2
Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
*
3
Engine oil (1.6 TGDI/2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 6
months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
*
4
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recom-
mended.Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with
information on how to use them.Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 102 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)
(Continued)
❑ Replace coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)
Maintenance
7-18
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 108 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated), (1.6TGDI/2.0TGDI)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)
142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 114 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)
*
3
Engine oil (1.6 TGDI/2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
*
4
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
7
Maintenance
7-19
150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 120 months
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
1
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
1
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose
- Turbo GDI (Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Inspect ecoshift dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
3
(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)
❑ Replace coolant (First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 60 months
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
4
(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)
Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
*
1
Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but peri-
odic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on
fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restric-
tion, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter
immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*
3
Engine oil (1.6 TGDI/2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
*
4
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-
ommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
Maintenance
7-20
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions
Severe Driving Conditions
A -Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km) in normal
temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freezing temperature
B -Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread roads
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold
weather
E -Driving in sandy areas
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)
G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing
J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
K -Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS DRIVING CONDITION
Engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) R Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, J, K
Engine oil and filter (1.6 TGDI/2.0 TGDI) R Every 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 3 months
Air cleaner filter R More frequently C, E
Spark plugs R More frequently B, H
Automatic transmission fluid R Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) A, C, E, F, G, I
Ecoshift dual clutch transmission fluid R Every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) C, E, F, G, H, I, J
Front brake disc/pads, calipers I More frequently C, D, G, H
Rear brake disc/pads I More frequently C, D, G, F
Parking brake I More frequently C, D, G, H
Steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,
upper arm ball joint
I More frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Drive shafts and boots I Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit) R More frequently C, E
7-21
7
Maintenance
EEXXPPLLAANNAATTIIOONN OOFF SSCCHHEEDDUULLEEDD MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE IITTEEMMSS
Engine Oil and Filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the car
is being driven in severe conditions,
more frequent oil and filter changes
are required.
Drive Belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Drive belts should be checked peri-
odically for proper tension and
adjusted as necessary.
Fuel Filter
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven,
damage the emission system and
cause multiple issues such as hard
starting. If an excessive amount of
foreign matter accumulates in the
fuel tank, the filter may require
replacement more frequently. After
installing a new filter, run the engine
for several minutes, and check for
leaks at the connections. Fuel filters
should be installed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and
Connections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and dam-
age. Have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer replace any damaged or leak-
ing parts immediately.
Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler
Cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those inter-
vals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure a new vapor
hose or fuel filler cap is correctly
replaced.
Air Cleaner Filter
A genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter
is recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Spark Plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
7-22
Maintenance
Valve Clearance (if equipped)
Inspect for excessive valve noise
and/or engine vibration and adjust if
necessary. Have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer perform the opera-
tion.
Cooling System
Check cooling system components,
such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage
and damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Engine Coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Automatic transmission fluid should
not be checked under normal usage
conditions. But in severe conditions,
the fluid should be changed at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer in accor-
dance to the scheduled maintenance
at the beginning of this chapter.
Automatic transmission fluid
color is basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the auto-
matic transmission fluid will begin
to look darker. This is a normal
condition and you should not
judge the need to replace the fluid
based upon the changed color.
Ecoshift dual clutch transmis-
sion Fluid
Inspect the Ecoshift dual clutch
transmission fluid according to the
maintenance schedule.
NOTICE
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transmission
malfunction and failure. Use
only the specified automatic
transmission fluid (refer to
"Recommended Lubricants and
Capacities" in chapter 8).
CAUTION
7-23
7
Maintenance
Brake Hoses and Lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-
ed or damaged parts immediately.
Brake Fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir. The level should be
between the MIN and the MAX
marks on the side of the reservoir.
Use only hydraulic brake fluid con-
forming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifi-
cation.
Parking Brake
Inspect the parking brake system
including the parking brake pedal
and cables.
Brake Discs, Pads, Calipers
and Rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-
rioration, or damage. Start the
engine and listen carefully for any
exhaust gas leakage. Tighten con-
nections or replace parts as neces-
sary.
Suspension Mounting Bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Steering Gear Box, Linkage &
Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint
With the vehicle stopped and the
engine off, check for excessive free-
play in the steering wheel. Check the
linkage for bends or damage. Check
the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Drive Shafts and Boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and damage.
7-24
Maintenance
EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL
Checking the Engine Oil Level
1. Follow all of the oil manufacturer’s
precautions.
2. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground in P (Park) with the parking
brake set and the wheels blocked.
3.Turn the engine on and allow the
engine to reach normal operating
temperature.
4.Turn the engine off and wait about
five minutes for the oil to return to
the oil pan.
5. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
6. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
7. If it is near or at L, add enough oil
to bring the level to F.
OLF076076
OLF074003
■ 1.6 T-GDI
OLF076077N
■ 2.0 T-GDI
■ 2.4 GDI
7-25
7
Maintenance
To prevent damage to your
engine:
• Do not overfill with engine oil.
Add oil in small quantities and
recheck level to ensure engine
is not overfilled.
• Do not spill engine oil when
adding or changing engine oil.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine
components. Wipe off spilled oil
immediately
Use only the specified engine oil
(refer to "Recommended Lubricants
and Capacities" in chapter 8).
NOTICE
NOTICE
OLF074078N
OLF074005
■ 1.6 T-GDI
OLF074079N
■ 2.0 T-GDI
■ 2.4 GDI
Checking the Engine Oil and
Filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
according to the Maintenance
Schedule at the beginning of this
chapter.
7-26
Maintenance
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Engine oil contains chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects
and reproductive harm. Used
engine oil may cause irritation
or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for pro-
longed periods of time. Always
protect your skin by washing
your hands thoroughly with
soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used
oil.
WARNING
7-27
7
Maintenance
EENNGGIINNEE CCOOOOLLAANNTT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at
the beginning of the winter season
and before traveling to a colder cli-
mate.
Checking the Engine Coolant
Level
Never remove the
radiator cap or the
drain plug while the
engine and radiator
are hot. Hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure, causing serious
injury.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
Turn the engine off and wait
until the engine cools down.
Use extreme care when remov-
ing the radiator cap. Wrap a
thick towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to the
first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the
cap, using a thick towel, and
continue turning counterclock-
wise to remove it.
OLF074007N
7-28
Maintenance
The electric motor for the cooling fan
is controlled by engine coolant tem-
perature, refrigerant pressure and
vehicle speed.As the engine coolant
temperature decreases, the electric
motor will automatically shut off.This
is a normal condition. If your vehicle
is equipped with GDI, the electric
motor for the cooling fan may begin
to operate at any time and continue
to operate until you disconnect the
negative battery cable.
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between the F and the L marks on
the side of the coolant reservoir
when the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (deionized) water to bring
the level to the F mark, but do not
overfill. If frequent additions are
required, we recommend that you
see an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
for a cooling system inspection.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water, distilled water or
soft water for your vehicle and
never mix hard water in the coolant
filled at the factory.
• An improper coolant mixture can
result in severe malfunction or
engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol
with phosphate based coolant to
prevent corrosion and freezing.
• Do not use alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the spec-
ified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
The electric motor for
the cooling fan may
continue to operate
or start up when the
engine is not running
and can cause serious injury.
Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from the rotating fan
blades of the cooling fan.
WARNING
OLF074006N
7-29
7
Maintenance
For mixing percentage, refer to the
following table:
Information
If in doubt about the mix ratio, a 50%
water and 50% antifreeze mix is the
easiest to mix together as it will be the
same quantity of each. It is suitable to
use for most temperature ranges of -
31°F and higher.
Changing Engine Coolant
Have coolant changed by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
To prevent damage to engine
parts, put a thick towel around the
radiator cap before refilling the
coolant to prevent the coolant
from overflowing into engine
parts, such as the generator.
NOTICE
i
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
5°F (-15°C) 35 65
-13°F (-25°C) 40 60
-31°F (-35°C) 50 50
-49°F (-45°C) 60 40
Do not use engine coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
Engine coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may
cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
Engine coolant may also cause
damage to paint and body trim.
WARNING
7-30
Maintenance
BBRRAAKKEE FFLLUUIIDD
Checking the Brake Fluid Level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically.The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake fluid, clean the
area around the reservoir cap thor-
oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-
ination.
If the level is low, add the specified
brake fluid to the MAX level.The level
will fall with accumulated mileage.
This is a normal condition associated
with the wear of the brake linings. If
the fluid level is excessively low, have
the brake system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not allow brake fluid to con-
tact the vehicle’s body paint, as
paint damage will result.
• Brake fluid, which has been
exposed to open air for an
extended time should NEVER be
used as its quality cannot be
guaranteed. It should be dis-
posed of properly.
• Do not use the wrong kind of
brake fluid. A few drops of miner-
al based oil,such as engine oil, in
your brake system can damage
brake system parts.
Information
Use only the specified brake fluid
(refer to "Recommended Lubricants
and Capacities" in chapter 8).
i
NOTICE
If the brake system requires fre-
quent additions of fluid this
could indicate a leak in the
brake system. Have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Do not allow brake fluid to come
in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid comes in contact
with your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least 15
minutes and get immediate
medical attention.
WARNING
OLF074008N
7-31
7
Maintenance
WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD
Checking the Washer Fluid
Level
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-
sary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
Checking the Parking Brake
Foot type
Check whether the stroke is within
specification when the parking brake
pedal is depressed with 44 lb (20 kg,
196 N) of force. Also, the parking
brake alone should securely hold the
vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the
stroke is more or less than specified,
have the parking brake adjusted by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Stroke : 3 notch
OLF074009N
ODH053142
PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE
To prevent serious injury or
death, take the following safety
precautions when using washer
fluid:
• Do not use engine coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
Engine coolant can severely
obscure visibility when
sprayed on the windshield and
may cause loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident or
damage to paint and body trim.
• Do not allow sparks or flame to
contact the washer fluid or the
washer fluid reservoir. Washer
fluid may contain alcohol and
can be flammable.
• Do not drink washer fluid and
avoid contact with skin.
Washer fluid is poisonous to
humans and animals.
• Keep washer fluid away from
children and animals.
WARNING
7-32
Maintenance
AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR
Filter Replacement
The air cleaner filter can be cleaned
for inspection using compressed air.
Do not attempt to wash or to rinse it,
as water will damage the filter.
If soiled, the air cleaner filter must be
replaced.
1.Remove the air cleaner filter cover.
2.Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3.Pull down the lever to the
UNLOCK position.
OLF074010
OLF074011 OLF074012
7-33
7
Maintenance
4. Replace the air cleaner filter. 5. Pull up the lever (1) to the LOCK
position.
6. Install the cover and make sure
the inner hooks (2) to be inserted
to holes (3).
7.Check if the cover is firmly
installed.
Information
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-
ment more often than the usual rec-
ommended intervals (refer to
"Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions" in this chapter).
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
filter removed.This will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• Use HYUNDAI genuine parts,
use of non-genuine parts could
damage the air flow sensor.
NOTICE
i
OLF074013 OLF074101K
7-34
Maintenance
CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL AAIIRR FFIILLTTEERR
Filter Inspection
The climate control air filter should
be replaced according to the
Maintenance Schedule.If the vehicle
is operated in severely air-polluted
cities or on dusty rough roads for a
long period, it should be inspected
more frequently and replaced earlier.
When you replace the climate control
air filter, replace it performing the fol-
lowing procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components.
1.With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides to allow
the glove box to hang freely on the
hinges.
2. Remove the support rod (1).
OLF074015 OLF074014
7-35
7
Maintenance
3. Remove the climate control air fil-
ter case by pulling out the right
side of the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air fil-
ter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
Install a new climate control air fil-
ter in the correct direction with the
arrow symbol (
↓↓
) facing down-
wards.Otherwise, the climate con-
trol effects may decrease, possi-
bly with a noise.
NOTICE
OLF074107KOLF074016
7-36
Maintenance
WWIIPPEERR BBLLAADDEESS
Blade Inspection
Contamination of either the wind-
shield or the wiper blades with for-
eign matter can reduce the effective-
ness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not
wiping properly, clean both the win-
dow and the blades with a clean
cloth dampened with washer fluid or
clean water.
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, arms or other compo-
nents, do not:
• Use gasoline, kerosene, paint
thinner, or other solvents on or
near them.
• Attempt to move the wipers
manually.
• Use non-specified wiper blades.
Information
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been
known to make the windshield diffi-
cult to clean.
Blade Replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manu-
ally.
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper mal-
function and failure.
NOTICE
NOTICE
i
NOTICE
7-37
7
Maintenance
1. Raise the wiper arm.
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it
may chip or crack the windshield.
2. Lift the wiper blade clip.Then push
down the blade body.
3. Install the new blade assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
4. Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
NOTICE
OLF074017 OLF074018
OLF074019
7-38
Maintenance
BBAATTTTEERRYY
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH to you or bystanders,
always follow these precautions
when working near or handling
the battery:
Always read and follow
instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Wear eye protection
designed to protect the
eyes from acid splashes.
Keep all flames, sparks,
or smoking materials
away from the battery.
Hydrogen is always pres-
ent in battery cells, is
highly combustible, and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of
reach of children.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
Batteries contain sulfu-
ric acid which is highly
corrosive. Do not allow
acid to contact your
eyes, skin or clothing.
If acid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get imme-
diate medical attention. If acid
gets on your skin, thoroughly
wash the area. If you feel pain or
a burning sensation, get med-
ical attention immediately.
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle if your battery is
frozen.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• NEVER attempt to recharge
the battery when the vehicle’s
battery cables are connected
to the battery.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
NEVER touch these compo-
nents with the engine running
or when the ignition is in the
ON position.
7-39
7
Maintenance
• When you do not use the vehicle
for a long time in a low tempera-
ture area, disconnect the battery
and keep it indoors.
• Always charge the battery fully
to prevent battery case damage
in low temperature areas.
For Best Battery Service
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled acid from the bat-
tery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
Battery Recharging
NOTICE
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth
defects and reproductive harm.
Batteries also contain other
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer.
Wash hands after handling.
WARNING
OLF074020
Always follow these instructions
when recharging your vehicle’s
battery to avoid the risk of SERI-
OUS INJURY or DEATH from
explosions or acid burns:
• Before performing mainte-
nance or recharging the bat-
tery,turn off all accessories and
place the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position.
• Keep all flames, sparks, or
smoking materials away from
the battery.
• Always work outdoors or in a
well ventilated area.
• Wear eye protection when
checking the battery during
charging.
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in
a well ventilated area.
(Continued)
WARNING
7-40
Maintenance
By jump starting
After a jump start from a good bat-
tery, idle the vehicle with the head-
lights turned ON for 20-30 minutes
before started driving. The vehicle
may not run properly if you drive it off
before the battery had a chance to
adequately recharge. See "Jump
Starting" in chapter 6 for more infor-
mation on jump starting procedures.
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health.
Dispose the battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
Reset features
Some items need to be reset after
the battery has been discharged or
the battery has been disconnected.
See chapter 3 for:
• Power Windows
• Trip Computer
• Climate Control System
• Clock
• Audio System
• Sunroof
i
(Continued)
• Watch the battery during
charging, and stop or reduce
the charging rate if the battery
cells begin boiling violently.
• The negative battery cable
must be removed first and
installed last when the battery
is disconnected. Disconnect
the battery charger in the fol-
lowing order:
(1) Turn off the battery charger
main switch.
(2) Unhook the negative
clamp from the negative
battery terminal.
(3) Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery
terminal.
•
Always use a genuine HYUNDAI
approved battery when you
replace the battery.
7-41
7
Maintenance
TTIIRREESS AANNDD WWHHEEEELLSS
Tire Care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within the
load limits and weight distribution rec-
ommended for your vehicle.
(Continued)
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are dam-
aged. Worn tires can cause
loss of braking effectiveness,
steering) control, or traction.
• ALWAYS replace tires with the
same size as each tire that
was originally supplied with
this vehicle. Using tires and
wheels other than the recom-
mended sizes could cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics, poor vehicle control, or
negatively affect your vehi-
cle’s Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) resulting in a serious
accident.
Tire failure may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident. To reduce risk of
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH,
take the following precautions:
• Inspect your tires monthly for
proper inflation as well as
wear and damage.
• The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can
be found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the dri-
ver’s side center pillar. Always
use a tire pressure gauge to
measure tire pressure. Tires
with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly caus-
ing poor handling.
• Check the pressure of the
spare every time you check
the pressure of the other tires
on your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING
7-42
Maintenance
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver’s side center
pillar.
Recommended Cold Tire
Inflation Pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. "Cold tires" means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
one mile (1.6 km).
Warm tires normally exceed recom-
mended cold tire pressures by 4 to 6
psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not release air
from warm tires to adjust the pres-
sure or the tires will be under-inflat-
ed. For recommended inflation pres-
sure, refer to "Tire and Wheels" in
chapter 8.
Recommended pressures must
be maintained for the best ride,
vehicle handling, and minimum
tire wear.
Over-inflation or under-inflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure that
could result in loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
Severe under-inflation can lead
to severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident. This
risk is much higher on hot days
and when driving for long peri-
ods at high speeds.
WARNING
OLF084007N
7-43
7
Maintenance
Check Tire Inflation Pressure
Check your tires, including the spare
tire, once a month or more.
How to check
Use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to check tire pressure. You
can not tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflat-
ed when they are under-inflated.
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem.Press the tire gauge firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement.If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended pressure. Make sure to
put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. Without the valve cap, dirt or
moisture could get into the valve
core and cause air leakage.If a valve
cap is missing, install a new one as
soon as possible.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. Without the valve
cap, dirt or moisture could get into
the valve core and cause air leakage.
If a valve cap is missing, install a new
one as soon as possible.
• Under-inflation results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation is also
possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Over-inflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread,
and a greater possibility of
damage from road hazards.
CAUTION
7-44
Maintenance
Tire Rotation
To equalize tread wear, HYUNDAI
recommends that the tires be rotated
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage.Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible.After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness (proper torque is
65-79 lb.ft [9-11 kg.m]).
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Information
The outside and inside of the unsym-
metrical tire is distinguishable. When
installing an unsymmetrical tire, be
sure to install the side marked "out-
side" face the outside. If the side
marked "inside" is installed on the
outside, it will have a bad effect on
vehicle performance.
i
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident.
WARNING
ODH073802
■ Without a spare tire
7-45
7
Maintenance
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Improper wheel weights can dam-
age your vehicle’s aluminum
wheels. Use only approved wheel
weights.
Tire Replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread.This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire.Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
NOTICE
OLMB073027
Tread wear indicator
To reduce the risk of DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY:
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are
damaged. Worn tires can
cause loss of braking effec-
tiveness, steering control, and
traction.
• Always replace tires with the
same size as each tire that
was originally supplied with
this vehicle. Using tires and
wheels other than the recom-
mended sizes could cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics, poor vehicle control, or
negatively affect your vehi-
cle’s Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) resulting in a serious
accident.
(Continued)
WARNING
7-46
Maintenance
Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
Wheel Replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
Tire Traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
(Continued)
• When replacing tires (or
wheels), it is recommended to
replace the two front or two
rear tires (or wheels) as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle's
handling.
• Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, HYUNDAI recommends
that tires be replaced after six
(6) years of normal service.
• Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading condi-
tions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
warning may cause sudden
tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident.
The original tire should be
repaired or replaced as soon as
possible to avoid failure of the
spare and loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident.The
compact spare tire is for emer-
gency use only. Do not operate
your vehicle over 50 mph (80
km/h) when using the compact
spare tire.
WARNING
7-47
7
Maintenance
Tire Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
2.Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
205/65R16 95H
205 - Tire width in millimeters.
65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
95 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
OLMB073028
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
7-48
Maintenance
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one.The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.5JX16
6.5 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire.This symbol corresponds to that
tire’s designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
3. Checking tire life (TIN :Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over six years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1616 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2016.
Speed
Rating
Symbol
Maximum Speed
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
7-49
7
Maintenance
4.Tire ply composition and
material
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible infla-
tion pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire.Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREAD wear 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
7-50
Maintenance
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
Temperature - A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grade C
responds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
tory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, over-inflation,
or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination,
can cause heat build-up and
possible sudden tire failure.
This may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
WARNING
7-51
7
Maintenance
Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Air Pressure
The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight
This means the combined weight of
optional accessories. Some exam-
ples of optional accessories are
automatic transmission, power
seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio
The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
Belt
A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the
tread.Cords may be made from steel
or other reinforcing materials.
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires
wrapped by steel cords that hold the
tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire
A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of the
tread.
Cold Tire Pressure
The amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire
has built up heat from driving.
Curb Weight
This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional
equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings
A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in com-
pliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code includes
the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which
can also identify the tire manufactur-
er, production plant, brand and date
of production.
7-52
Maintenance
GVWR
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT
Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Front Axle.
GAWR RR
Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Rear axle.
Intended Outboard Sidewall
The side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa)
The metric unit for air pressure.
Light truck(LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer
as primarily intended for use on light-
weight trucks or multipurpose pas-
senger vehicles.
Load ratings
The maximum load that a tire is rated
to carry for a given inflation pressure.
Load Index
An assigned number ranging from 1
to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum air pressure to which
a cold tire may be inflated.The max-
imum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating
The load rating for a tire at the maxi-
mum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight
The number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by 150
pounds (68 kg).
Occupant Distribution
Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall
An asymmetrical tire has a particular
side that faces outward when mount-
ed on a vehicle. The outward facing
sidewall bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) tire
A tire used on passenger cars and
some light duty trucks and multipur-
pose vehicles.
Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords
7-53
7
Maintenance
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber,
chemicals, fabric and steel or other
materials, that, when mounted on an
automotive wheel provides the trac-
tion and contains the gas or fluid that
sustains the load.
Pneumatic options weight
The combined weight of installed
regular production options weighing
over 5lb. (2.3kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace,
not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, includ-
ing heavy duty breaks, ride levelers,
roof rack, heavy duty battery, and
special trim.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommend-
ed tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Rim
A metal support for a tire and upon
which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall
The portion of a tire between the
tread and the bead.
Speed Rating
An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
Traction
The friction between the tire and the
road surface.The amount of grip pro-
vided.
Tread
The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators
Narrow bands, sometimes called
"wear bars", that show across the
tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch of
tread remains.
UTQGS
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards is a tire information sys-
tem that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, tempera-
ture and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing proce-
dures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight
The number of designated seating
positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68
kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage
load.
7-54
Maintenance
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire
Load on an individual tire due to curb
and accessory weight plus maximum
occupant and cargo weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight and dividing by 2.
Vehicle Placard
A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the original equip-
ment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure.
All Season Tires
HYUNDAI specifies all season tires
on some models to provide good
performance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall.Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer Tires
HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on
some models to provide superior
performance on dry roads. Summer
tire performance is substantially
reduced in snow and ice. Summer
tires do not have the tire traction rat-
ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
side wall. If you plan to operate your
vehicle in snowy or icy conditions,
HYUNDAI recommends the use of
snow tires or all season tires on all
four wheels.
Snow Tires
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; other-
wise, poor handling may result.Snow
tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)
more air pressure than the pressure
recommended for the standard tires
on the tire label on the driver’s side of
the center pillar, or up to the maxi-
mum pressure shown on the tire
sidewall, whichever is less. Do not
drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h)
when your vehicle is equipped with
snow tires.
7-55
7
Maintenance
Radial-Ply Tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radi-
al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of
belted construction, and are selected
to complement the ride and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size, and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combina-
tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling.The best rule to fol-
low is: Identical pairs of radial-ply
tires should always be used as a set
for the front tires and a set for the
rear tires.
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval in this chapter to
achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
Low Aspect Ratio Tires
Low aspect ratio tires, the aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because low aspect ratio tires are
optimized for handling and braking, it
may be more uncomfortable to ride
in and there is more noise compare
with normal tires.
Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances.This may cause unusu-
al handling characteristics that
may cause loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident.
WARNING
7-56
Maintenance
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easi-
er to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not dam-
aged.
- If the tire is impacted, we rec-
ommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 1,800 miles
(3,000km).
CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize tire
damage with your own eyes.
But if there is the slightest
hint of tire damage, have the
tire checked or replaced
because the tire damage may
cause air leakage from the
tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driv-
ing on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
CAUTION
7-57
7
Maintenance
FFUUSSEESS
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam-
age by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,
one located in the driver's side panel
bolster, the other in the engine com-
partment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle's lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will be melted or broken.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver's side
fuse panel. Before replacing a blown
fuse, turn the engine and all switches
off, and then disconnect the negative
battery cable. Always replace a
blown fuse with one of the same rat-
ing.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem.Avoid
using the system involved and imme-
diately consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, car-
tridge type, and fusible link for higher
amperage ratings.
i
Normal
■ Blade type
■ Cartridge type
Blown
Normal
Blown
Normal
Blown
OLF074075
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.
CAUTION
NEVER replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly
cause a fire.
• Do not install a wire or alu-
minum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a tem-
porary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
possibly a fire.
WARNING
Normal
Blown
■ Multi fuse
7-58
Maintenance
Instrument Panel Fuse
Replacement
1.Turn the engine off.
2.Turn all other switches OFF.
3. Open the fuse panel cover.
4. Refer to the label on the inside of
the fuse panel cover to locate the
suspected fuse location.
5. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
in the engine compartment fuses
panel.
6. Check the removed fuse;replace it
if it is blown. Spare fuses are pro-
vided in the instrument panel fuse
panels (or in the engine compart-
ment fuse panel).
7. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
In an emergency, if you do not have
a spare fuse, use a fuse of the same
rating from a circuit you may not
need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigarette lighter fuse.
If the headlamps or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse panel
in the engine compartment. If a fuse
is blown, it must be replaced with the
same rating.
OLF074021
OLF074022
7-59
7
Maintenance
Fuse switch
Always, place the fuse switch to the
ON position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as the
audio system and digital clock must
be reset and the smart key may not
work properly.
Information
If the fuse switch is OFF, the above
message will appear.
• Always place the fuse switch in
the ON position while driving the
vehicle.
• Do not move the transportation
fuse switch repeatedly. The fuse
switch may be damaged.
Engine Compartment Panel
Fuse Replacement
1.Turn the engine off.
2.Turn all other switches OFF.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tap and pulling up.
4. Check the removed fuse;replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
i
OLF074023 OLF044148L
OLF074024
7-60
Maintenance
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling it up.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
Information
If the main fuse is blown, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1.Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling it up.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
Information
If the multi fuse is blown, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
i
OLF074025 OLF074026
7-61
7
Maintenance
Fuse/Relay Panel Description
Instrument panel fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you
can find the fuse/relay label describ-
ing fuse/relay name and capacity.
Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle; the information is accurate at
the time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to
the fuse box label.
i
OLF074058N
OLF074027
7-62
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse panel
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
SAFETY WINDOW LH 25A Driver Safety Power Window Module
P/SEAT PASS 30A Passenger Seat Manual Switch
P/WDW LH 20A Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Module LH
P/WDW RH 25A
Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Module RH, Passenger Door Module,
Passenger Power Window Switch
DR LOCK 20A Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay
S/HEATER FRT 25A Front Air Ventilation Seat Module, Front Seat Warmer Module
BRAKE SWITCH 10A Stop Lamp Switch, Immobilizer Module, Smart Key Control Module
8
MODULE 7.5A BCM, Smart Key Control Module
SAFETY POWER WINDOW
RH
25A Passenger Safety Power Window Module
SMART KEY 15A Smart Key Control Module
TRUNK 10A Trunk Lid Relay, Fuel Filler Door & Trunk Lid Switch
7
MODULE 10A Digital Clock, Driver/Passenger Door Module
INTERIOR LAMP 10A
Glove Box Lamp, Ignition Key Illumination & Door Warning Switch,
Front Vanity Lamp Switch LH/RH, Overhead Console Lamp, Room Lamp,
Rear Personal Lamp LH/RH, Trunk Room Lamp, Driver/Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle,
Driver/Passenger Door Lamp
2
MEMORY 7.5A -
P/SEAT DRV 30A Driver Seat Manual Switch, Driver IMS Module
CLUSTER 10A Instrument Cluster
7-63
7
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse panel
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
4
MODULE 10A Immobilizer Module, Smart Key Control Module
MULTI MEDIA 15A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, TMU Unit
1
MEMORY 10A Immobilizer Module, Smart Key Control Module
S/HEATER RR 25A Rear Seat Warmer Module
2
SUN ROOF 20A Panoramic Sunroof Motor
9
MODULE 7.5A Front Air Ventilation Seat Module, Front Seat Warmer Module, Rear Seat Warmer Module
MDPS 7.5A MDPS Unit (Column Type/Rack Type)
3
MODULE 10A BCM, Sport Mode Switch, Stop Lamp Switch
STOP LAMP 20A Stop Signal Electronic Module
1
MODULE 7.5A Key Solenoid, Driver/Passenger Door Module
1
SUN ROOF 20A Panoramic Sunroof Motor
A/CON 7.5A A/C Control Module, E/R Junction Block (RLY. 3 - Blower Relay)
2
MODULE 10A
Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, TMU Unit, Digital Clock, BCM, AMP,
Power Outside Mirror Switch, Smart Key Control Module, Overhead Console Lamp,
E/R Junction Block (RLY. 5 - Power Outlet Relay)
A/BAG IND 7.5A Instrument Cluster
6
MODULE 10A
Multipurpose Check Connector, A/C Control Module, TMU Unit, A/V & Navigation Head Unit,
Electro Chromic Mirror, Front Air Ventilation Seat Module, Front Seat Warmer Module,
Rear Seat Warmer Module, Driver IMS Module, A/T Shift Lever IND.
AMP 25A AMP (JBL/MOBIS)
HTD STRG 15A BCM
7-64
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse panel
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
5
MODULE 10A
Front Console Switch, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Lane Departure Warning Unit,
Smart Cruise Control Unit, Fuel Filler Door & Trunk Lid Switch, Sport Mode Switch,
Rear Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH, Rear Parking Assist Sensor, LH/RH (Center),
Blind Spot Detection Radar LH/RH
IG1 25A PCB Block
WASHER 15A Multifunction Switch (Wiper Low & Washer Switch)
POWER OUTLET 20A Front Power Outlet
A/BAG 15A SRS Control Module, Occupant Detection Sensor
START 7.5A
[Without Smart Key & Immobilzer] ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Relay),
Immobilzer] ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Relay), Transaxle Range Switch,
PCM (G4KJ/G4KH)
7-65
7
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you
can find the fuse/relay label describ-
ing fuse/relay name and capacity.
Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle; the information is accurate at
the time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to
the fuse panel label.
i
OLF074057N
OLF074028
7-66
Maintenance
Engine compartment main fuse panel
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
MULTI
FUSE
(TYPE A)
IG2 30A
[Without Smart Key] Relay 8 (Start Relay), Ignition Switch,
[With Smart Key] Relay 8 (Start Relay), PCB Block (IG2 Relay)
3
TCU 40A [G4FJ - DCT] TCM
BLOWER 40A Relay 3 (Blower Relay)
1
ABS 40A ESC Module
REAR HEATED 50A Relay 1 (Rear Heated Relay)
1
B+ 50A Smart Junction Block (IPS2 (4CH), IPS3 (4CH), Fuse - F28/F29)
1
COOLING FAN 50A [G4KH/G4FJ] Relay 11 (Cooling Fan Relay), [G4KJ] Relay 12 (Cooling Fan Relay)
2
COOLING FAN 60A [G4KH/G4FJ] Relay 12 (Cooling Fan Relay)
1
MDPS 80A MDPS Unit (Column Type)
MULTI
FUSE
(TYPE B)
2
ABS 30A ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
IG1 40A [Without Smart Key] Ignition Switch, [With Smart Key] PCB Block (IG1/ACC Relay)
4
TCU 40A [G4FJ - DCT] TCM
3
POWER OUTLET 40A Relay 5 (Power Outlet Relay)
2
B+ 50A Smart Junction Block (IPS1 (4CH), IPS4 (4CH), IPS5 (4CH), Fuse - F36)
5
B+ 60A PCB Block (Engine Control Relay, Fuse - F4/F5/F6/F13/F14/F22)
1
B+ 60A
Smart Junction Block (Power Window Relay, Fuse -
F1/F2/F3/F4/F10/F13/F17/F23/F24/F30)
2
MDPS 100A MDPS Unit (Rack Type)
7-67
7
Maintenance
Engine compartment main fuse panel
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
FUSE
3
E-CVVT 20A [G4KJ/G4KH] PCM
2
E-CVVT 20A [G4KJ/G4KH] PCM
DEICER 20A Relay 5 (Deicer Relay)
H/LAMP HI 20A [With HID] Relay 5 (Head Lamp High Relay)
1
VACUUM PUMP 20A [G4KH/G4FJ] Vacuum Pump
1
E-CVVT 40A [G4KJ/G4KH] Relay 9 (E-CVVT Relay)
4
B+ 40A
Smart Junction Block (Leak Current Autocut Device Fuse - F15/F21/F22,
Fuse - F5/F6/F7/F12)
A/CON 10A A/C Control Module
HEATED MIRROR 10A ECM (G4FJ), A/C Control Module, Drover/Passenger Power Outside Mirror
2
VACUUM PUMP 10A [G4KH/G4FJ] Vacuum Pump
3
ECU 10A PCM/ECM
1
POWER OUTLET 20A Cigarette Lighter
FUEL PUMP 20A Fuel Pump Relay
HORN 20A Horn Relay, ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Horn Relay)
WIPER 30A Front Wiper (Low) Relay, Front Wiper (High) Relay
2
TCU 15A Transaxle Range Switch, TCM (G4FJ-DCT)
3
ABS 10A ESC Module, MDPS Unit
2
POWER OUTLET 20A Rear Power Outlet
7-68
Maintenance
Engine compartment main fuse panel
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
FUSE
B/UP LAMP 10A
Transaxle Range Switch, PCM (G4KJ/G4KH-A/T), TCM (G4FJ-DCT), Audio,
Electro Chromic Mirror, Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH
1
SENSOR 15A Oxygen Sensor (Up/Down)
2
SENSOR 15A
Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Canister Close Valve, RCV Control Solenoid Valve,
Fuel Pump Relay, E/R Junction Block (RLY. 12 - Cooling Fan 2 Relay),
[G4KJ/G4KH] Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, Oil Control Valve (Exhaust),
[G4FJ] Oil Control Valve #1/#2 (Intake/Exhaust)
1
ECU 10A PCM/ECM
1
TCU 10A PCM (G4KJ/G4KH-A/T), TCM (G4FJ-DCT)
1
ECU 10A PCM/ECM
IGN COIL 20A Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4, Condenser (G4FJ)
INJECTOR 15A -
AMS 10A Battery Sensor
7-69
7
Maintenance
LLIIGGHHTT BBUULLBBSS
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer to replace most vehicle light
bulbs. It is difficult to replace vehicle
light bulbs because other parts of the
vehicle must be removed before you
can get to the bulb.This is especially
true for removing the headlamp
assembly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlamp
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
Information
After heavy driving, rain or washing,
headlamp and trunk lenses could
appear frosty. This condition is caused
by the temperature difference
between the lamp inside and the out-
side temperature. This is similar to the
condensation on your windows inside
your vehicle during the rain and does-
n’t indicate a problem with your vehi-
cle. If the water leaks into the lamp
bulb circuitry, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
i
• Prior to replacing a lamp,
depress the foot brake, move
the shift lever into P (Park)
apply the parking brake, place
the igntion switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, and take
the key with you when leaving
the vehicle to avoid sudden
movement of the vehicle and
to prevent possible electric
shock.
• Be aware the bulbs may be
hot and may burn your fin-
gers.
WARNING
7-70
Maintenance
Headlamp, Position Lamp,
Turn Signal Lamp and
Side Marker Light Bulb
Replacement
Type A
(1) Headlamp (Low)
(2) Headlamp (High)
(3) Side marker
(4) Turn signal lamp
(5) Daytime running lamp/
Position lamp
Headlamp (Halogen bulb)
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids.
• Never touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause the
bulb to overheat and burst when lit.
• A bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
OLF074051N
OLMB073042L
• Handle halogen bulbs with
care. Halogen bulbs contain
pressurized gas that will pro-
duce flying pieces of glass
that could cause injuries if
broken.
• Wear eye protection when
changing a bulb. Allow the
bulb to cool down before han-
dling it.
WARNING
7-71
7
Maintenance
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the headlamp bulb
socket-connector.
5. Unsnap the headlamp bulb retain-
ing wire by pressing the end and
pushing it upward.
6. Remove the bulb from the head-
lamp assembly.
7. Install a new headlamp bulb and
snap the headlamp bulb retaining
wire into position by aligning the
wire with the groove on the bulb.
8. Connect the headlamp bulb sock-
et-connector.
9. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
Information
The headlamp aiming should be
adjusted after an accident or after the
headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Turn signal lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
i
OLF074102MX
OLF074103MX
■ Low beam
■ High beam
OLF074052
7-72
Maintenance
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
7. Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
Side marker
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pulling out the bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb.
Daytime running lamp/
Position lamp
If the LED lamp does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OLF074084N
7-73
7
Maintenance
Type B
(1) Headlamp (Low/High)
(2) Side marker
(3) Turn signal lamp
(4) Daytime running lamp/
Position lamp
Type C
(1) Headlamp (Low)
(2) Headlamp (High/DRL)
(3) Side marker
(4) Turn signal lamp/Position lamp
Headlamp (HID type)
Information
If your vehicle is equipped with High
Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps,
these headlamps contain mercury. So
if you need to have your vehicle dis-
posed, you should remove the HID
Headlamps before disposal. The
removed HID headlamps should be
recycled, re-used or disposed as haz-
ardous waste.
If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
OLF074051N
OLF074051N
HID Headlamp low beam
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON
bulb) due to electric shock dan-
ger. If the low beam (XENON
bulb) is not working, have your
vehicle checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI Dealer.
WARNING
7-74
Maintenance
Information
HID lamps have superior perform-
ance vs. halogen bulbs.
HID lamps are estimated by the man-
ufacturer to last twice as long or
longer than halogen bulbs depending
on their frequency of use. They will
probably require replacement at some
point in the life of the vehicle. Cycling
the headlamps on and off more than
typical use will shorten HID lamps
life. HID lamps do not fail in the same
manner as halogen incandescent
lamps. If a headlamp goes out after a
period of operation but will immedi-
ately relight when the headlamp
switch is cycled it is likely the HID
lamp needs to be replaced. HID light-
ing components are more complex
than conventional halogen bulbs thus
have higher replacement cost.
The headlamp aiming should be
adjusted after an accident or after
the headlamp assembly is rein-
stalled at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Turn signal lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
7. Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
NOTICE
i
OLF074052
7-75
7
Maintenance
Side marker
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pulling out the bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb.
Daytime running lamp/
Position lamp
If the LED lamp does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Side Repeater Lamp
Replacement
If the LED lamp does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OLF074084N
OLF074053N
7-76
Maintenance
Rear Combination Light Bulb
Replacement
Type A
(1) Stop/Tail lamp
(2) Turn signal lamp
(3) Tail lamp
(4) Back-up lamp
Stop/Tail lamp and Turn signal lamp
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the service cover by turn-
ing the lock counterclockwise and
then pulling it out.
3.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket.
Pull the bulb out of the socket.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
OLF074063OLF074062
Stop/Tail lamp
Turn Signal lamp
OLF074060
7-77
7
Maintenance
Backup lamp and Tail lamp
1. Open the trunk.
2. Loosen the retaining screw of the
trunk lid cover and then remove
the cover.
3.Disconnect the connector and
then remove the screws by turning
the screws counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket into the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
7. Reinstall the trunk lid cover by
pushing in the screw.
Type B
(1) Stop/Tail lamp
(2) Turn signal lamp
(3) Back-up lamp
OLF074065OLF074064
Back up
lamp
Tail lamp
OLF074054
7-78
Maintenance
Stop/Tail lamp
If the LED lamp does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Turn signal lamp
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the service cover by turn-
ing the lock counterclockwise and
then pulling it out.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it coun-
terclockwise until the tabs on the
bulb align with the slots in the sock-
et. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
OLF074062 OLF074063N
Turn signal lamp
7-79
7
Maintenance
Backup lamp
1. Open the trunk.
2. Loosen the retaining screw of the
trunk lid cover and then remove
the cover.
3.Disconnect the connector and
then remove the screws by turning
the screws counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket into the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
7. Reinstall the trunk lid cover by
pushing in the screw.
High Mounted Stop Lamp
1. Remove the rear seat cushion
assembly.
2. Remove the rear seat back
assembly.
3. Slightly remove the rear door
weather-strip.
4. Remove the rear door scuff trim.
5. Remove the rear pillar trim.
6. Remove the rear seat belt lower
anchor.
7. Remove the rear package tray trim.
8. Remove the high mounted stop
lamp after disengaging the mount-
ing clip.
9. Install a new LED lamp.
OLF074064
OLF074065N
Back up lamp
OLF074055
7-80
Maintenance
License Plate Light Bulb
Replacement
1. Loosen the lens retaining screws
with a philips head screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens securely with
the lens retaining screws.
Interior Light Bulb
Replacement
Map lamp and Room lamp
If the LED lamp does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OLF074066
OLF074080N
OLF076080N
OLF074068
■ Map lamp - with sunroof
• Type A
• Type B
■ Room lamp - with sunroof
7-81
7
Maintenance
1.Using a flat-head screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interi-
or light housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
If the lamps do not operating, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Use care not to dirty or damage
lenses, lens tabs, and plastic
housings.
NOTICE
■ Map lamp - without sunroof
OLF074081N
OLF074082N
■ Vanity mirror lamp
■ Trunk room lamp
OLF074069
OLF074056
■ Room lamp - without sunroof
Map lamp, Room lamp,Vanity mirror lamp and Luggage room lamp
7-82
Maintenance
AAPPPPEEAARRAANNCCEE CCAARREE
Exterior Care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure wash-
ers, make sure to maintain suffi-
cient distance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component
damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors
or its surrounding area directly with
a high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure water
may cause the device to not oper-
ate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers)or
connectors as they may be dam-
aged if they come into contact with
high pressure water.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign
materials. Make sure the drain holes
in the lower edges of the doors and
rocker panels are kept clear and
clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain
water may not completely remove all
these deposits. A mild soap, safe for
use on painted surfaces, should be
used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the fin-
ish.
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water before getting on the
road. If braking performance is
impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
WARNING
7-83
7
Maintenance
Waxing
A good coat of wax is a barrier
between your paint and contaminate.
Keeping a good coat of wax on your
vehicle will help protect it.
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to main-
tain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-
als with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need wax-
ing.
OLMB073082
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap,
chemical detergents or hot
water, and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight or
when the body of the vehicle
is warm.
• Be careful when washing the
side windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through
the windows and wet the inte-
rior.
• To prevent damage to the
plastic parts, do not clean
with chemical solvents or
strong detergents.
CAUTION
7-84
Maintenance
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body
shop applies anti-corrosion mate-
rials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preser-
vative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, acceler-
ated rusting can occur on underbody
parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
though they have been treated with
rust protection.
NOTICE
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abra-
sive cleaners, or strong deter-
gents containing highly alka-
line or caustic agents on
chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may
result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause dis-
coloration or paint deteriora-
tion.
CAUTION
7-85
7
Maintenance
Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-
body and wheel openings with luke-
warm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end
of each winter. Pay special attention
to these areas because it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it.
The lower edges of doors, rocker
panels, and frame members have
drain holes that should not be
allowed to clog with dirt; trapped
water in these areas can cause rust-
ing.
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated with
a clear protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corro-
sion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, HYUNDAI produces cars
of the highest quality.However, this is
only part of the job. To achieve the
long-term corrosion resistance your
vehicle can deliver, the owner’s
cooperation and assistance is also
required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corro-
sion on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abra-
sion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water.If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
WARNING
• Do not use abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent,
or wire brushes on aluminum
wheels.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neu-
tral detergent, and rinse thor-
oughly with water. Also, clean
the wheels after driving on
salted roads.
• Do not wash the wheels with
high-speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any cleaners con-
taining acid or alkaline deter-
gents.
CAUTION
7-86
Maintenance
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehi-
cle is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated cor-
rosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, partic-
ularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in con-
tact with the car surfaces by moisture
that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it is slow to dry and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also acceler-
ate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these rea-
sons, it is particularly important to
keep your vehicle clean and free of
mud or accumulations of other mate-
rials.This applies not only to the vis-
ible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your vehicle clean and free
of corrosive materials. Attention to
the underside of the vehicle is partic-
ularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your vehicle at least
once a month and be sure to clean
the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
7-87
7
Maintenance
• When cleaning underneath the
vehicle, pay particular attention to
the components under the fenders
and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just
dampening the accumulated mud
rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly
effective in removing accumulated
mud and corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members,
be sure that drain holes are kept
open so that moisture can escape
and not be trapped inside to accel-
erate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don’t park your car in a damp, poor-
ly ventilated garage. This creates a
favorable environment for corrosion.
This is particularly true if you wash
your vehicle in the garage or drive it
into the garage when it is still wet or
covered with snow, ice or mud. Even
a heated garage can contribute to
corrosion unless it is well ventilated
so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the atten-
tion of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings are highly corrosive
and may damage painted surfaces in
just a few hours. Always remove bird
droppings as soon as possible.
Interior Care
Interior general precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as
perfume and cosmetic oil, from con-
tacting the interior parts because
they may cause damage or discol-
oration. If they do contact the interior
parts, wipe them off immediately.
See the instructions for the proper
way to clean vinyl.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
• When cleaning leather prod-
ucts (steering wheel, seats
etc.), use neutral detergents
or low alcohol content solu-
tions. If you use high alcohol
content solutions or acid/
alkaline detergents, the color
of the leather may fade or the
surface may get stripped off.
CAUTION
7-88
Maintenance
Cleaning the upholstery and
interior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner.Clean with a mild soap solu-
tion recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected.Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained.
Cleaning the seat belt webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken
the seat belt.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
Using anything but recom-
mended cleaners and proce-
dures may affect the fabric’s
appearance and fire-resistant
properties.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage to the rear
window defroster grid.
CAUTION
7-89
7
Maintenance
EEMMIISSSSIIOONN CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the Owner’s
Handbook & Warranty Information
booklet in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys-
tem
(2) Evaporative emission control sys-
tem
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
vehicle inspected and maintained by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in
accordance with the maintenance
schedule in this manual.
1. Crankcase Emission Control
System
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative Emission Control
System Including Onboard
Refueling Vapor Recovery
(ORVR)
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere. The ORVR system is
designed to allow the vapors from
the fuel tank to be loaded into a can-
ister while refueling at the gas sta-
tion, preventing the escape of fuel
vapors into the atmosphere.
For the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from
misfiring during dynamome-
ter testing, turn the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) sys-
tem off by pressing the ESC
switch (ESC OFF light illumi-
nated).
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC sys-
tem back on by pressing the
ESC switch again.
CAUTION
7-90
Maintenance
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister.When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control sole-
noid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-
orated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms-up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
3. Exhaust Emission Control
System
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle per-
formance.
When the engine starts or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to the
emission system.
Vehicle modifications
• This vehicle should not be modi-
fied. Modification of your vehicle
could affect its performance, safety
or durability and may even violate
governmental safety and emis-
sions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modifi-
cation may not be covered under
warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire.For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
Engine exhaust (carbon monox-
ide) precautions
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes. If you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind in
your vehicle, drive with all the win-
dows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poi-
soning.
WARNING
7-91
7
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in con-
fined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
Operating precautions for cat-
alytic converters (if equipped)
The exhaust system and cat-
alytic converter are very hot
during and immediately after
the engine has been running.To
avoid SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
• Do not park, idle, or drive the
vehicle over or near flamma-
ble objects, such as grass,
vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.
A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle.
• Keep away from the exhaust
system and catalytic convert-
er or you may get burned.
Also, Do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust sys-
tem, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle, and do not coat
the vehicle for corrosion con-
trol. It may present a fire risk
under certain conditions.
WARNING
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide vari-
ety of automobile components
and parts, including compo-
nents found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or
emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects and repro-
ductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain or emit chem-
icals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm.
WARNING
7-92
Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-
alytic converter emission control
device.
To prevent damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle, take
the following precautions:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL
for gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle
when there are signs of
engine malfunction, such as
misfire or a noticeable loss of
performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse
are coasting with the engine
off and descending steep
grades in gear with the engine
off.
• Do not operate the engine at
high idle speed for extended
periods (5 minutes or more).
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
• Do not modify or tamper with
any part of the engine or
emission control system. All
inspections and adjustments
must be made by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Avoid driving with extremely
low fuel level. If you run out of
gasoline, it could cause the
engine to misfire and result in
excessive loading of the cat-
alytic converter.
7-93
7
Maintenance
CCAALLIIFFOORRNNIIAA PPEERRCCHHLLOORRAATTEE NNOOTTIICCEE
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:
Perchlorate containing materials, such as air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless remote entry batteries,
must be disposed of according to Title 22 California Code of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).
888
Specifications & Consumer information
8
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
8
Engine......................................................................8-2
Dimensions..............................................................8-2
Bulb Wattage ..........................................................8-3
Tires and Wheels ...................................................8-4
Volume and Weight................................................8-5
Air Conditioning System........................................8-5
Recommended Lubricants and Capacities..........8-6
Recommended SAE Viscosity Number.........................8-8
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...................8-9
Vehicle Certification Label....................................8-9
Tire Specification and Pressure Label .............8-10
Engine Number.....................................................8-10
Refrigerant Label.................................................8-10
Consumer Information.........................................8-11
Reporting Safety Defects ...................................8-12
DDIIMMEENNSSIIOONNSS
8-2
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
EENNGGIINNEE
Items in (mm)
Overall length 191.1 (4,855)
Overall width 73.4 (1,865)
Overall height 58.1 (1,475)
Front tread
205/65R16 63.5 (1,614)
215/55R17 63.1 (1,602)
235/45R18 62.9 (1,597)
Rear tread
205/65R16 63.8 (1,621)
215/55R17 63.3 (1,609)
235/45R18 63.3 (1,609)
Wheelbase 110.4 (2,805)
Items 1.6 T-GDI 2.0 T-GDI 2.4 GDI
Displacement
cu. in (cc)
97.09 (1,591) 121.92 (1,998) 143.96 (2,359)
Bore x Stroke
in. (mm)
3.03x3.36 (77x85.4) 3.39x3.39 (86x86) 3.46x3.82 (88x97)
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders 4, In-line 4, In-line 4, In-line
BBUULLBB WWAATTTTAAGGEE
8-3
88
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Light Bulb Bulb Type Wattage (W)
Front
Headlamps
Type A
Low 9005L+ 65
High 9005HL+ 65
Type B Low/High D3S 35
Turn signal lamps PY28/8W 28
Position lamps
Type A, B LED LED
Type C PY28/8W 8
Daytime running lights
Type A, B LED LED
Type C 9005HL+ 65
Side repeater lamps LED LED
Side marker lamps W5W 5
Rear
Rear combina-
tion lamp
Type A
(Bulb)
Stop/Tail lamps (Outside) P28/8W 28/8
Tail lamp - 8
Type B
(LED)
Stop/Tail lamps (Outside) LED LED
Stop/Tail lamps (Inside) LED LED
All
Turn signal lamps PY27W 27
Back up lamps W16 16
High mounted stop lamp LED LED
License plate lamps W5W 5
Interior
Luggage room lamp Festoon 10
Map lamps
with sunroof LED LED
without sunroof W10W 10
Room lamps
with panorama sunroof LED LED
without sunroof, conventional sunroof Festoon 10
Vanity mirror lamps Festoon 10
8-4
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
TTIIRREESS AANNDD WWHHEEEELLSS
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or not work properly.
CAUTION
If your vehicle is not equipped with a compact spare tire, your vehicle will be equipped with a Tire Mobility Kit.
Items Tire Size Wheel Size
Inflation pressure
kPa (psi)
Wheel lug nut
torque kgf•m
(lbf
•ft, N.m)
Normal Load Maximum Load
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire
205/65R16 6.5JX16 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34)
9~11
(65~79, 88~107)
215/55R17 7.0JX17 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34)
235/45R18 7.5JX18 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34)
Compact spare tire
(if equipped)
T125/80D16 4.0TX16 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)
T135/80D17 4.0TX17 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)
• It is permissible to add 3 psi to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expect-
ed soon.
Tires typically loose 1psi (7kPa) for every 12°F temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are
expected, recheck your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.
• An air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude area above sea level.Thus, if you
plan to drive a high-altitude area, check the tire pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a prop-
er level. (Air inflation per altitude : +2.4 psi/1 mile)
NOTICE
VVOOLLUUMMEE AANNDD WWEEIIGGHHTT
8-5
88
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for more details.
Items 1.6 T-GDI 2.0 T-GDI 2.4 GDI
Gross vehicle weight
lbs. (kg)
4321 (1960) 4630 (2100) 4497 (2040)
Luggage volume
cu ft (l)
16.3 cu ft (462
l
)
Items Weight of Volume Classification
Refrigerant
oz. (g)
1.6 T-GDI 18.5±0.70 (525±20)
R-134a2.0 T-GDI 18.5±0.70 (525±20)
2.4 GDI 20.2±0.70 (575±20)
Compressor lubricant
oz. (cc)
2.82±0.35 (80±10) PAG (ND-OIL8)
8-6
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
RREECCOOMMMMEENNDDEEDD LLUUBBRRIICCAANNTTSS AANNDD CCAAPPAACCIITTIIEESS
*
1
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*
2
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*
3
If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *
1
*
2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
1.6 T-GDI
4.75 US qt. (4.5
l
)
API Service SM*
3
or above / ILSAC GF-4 or above /
ACEA A5 or above
2.0 T-GDI
5.07 US qt. (4.8
l
) ACEA A5 or above
2.4 GDI 5.07 US qt. (4.8
l
)
API Service SM*
3
or above / ILSAC GF-4 or above /
ACEA A5 or above
Automatic transmission fluid
7.50 US qt. (7.1
l
)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV / SK ATF SP-IV /
NOCA ATF SP-IV / HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV or
other brands meeting the above specification
approved by Hyundai Motor Co.,
Dual clutch transmission fluid
2.00 US qt. (1.9
l
)
SK HK MTF 70W /
H.K.SHELL SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W /
GS CALTEX GS MTF HD 70W
Use the Dual Clutch Fluid approved by HYUNDAI
Motor Company. Consult and authorized Hyundai
dealer for details.
8-7
88
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Lubricant Volume Classification
Coolant
1.6 T-GDI
7.50 US qt. (7.1
l
)
Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)
2.0 T-GDI
7.92 US qt. (7.5
l
)
2.4 GDI
7.60 US qt. (7.2
l
)
Brake fluid
0.7~0.8 US qt. (0.7~0.8
l
) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel 18.5 US gal. (70
l
) Unleaded gasoline
8-8
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has
an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (engine start and
engine oil flowability). Lower viscosi-
ty engine oils can provide better fuel
economy and cold weather perform-
ance, however, higher viscosity
engine oils are required for satisfac-
tory lubrication in hot weather. Using
oils of any viscosity other than those
recommended could result in engine
damage.
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain
plug, or dipstick before check-
ing or draining any lubricant.
This is especially important in
dusty or sandy areas and when
the vehicle is used on unpaved
roads. Cleaning the plug and
dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the
engine and other mechanisms
that could be damaged.
CAUTION
When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be
operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended
oil viscosity from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Engine Oil
(1.6 T-GDI) *
1
Engine Oil
(2.0 T-GDI)
Engine Oil
(2.4 GDI) *
2
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
°C
(°F)
5W-30, 5W-40
10W-30
15W-40
20W-50
5W-30, 5W-40
*
1
For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil
of a viscosity grade 5W-30 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4 / ACEA A5 or
above). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country,
select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
*
2
For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil
of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4).However,
if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper
engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
8-9
88
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
VVEEHHIICCLLEE CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN
LLAABBEELL
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in register-
ing your car and in all legal matters
pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the passenger seat. To check
the number, open the cover.
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
The vehicle certification label attached
on the driver's side center pillar gives
the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR ((VVIINN))
OLF084006N
■ VIN label (if equipped)
OLF084001
■ Frame number
OLF086002N
8-10
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
The tires supplied on your new vehi-
cle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pres-
sures recommended for your car.
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
The refrigerant label provides infor-
mation such as refrigerant type and
amount.
The label is located on the underside
of the hood.
EENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR RREEFFRRIIGGEERRAANNTT LLAABBEELL
((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
TTIIRREE SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN AANNDD
PPRREESSSSUURREE LLAABBEELL
OLF084007N
OLF084005N
OLF084008N
OLF084009N
OLF084004
■ 1.6 T-GDI
■ 2.4 GDI
■ 2.0 T-GDI
8-11
88
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Eastern Region:
Connecticut, Delaware,
Maine, Massachusetts, New
Hampshire, New Jersey, New York,
Pennsylvania, Rhode Island,
Vermont.
Eastern Region
1122 Cranbury South River Road
Jamesburg, NJ 08831
(800) 633-5151
Southern Region:
Florida, Georgia, Maryland, North
Carolina, South Carolina, Virginia,
West Virginia.
Southern Region
3025 Chastain Meadows Parkway
Suite 100 Marietta, GA 30066
(800) 633-5151
South Central Region:
Alabama, Arkansas, Louisiana,
Mississippi, New Mexico, Oklahoma,
Tennessee, Texas.
South Central Region
1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400
Coppell, TX 75019
(800) 633-5151
Central Region:
Illinois, Indiana, lowa, Kentucky,
Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska,
North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio,
Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri.
Central Region
1705 Sequoia Drive Aurora, Illinois
60506
(800) 633-5151
Western Region:
Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, California,
Colorado, Idaho, Montana, Nevada,
Oregon, Utah, Washington,
Wyoming.
Western Region
10550 Talbert Avenue P.O.Box
20850 Fountain Valley, California
92728-0850
(800) 633-5151
CCOONNSSUUMMEERR IINNFFOORRMMAATTIIOONN
This consumer information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration of the U.S.Department of Transportation.Your HYUNDAI dealer will help answer any questions you
may have as you read this information.
HYUNDAI motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety standards.
For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and follow all directions in this Owner’s Manual, particularly the
information under the headings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARNING".
If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, please contact your nearest
HYUNDAI Motor America Regional Office as listed in the following:
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying HYUNDAI
MOTOR AMERICA.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual prob-
lems between you, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Ave, SE,
West Building Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
RREEPPOORRTTIINNGG SSAAFFEETTYY DDEEFFEECCTTSS
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
8-12
